Skip to main content

Full text of "The Biblical Repertory and Princeton Review"

See other formats


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016  with  funding  from 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary  Library 


https://archive.org/details/biblicalrepertor3641  walk 


THE 


PRINCETON 

OCTOBER, 


REVIEW. 

1 864. 


No.  IV. 


/ — - 

Art.  I. — Francis  Bacon , of  Verulam.  Realistic  Philosophy , 
and  its  Age.  By  Kuno  Fischer.  Translated  from  the 
German,  by  John  Oxenford.  London,  1857. 

We  know  of  no  better  exposition  of  the  merits  and  defects  of 
the  Baconian  philosophy  than  this,  and  it  is  translated  in  a 
free,  luminous,  and  philosophical  style.  We  have  no  intention 
to  criticise  it,  or  even  to  sketch  a summary  of  its  contents ; 
those  who  have  a taste  for  the  subject,  and  have  not  entirely 
mastered  it,  ought  to  read  the  book.  The  merits  of  the  Induc- 
tive method  are  proved  by  the  immense  additions  it  has  made 
to  the  physical  sciences  since  it  has  been  brought  into  distinct 
practice.  Its  defects,  as  it  was  limited  by  Bacon  and  under- 
stood by  his  followers,  may  be  seen  in  its  influence  on  the 
mental  sciences  as  developed  or  degraded  by  Hobbes,  Locke, 
Berkeley,  Hume,  Bayle,  Voltaire,  Condillac,  Holbach,  Ilelve- 
tius,  and  others  of  the  materialist  school. 

The  natural  order  of  the  acquisition  of  knowledge  is,  first, 
that  of  the  phenomena  of  physical  nature  around  us,  and  after- 
wards that  of  our  mental  nature;  and  Bacon  fell  so  far  into 
this  order  that  he  unduly  fastened  the  intellect  to  the  leading- 
strings  of  physical  nature,  and  restricted  all  human  knowledge 
to  our  external  experience,  and  allowed  to  the  mind  no  inhe- 
vol.  xxxvi. — no.  iv.  74 


586 


Man  s Mental  Instincts. 


[October 


rent  character,  and  no  natural  laws,  tendencies,  faculties,  or 
capacities.  This  was  an  unnatural  and  arbitrary  limitation  of 
the  sphere  of  inductive  philosophy,  for  it  confined  all  philoso- 
phical investigation  to  the  objective  aspect  of  knowledge, 
rejecting  the  subjective;  and  logical  thinkers,  accepting  this 
limitation  as  a principle,  found  its  sphere  of  operation  con- 
tinually growing  by  their  deductions,  until  it  culminated  in  the 
blank  scepticism  of  Hume.  Our  author  traces  the  history  of 
this  with  great  skill  and  thoroughness. 

Of  course,  the  natural  and  untrained  logic  of  mankind  saved 
us  from  accepting  the  results  of  such  one-sided  investigations; 
and  the  moral  and  intellectual  world  still  moved  on,  sustained 
by  its  faith  in  its  God-given  capacities  to  learn,  and  instinc- 
tively set  aside,  or  simply  ignored  the  demonstration,  which  it 
could  not  then  answer,  that  there  existed  neither  mind  nor 
matter — beings  to  learn,  nor  things  to  be  learned.  Now,  how- 
ever, we  have  no  difficulty  in  seeing  that  all  knowledge  must 
result  from — or  we  should  rather  say  that  it  is — the  relation  of 
mind  with  things  and  facts,  and  other  minds,  and  from  their 
mutual  adaptation  to  the  production  of  knowledge;  and  that 
the  mind  is  no  empty  tablet,  or  clean-swept  threshing-floor, 
passively  receiving  the  things  and  facts,  or  the  impressions  and 
inscriptions  of  them,  which  the  world  may  chance  to  bring 
before  it. 

But,  defective  as  this  theory  was,  it  admitted  the  mind’s 
receptivity,  and  therefore,  that  thus  far,  at  least,  it  had  inhe- 
rent character  and  capacity ; and  inductive  science,  instead  of 
arbitrarily  limiting  the  mind  to  this,  ought  to  have  taken  the 
hint  which  the  admission  gave,  and  applied  itself  to  a more 
thorough  investigation.  We  might  as  well  expect  the  empty 
tablet  to  perform  the  work  of  the  type-founder  and  the  com- 
positor, and  the  threshing-floor  to  execute  the  functions  of  the 
mill  and  the  bakery,  as  to  expect  the  merely  receptive  capa- 
city of  the  mind  to  transform  its  sensuous  individual  impres- 
sions into  will,  sentiment,  language,  conceptions,  ideas,  and 
scientific  systems.  Even  the  passivity  of  the  cannon-ball  be- 
fore the  exploding  powder,  is  not  so  entire  as  to  dispense  with 
the  form,  weight,  and  texture  of  the  metal  that  fit  it  for  its 
purpose;  a cotton  ball  would  not  answer  there. 


Man's  Mental  Instincts. 


587 


1864.] 

Oar  author  does  not  attempt  to  show  us  the  way  out  of  the 
difficulties  caused  by  this  undue  limitation  put  upon  inductive 
philosophy  by  the  followers  of  Bacon ; but  he  promises  to  do 
so  in  a future  work,  that  is  to  be  devoted  to  Kant  and  his  fol- 
lowers. We  shall  await  its  appearance  with  much  hope;  yet 
not  without  some  misgivings,  derived  from  what  he  has  already 
written,  that  his  admiration  of  Kant  may  prevent  him  from 
perceiving  the  fundamental  errors  of  his  system.  Meantime 
we  venture  on  some  suggestions,  which  some  of  our  readers 
may  receive  as  indicating  the  way  in  which  the  mind  naturally 
sets  aside  the  arbitrary  limitations  imposed  by  materialistic 
philosophers,  without  falling  into  the  equally  arbitrary  abso- 
luteness of  idealism. 

We  have  nothing  new  to  offer;  but  we  may  present  old,  and 
really  very  common  thoughts,  in  a new  aspect,  and  with  more 
calculated  purpose  and  distinctness  than  have  been  devoted  to 
them  heretofore.  Our  appeal  is  to  the  natural  spontaneities  of 
the  human  mind,  and  we  shall  call  to  our  aid  other  natural 
spontaneities,  animal,  vegetable,  and  merely  material;  and  in 
doing  so  we  shall  not  distinguish  between  the  methods  of  in- 
duction and  analogy,  because  Bacon  has  not  distinguished 
them,  though  many  philosophers  regal’d  them  as  fundamentally 
different. 

These  natural  spontaneities  are  everywhere  observed,  and 
thus  they  become  elements  of  inductive  philosophy  in  every 
branch  of  real  science.  In  every  department  of  nature  we 
discover  that  there  are  certain  well-defined  tendencies  or 
spontaneous  activities,  which  are  always  in  operation,  pro- 
ducing the  most  minute  and  the  most  magnificent  results; 
tendencies,  and  activities,  of  which  science  cannot  discover 
the  origin  or  cause,  and  which  it  must  be  content  with  ob- 
serving as  facts,  recording  in  history,  and  classifying  into 
various  branches,  that  they  may  be  afterwards  comprehended 
by  philosophy. 

It  is  one  of  these  tendencies  or  spontaneous  activities,  called 
attraction  or  gravitation,  that  holds  the  earth  together,  bal- 
ances it  in  its  perennial  circles  round  the  sun,  and  maintains  the 
moving  order  of  the  universe.  It  is  the  basis  of  all  mechanical 
science,  enters  as  an  element  into  all  the  laws  of  motion,  and 


588 


Mari’s  Mental  Instincts. 


[October 


while  it  is  freely  used  and  applied  by  man,  the  safety  of  the 
world  requires  that  he  should  have  no  power  to  suspend  it. 
Analogous  to  this  tendency  are  the  attractions  of  electricity 
and  magnetism,  manifesting  themselves  in  endless  variety  in 
the  world’s  activity,  and  submitting  to  human  control  and 
application,  by  means  of  the  electrical  battery,  the  magnetic 
telegraph,  the  compass,  and  the  ordinary  artificial  magnet, 
and  abounding,  no  doubt,  in  yet  undiscovered  and  grander 
adaptations. 

And  at  the  very  foundation  of  chemical  science  lies  another 
of  these  spontaneous  activities  called  elective  affinity,  being  the 
tendency  which  particles  of  different  kinds  of  matter  have  to 
combine  so  as  to  form  new  bodies.  It  manifests  itself  according 
to  definite  laws,  very  many  of  -which  have  been  revealed  by 
modern  science,  and  only  under  proper  conditions  of  different 
bodies,  and  is  subject  to  great  modifications  under  the  influence 
of  light,  heat,  and  electricity,  and  had  it  no  existence  or  no  varia- 
bility, the  world  would  be  a barren  waste,  without  vegetable  or 
animal  life. 

Other  familiar  and  beautiful  examples  of  this  natural  sponta- 
neity are  found  in  crystallization,  or  the  process  by  which  par- 
ticles of  matter  come  together  and  cohere,  so  as  to  constitute 
bodies  of  a regular  form,  the  form  being  infinitely  various 
according  to  circumstances  and  conditions,  but  each  involving 
in  it  a primary  or  ground  form,  that  indicates  the  very  nature 
of  the  body,  and  which  is  itself  revealed  by  the  cleavage  or 
analysis  of  the  mineralogist. 

Let  this  suffice  for  indicating  the  spontaneities  of  inorganic 
matter  resulting  in  mere  inorganic  products,  countless  in  their 
magnitudes,  varieties,  and  beauties.  Rising  in  our  observa- 
tions to  the  systems  of  organized  bodies,  we  find  these  natural 
tendencies  becoming  still  more  obvious,  various,  beautiful,  and 
mysterious.  "We  see  them  in  the  bursting  seed,  the  descending 
root,  the  rising  stem,  the  leaf,  the  flower,  the  fruit,  and  pervad- 
ing all  and  essential  to  the  whole,  the  sap.  Spontaneously  the 
seed  grows,  according  to  its  kind  of  plant  or  tree,  if  it  be  placed 
in  conditions  that  allow  of  its  development,  however  imper- 
fectly, according  to  its  kind;  if  not,  its  tendency  becomes  a 
lost  germ  of  the  activities  of  nature,  a bird  without  its  mate? 


Mans  Mental  Instincts. 


589 


1864.] 


a soul  without  its  body,  an  absolute  without  a relative.  Sub- 
ject to  the  modifying  influences  of  varying  light,  soil,  position, 
and  cultivation,  the  seed,  in  its  growth,  will  take  the  peculiar 
form  of  its  species,  become  dressed  in  the  same  foliage,  adorned 
with  the  same  flowers,  bear  the  same  fruit;  the  varieties  pro- 
duced by  cultivation  not  being  regarded  as  affecting  identity 
of  species.  All  this  is  so  familiar  to  us  from  our  infancy,  that 
it  presents  no  mystery  until  we  begin  to  investigate  and  reason. 
To  reason  it  must  ever  remain  a mystery  how  the  splendour 
and  fragrance  of  the  rose  and  the  lily,  and  the  beauty  and  lus- 
ciousness of  the  peach  and  the  pear  are  produced;  for  reason  can 
never  look  beyond  tendencies  and  second  causes,  so  as  to  see  the 
Great  First  Cause  that  moves  and  directs  all  things. 

Again,  we  see  this  mysterious  spontaneity  in  the  climbing 
plant  or  shrub,  directing  its  growth  towards  the  object  that  it 
needs  for  its  support,  putting  forth  its  tendrils  to  take  hold  of 
it  when  it  begins  to  climb,  and  twining  around  it,  every  species 
in  its  own  direction,  from  left  to  right,  or  from  right  to  left. 
We  see  it  in  the  sensitive  plant,  shrinking  from  the  touch  of 
rudeness ; the  chickweed,  folding  its  leaflets  over  the  buds  of 
its  young  flowers  to  protect  them  from  the  cold;  the  saracenia 
and  Venus’  fly-trap,  closing  upon  the  insects  that  enter  their 
flowers,  and  retaining  and  digesting  them.  These  are  sponta- 
neous activities  that  compel  us  to  think  of  voluntary  actions; 
although  no  one  supposes  that  such  is  their  character.  They 
proceed  not  from  their  own  reason,  but  from  that  of  their  Cre- 
ator. We  might  enlarge  the  catalogue  of  these  natural  ten- 
dencies of  vegetable  life  indefinitely;  but  it  is  unnecessary. 

Rising  another  step  in  the  general  classification  of  created 
things,  we  find  these  natural  spontaneities  increased  in  number 
and  variety  in  the  animal  kingdom.  No  insect,  fish,  or  reptile, 
bird,  or  beast,  is  without  them.  All  the  process  of  growth,  the 
digestion  of  food,  the  formation  of  every  part  of  the  body,  the 
circulation  of  the  blood,  respiration  and  perspiration,  and  seek- 
ing after  food;  all  are  spontaneous  activities,  not  necessai’ily 
involving  one  conscious  act  of  will.  A similar  spontaneity  is 
at  the  foundation  of  all  their  other  actions,  though  other  prin- 
ciples, not  now  to  be  considered,  may  be  connected  with  it ; 
their  association  in  pairs,  and  flocks,  and  herds;  their  fondness 


590 


Man's  Mental  Instincts. 


[October 


for  locomotion  and  rest;  their  construction  of  nests  and  lairs; 
seeking  dens  or  burrowing  holes;  constructing  honey-combs 
or  ant-hills,  cocoons  or  gossamers ; their  care  of  their  young, 
and  providence  for  the  future;  all  are  founded  on  certain  spon- 
taneous or  instinctive  tendencies,  differing  in  all  species,  and 
yet  analogous  in  all ; and  even  in  the  same  species,  presenting 
very  wide  differences  according  to  circumstances,  and  which 
become  still  more  wide  under  the  influence  of  domestication. 
They  have  desires  and  aversions,  love  and  hatred,  hopes  and 
fears,  emulations,  gratitude,  and  even  love  of  property,  of  the 
home  which  they  have  selected,  and  of  the  stores  which  they 
have  provided  for  the  future. 

All  these  tendencies  are  qualities  inherent  in  the  very  nature 
of  things;  they  are  essential  elements  of  the  mineral,  plant,  or 
animal  in  which  they  are  found,  and  which,  without  them, 
would  not  be  what  they  are;  they  give  to  all  things  their  place 
and  name  among  the  varieties,  species,  genera,  and  families 
that  constitute  the  world.  Whether  all  the  germs  of  these 
natural  tendencies  have  yet  been  developed,  we  know  not;  but 
we  may  be  sure  that  science  has  not  yet  discovered  them  all. 
The  influence  of  cultivation  has  developed  many  of  them,  which 
would,  without  it,  have  remained  unknown  to  us.  Let  us 
briefly  consider  this. 

Many  latent  tendencies  of  plants  and  animals  have  been 
developed  by  changing  their  circumstances,  and  many  obvious 
tendencies  have  been  suppressed  in  the  same  way.  The  ten- 
dency of  the  apple,  pear,  and  plum  tree  to  produce  thorns  is 
suppressed  or  reduced  under  the  influence  of  cultivation,  and 
their  fruit  greatly  improved  in  beauty,  richness,  and  variety. 
The  wild  rose  and  other  wild  flowers  will  scarcely  bear  com- 
parison with  their  cultivated  progeny  in  their  variety  of  form 
and  hue  and  fragrance.  The  grains  that  are  to  us  the  staff  of 
life,  compared  with  their  wild  state,  produce  a thousand  fold. 
The  esculent  roots  which  are  so  common  in  our  gardens,  and 
constitute  so  large  a portion  of  our  daily  food,  have  all  been 
changed  in  flavour  by  cultivation,  and  become  adapted  to  the 
tastes  of  man,  and  his  domesticated  animals;  the  turnip  has 
increased  from  ounces  to  pounds,  the  beet,  the  parsnip,  and 
the  carrot,  from  roots  like  a pocket  pencil  in  size,  often  exceed 


Maris  Mental  Instincts. 


591 


1864.] 


the  size  of  a man’s  arm,  and  all  are  improved  in  quality  and 
multiplied  in  variety.  And  so  it  is  with  the  fowls  and  other 
animals  with  which  man  surrounds  his  home;  they  change  in 
colour,  size,  shape,  and  qualities ; old  tendencies  are  sup- 
pressed, and  others  before  unknown  are  developed. 

We  have  noticed  these  spontaneous  tendencies  with  some  de- 
tail; because  it  seems  to  us  that  the  observation  of  them  in 
mere  inorganic  or  dead  matter,  multiplied  in  vegetable  produc- 
tions, and  again  largely  increased  in  animal  nature,  and  con- 
tinuing still  further  to  increase  as  we  rise  to  the  highest  grades 
of  animal  life,  constrain  us  to  expect  to  find  similar  tenden- 
cies more  fully  and  variously  developed  in  man,  who  stands  at 
the  head  of  all  known  organic  life.  The  most  superficial 
observation  shows  that  they  do  abound  in  our  human  nature, 
and  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance  to  admit  that  they  constitute 
essential  and  fundamental  elements  of  our  moral  and  intellec- 
tual, as  well  as  of  our  animal  nature. 

The  mind  can,  no  more  than  mere  material  nature,  act  at 
all  without  its  antecedent  tendencies  to  act  given  to  it  by 
its  Creator.  It  has  its  fundamental  character  and  functions 
allotted  to  it  in  the  plan  of  creation,  and  these  are  the  germs, 
forms,  and  tendencies  of  all  its  future  development  and  activity, 
and  it  can  have  no  others,  unless  derived  from  the  same  divine 
source.  It  cannot  act,  or  think,  or  feel,  without  innate  ten- 
dencies to  do  so,  no  more  than  the  vegetable  can  grow,  and 
flower,  and  fruit,  without  such  tendencies.  And  whence  these 
tendencies  come,  faith  alone,  and  not  science,  can  reveal  to  us. 
Science  must  confine  itself  to  ascertaining  and  defining  what 
they  are,  and  how  they  act  and  grow.  They  may  be  called 
the  instincts  of  our  moral  and  intellectual  nature. 

We  know  that  some  have  objected  to  have  them  thus  denomi- 
nated; but  in  this  we  are  guilty  of  no  innovation.  Very  few 
writers  on  mental  philosophy  have  failed  to  recognize  that  they 
have  this  fundamental  character;  some,  as  it  were,  instinctively, 
and  many  others  by  calculation  and  design.  The  analogy 
between  the  natural  tendencies  which  produce  the  actions  of 
men  and  animals,  is  too  strong  to  avoid  giving  to  them  the 
same  name,  instincts.  They  must  be  distinguished  by  their 
adjectives  : animal  instincts,  and  rational  instincts. 


592 


Maris  Mental  Instincts. 


[October 


Others  would  object  to  the  term  as  applied  to  man,  because 
there  is  a sort  of  necessity  and  infallibility  about  instinctive 
actions,  which  do  not  at  all  apply  to  man’s  rational  and  moral 
activities.  This  argument  has  often  been  used  by  those  who 
deny  to  man  his  moral  sense,  and  refuse  to  admit  that  he  has 
any  innate  moral  character;  yet  its  major  premise  is  entirely 
unfounded.  The  natural  tendencies  and  instincts  of  the  lower 
orders  of  creation  are  not  invariable  in  their  manifestations, 
and  do  not  necessarily  follow  internal  law,  irrespective  of 
external  circumstances  and  relations. 

We  may  call  the  vital  principle  in  vegetable  and  animal  life 
a blind  power  of  nature,  acting  necessarily  under  appropriate 
circumstances ; yet  it  by  no  means  acts  uniformly  even  in  the 
same  species.  So  far  as  we  know,  all  vital  tendencies  are  sub- 
ject to  change,  improvement,  degradation,  adaptation  to  cir- 
cumstances. This  seems  to  be  of  the  nature  of  life.  The  vital 
principle  developes  itself  with  a general  resemblance  in  each 
species  of  vegetables  and  animals;  and  yet  with  endless  special 
and  individual  varieties,  so  that,  notwithstanding  the  supposed 
identity  of  nature  or  vital  principle,  we  are  not  entitled  to  say 
that  any  two  beings  developed  from  it  are  alike  in  form  or 
character. 

The  variety  that  arises  from  cultivation  is  still  more  worthy 
of  notice  in  this  connection;  for  if  the  comparatively  limited 
natural  tendencies  of  the  vegetable  and  brute  creation  may,  by 
cultivation,  produce  all  the  wonderful  changes  of  character  that 
are  manifest  to  all  who  choose  to  observe ; if  they  develope  new 
and  better  tendencies  and  qualities  under  favourable  circum- 
stances, how  much  more  is  this  to  be  expected  of  man,  with  his 
higher  and  more  numerous  tendencies.  And  if  they  become 
degraded  and  lose  their  good  qualities  from  neglect  of  cultiva- 
tion, how  much  more  shall  man;  since  all  his  voluntary  acts 
operate  directly  on  Jus  character,  and  only  indirectly  upon 
theirs. 

The  least  amount  of  reflection  must  make  it  very  apparent 
that  there  is  a logical  necessity  to  assume  the  existence  of 
these  spiritual  tendencies  as  the  basis  of  all  mental  develop- 
ment or  growth,  and  that  we  are  constrained  to  infer  them 
from  the  moral  and  intellectual  facts  of  our  nature;  for  from 


Man's  Mental  Instincts. 


593 


1864.] 

nothing,  nothing  comes,  and  of  nothing  there  can  be  no  deve- 
lopment. Without  vital  tendencies  there  can  be  no  growth, 
and  without  spiritual  tendencies  no  moral  and  intellectual  im- 
provement; they  are  the  gifts  of  God,  the  divine  foundations 
on  which  must  be  constructed  all  that  man  can,  in  any  sense, 
call  his  own.  He  has  no  duties,  functions,  or  capacities  that 
are  not  founded  on  them,  and  dependent  on  their  development. 
All  his  faculties  are  at  first  spiritual  instincts,  and  act  sponta- 
neously; and  it  is  only  after  they  have  become  considerably  de- 
veloped that  they  become  subject  to  reflection  and  self-control. 

These  instincts  constitute  the  germs  and  early  growth  of  all 
our  affections  of  love,  hatred,  gratitude,  imagination,  hope, 
fear,  emulation,  curiosity,  love  of  society,  desire  of  property; 
none  of  which  can  be  created  by  the  will  of  man.  It  is  only 
when  we  have  learned  enough  about  them  to  know  how  to 
regulate,  restrain,  and  guide  them  in  reasonable  coordination, 
that  we  can  truly  be  said  to  be  rational  beings. 

All  our  reasonings,  conceptions,  and  ideas,  have  our  sponta- 
neous activity  for  their  essential  basis.  The  mind,  before 
perception,  is  like  a seed  before  it  is  affected  by  heat  and 
moisture;  it  remains  dormant  in  all  its  qualities;  but  it  has 
qualities  and  tendencies  that  are  sure  to  be  developed  by  percep- 
tion. Perception  is  the  first  experience  of  the  mind,  as  warmth 
and  moisture  are  of  the  seed,  and  development  follows  in  both 
cases.  It  is  the  mind’s  spontaneous  acquisition  of  the  mate- 
rials of  thought  and  reflection,  which  also  are  spontaneous  acts 
of  the  mind,  as  the  circulation  of  the  blood  and  the  sap  are  of 
animals  and  plants. 

Spontaneously  and  instinctively  the  mind  generalizes  the 
gifts  of  perception,  and  coordinates  the  results  of  generaliza- 
tion ; and  it  is  by  the  spontaneous  memory  of  these  natural 
processes  that  it  learns  their  nature  and  value,  and  becomes 
prepared  to  make  a rational  use  of  them.  It  gets  its  start 
and  its  first  experience  in  this  way;  but  it  cannot  go  far  with- 
out the  conscious  aid  of  the  rational  will.  The  strong  and 
systematic  thinker  is  distinguished  by  the  degree  of  volition 
exerted  in  attention  and  reflection.  All  our  first  acts  of 
attention  and  observation  are  perfectly  spontaneous,  and  not 
at  all  voluntary;  and  it  cannot  be  otherwise,  for  we  cannot 

VOL.  xxxvi. — no.  iv.  75 


594 


Man's  Mental  Instincts. 


[October 


will  to  direct  our  minds  to  anything  of  which  our  minds  have 
had  no  previous  possession.  And  all  our  first  acts  of  analysis 
and  reflection,  and  indeed  of  every  character,  are  equally 
spontaneous  and  instinctive;  for  it  is  as  impossible  for  the  will 
to  choose  methods  of  mental  action,  without  a previous  know- 
ledge of  such  methods,  as  it  is  to  make  choice  of  a road  to  be 
travelled,  or  of  a trade  to  be  learned,  without  knowing  that 
there  are  roads  and  trades. 

All  this  would  seem  to  be  plain  matter  of  observation  and 
experience,  and  therefore  falls  within  the  province  of  inductive 
science,  though  not  much  noticed  by  the  school  of  Bacon, 
because  the  master  had  not  thus  applied  his  method.  So  far 
as  we  can  see,  these  instincts  seem  to  be  a necessary  part  of 
our  spiritual  nature.  If  animal  instincts  are  necessary  for  the 
support  of  animal  life,  and  vital  activity  for  its  start,  why 
must  there  not  be  intellectual  instincts  and  spontaneity  for  the 
start  and  maintenance  of  intellectual  life?  Under  circum- 
stances giving  rise  to  perception,  intellectual  spontaneity  must 
act.  It  must  begin  before  it  can  be  conscious  of  beginning, 
and  before  having  any  knowledge  of  itself.  It  must  think 
before  it  can  know  itself — and  we  might  almost  say,  before  it 
can  have  a self  to  be  known.  It  must  form  judgments  before 
it  can  know  its  powers,  and  how  they  act.  It  must  have  expe- 
rience before  it  can  know  what  experience  is.  It  must  analo- 
gize, analyze,  synthetize,  and  hypothetize,  before  it  can  have 
any  conception  of  these  processes,  or  learn  how  to  direct  them. 

There  must  be  a spontaneous  germination  and  growth  of  our 
spiritual  nature,  or  an  instinctive  activity  of  it.  There  must 
be  natural  germs  of  thought,  which  are  not  created  by  expe- 
rience, but  are  the  conditions  of  it,  and  exist  before  it.  Habit 
and  education  cannot  give  them,  for  they  are  but  forms  of  expe- 
rience, and  depend  upon  it.  When  awakened  into  life,  they 
are  not  moulded  by  experience,  but  it  by  them.  Experience 
influences  the  essential  forms  of  thought  no  more  than  warmth 
and  nourishment  influence  the  essential  forms  of  vegetable 
and  animal  growth.  Perhaps  the  first  step  in  the  process  of 
mental  germination  is  the  waking  up  of  the  consciousness  to 
attend  to  its  sensations,  and  then  perception  comes  in  answer, 
as  it  were,  to  the  interrogatories,  what?  when?  where?  whence? 


595 


1864.]  Mans  Mental  Instincts. 

how? — all  suggested  by,  and  calculated  to  give  definiteness  to 
experience. 

It  is  no  valid  objection  to  the  instinctive  origin  of  a mental 
process,  that  it  does  not  develope  itself  in  the  earliest  stages  of 
human  life,  or  that,  in  many  minds,  it  is  scarcely  developed  at 
all.  Every  herb  and  tree  must  arrive  at  some  degree  of  matu- 
rity before  it  can  develope  its  fruit-bearing  tendencies.  And  so 
it  is  with  man  and  the  lower  animals;  their  physical  instincts 
are  not  all  developed  at  the  first,  but  at  different  stages  of  life. 
As  we  have  noticed  before,  different  tendencies  are  developed 
or  suppressed,  according  to  circumstances  of  climate,  nourish- 
ment, and  training.  It  must  be,  therefore,  that  many  intellec- 
tual instincts  cannot  become  manifest  until,  through  other  ave- 
nues, the  mind  is  furnished  with  the  materials  on  which  they 
are  to  act.  Perhaps  a man  might  live  half  a lifetime  within 
sight  and  hearing  of  the  Falls  of  Niagara,  without  having  ever 
experienced  the  wonder  which  they  are  calculated  to  excite. 
But  let  him  stand  beneath  that  frowning  cataract,  and  view  the 
huge  chasm  which  it  has  worn  in  those  old  rocks,  and  think  of 
the  ages  it  has  rolled  down  its  mighty  flood,  and  uttered  its 
thunder-voice,  and  of  the  ages  it  will  still  continue  to  roll  and 
thunder,  of  the  oceans  it  has  emptied  over,  and  which  it  will 
still  pour  down  that  dizzy  height,  of  the  victims  who  have  been 
swallowed  up  in  its  deep  abyss,  and  of  the  terrible  destruction 
that  would  follow  if  that  rock  barrier  above  him  should  sud- 
denly give  way,  and  his  hair  may  stand  on  end  with  awe  and 
wonder.  Not  because  he  wills  to  wonder,  but  because  he  can- 
not help  it;  he  may  never  before  have  experienced  the  senti- 
ment ; and  it  comes  not  from  his  will,  but  spontaneously  from 
the  very  nature  of  the  mental  constitution  which  God  has  given 
him. 

Take  a very  obvious  illustration  of  the  instinctive  character 
of  many  of  our  most  common  actions,  which  shows  that,  with- 
out our  instincts,  we  should  be  utterly  helpless.  There  is  no 
motion  of  our  body  that  can  be  said  to  be  entirely  voluntary 
and  rational.  If  we  intentionally  give  our  arm  a certain 
motion,  we  will  only  the  given  motion,  and  not  at  all  the  spe- 
cial means  by  which  it  is  to  be  effected;  for  it  is  done  by  nerves 
and  muscles  and  bones  of  which  we  may  be  entirely  ignorant. 


596 


Matt 8 Mental  Instincts. 


[October 


We  cannot  be  said  to  will  that  of  which  we  have  no  pre- 
vious conception,  and  most  of  us  have  no  practical  conception 
of  the  forces  and  machinery  of  bodily  motion.  If  we  were 
compelled  to  be  still  until  we  should  obtain  such  a conception, 
we  should  never  move  at  all.  And  we  could  never  move 
effectively,  if  we  had  first  to  calculate  the  exact  degree  of 
nervous  power  that  is  to  be  transmitted  to  each  muscle,  and  the 
means  of  doing  it.  How  little  rational  and  voluntary,  there- 
fore, are  even  the  motions  of  our  body  that  we  call  voluntary. 
There  is  the  same  complication  in  most  of  our  judgments,  as 
any  one  will  see,  who  will  attempt  to  analyze  the  process  and 
ascertain  the  elements  of  the  instinctive  bound  of  the  mind,  by 
which  they  are  reached.  In  most  of  the  practical  affairs  of  life 
the  mind  springs  spontaneously  to  its  conclusions,  and  reserves 
its  processes  of  reasoning  for  the  office  of  leading  others  to  the 
same  results.  To  our  mind,  all  this  is  very  wholesome  thought; 
for  it  shows  our  entire  dependence  on  our  Creator  for  all  our 
faculties,  and  for  all  the  germs  of  every  thought  and  action  and 
sentiment. 

Like  to  our  physical  organs,  all  our  spiritual  instincts  are 
complex  in  their  character,  and  various  in  the  performance 
of  their  functions.  They  are  clusters  of  spiritual  fibres,  and 
need  to  be  more  or  less  analyzed  in  order  to  be  understood. 
Like  our  physical  organs,  in  their  healthful  and  normal  state, 
they  always  act  in  clusters,  and  those  of  one  kind  so  fully  and 
constantly  sympathize  with  those  of  another  kind,  that  it  is 
very  difficult  to  distinguish  them  so  as  to  ascertain  the  functions 
of  each.  As  no  bodily  act  can  take  place  without  requiring 
the  exertion  of  a thousand  bodily  fibres,  which  no  scientific 
skill  can  so  thoroughly  investigate  as  to  be  able  to  attribute  to 
each  fibre  its  precise  function  and  force  in  the  production  of 
the  result;  so  no  thought,  or  wish,  or  judgment  can  arise, 
without  being  complicated  by  mysterious  and  insoluble  con- 
nections. 

We  do  not  know  that  we  can  have  any  innate  or  aprioral 
conceptions;  for,  so  far  as  we  can  discover,  all  our  knowdedge 
takes  its  start  in  our  actual  experience,  and  in  our  perception 
of  concrete  beings,  things,  and  facts;  but  our  mind  naturally 
tends  to  generalize  our  experience,  and  thus  to  rise  to  concep- 


1864.] 


Man's  Mental  Instincts. 


597 


tions  that  are  more  and  more  abstract.  Being  started  by  expe- 
rience, it  naturally  reaches  out  after  more  experience;  seeking 
is  one  of  its  essential  functions : like  the  seed  started  in  its 
growth  by  moisture,  and  pushing  out  its  roots  for  further  nour- 
ishment. Life,  both  physical  and  spiritual,  is  an  abiding  ten- 
dency and  effort  to  appropriate,  assimilate,  and  grow ; and 
therefore  it  must  have  inherent  qualities  and  special  tenden- 
cies continually  reaching  after  new  acquisitions  and  new 
arrangements  of  its  acquisitions.  Spiritual  life  naturally 
gropes  or  feels  after  new  perceptions,  and  having  obtained 
them,  it  naturally  classifies,  generalizes,  analyzes,  and  system- 
atizes them,  and  therefore  naturally  creates  for  itself  new 
experiences. 

Primarily  the  mind  receives  the  gifts  of  nature  in  their  crude 
and  concrete  form,  and  then  it  naturally  analyzes  these  acqui- 
sitions, and  thus  obtains  all  its  abstract,  general,  and  universal 
ideas  and  conceptions,  expressive  of  all  the  actual  relations  of 
beings,  things,  thoughts,  and  facts.  It  is  not  sensation  that 
gives  it  such  conceptions,  for  such  relations  are  only  spiritually 
discerned,  and  the  conceptions  of  them  are  spiritually  formed. 
It  is  thus  the  mind  forms  the  ideas  of  quantity,  quality, 
order,  goodness,  justice,  force,  and  such  like.  Even  space  and 
time,  as  conceptions  or  ideas,  are  formed  in  the  same  way.  All 
are  conceptions  of  actual  things  and  facts,  and  therefore  none 
of  them  are  merely  subjective. 

They  are  not  real  things,  but  the  real  relations  of  things,  or 
rather,  the  generalized  conceptions  of  such  real  relations,  so 
far  as  they  are  anything  for  us.  Time  and  space  are  relations 
and  conceptions  of  this  character.  Kant  makes  them  mere 
subjective  conditions  of  sensibility,  and  therefore  only  parts  of 
the  mind  itself.  But  then  they  can  express  no  truth  as  to 
external  objects,  if  they  can  as  to  any  objects ; but  only  a 
quality  of  the  mind.  They  are  no  further  objective  than  any 
other  mental  tendency  or  quality,  and  can  express  only  rela- 
tions of  parts  of  the  mind  to  the  whole  mind.  Truth  being  a 
relation  of  intellect  to  its  objects,  time  and  space,  as  mere  con- 
ditions of  sensibility,  can  express  no  relation  between  the  mind 
and  the  external  world;  but  only  our  own  mental  acts,  and 
therefore  no  objective  truth  Hence  the  idealism  of  the  Kantian 


598  Man's  Mental  Instincts.  [October 

school.  But  if  we  take  into  account  the  mind’s  natural  adapta- 
tion and  tendency  to  form  such  conceptions,  when  the  appro- 
priate facts  are  presented  to  it,  then  time  and  space  become 
objective,  and  our  conceptions  of  them  are  formed  from  real 
relations  among  objects,  and  are  as  truly  suggested  by  or  on 
account  of  experience,  as  any  other  general  conceptions. 

Kant  supposes  that  the  conceptions  of  space  and  time  are 
not  derived  from  external  experience,  because  they  are  essen- 
tial conditions  of  such  experience.  Yet  they  are  no  more 
essential  than  the  conceptions  of  quantity,  force,  order,  good- 
ness, and  such  like,  are  in  relation  to  other  forms  of  knowledge. 
We  must  have  such  general  conceptions  before  we  can  form 
any  judgment  in  which  they  are  involved ; yet  none  of  them 
are  given  apriorally ; but  they  are  all  gradually  developed  out 
of  our  mental  tendencies,  under  the  influence  of  appropriate 
circumstances.  It  is  not  the  conceptions  themselves,  but  the 
tendency  to  form  them,  that  are  given  anterior  to  and  as  con- 
ditions of  experience. 

Again,  Kant  supposes  that  these  conceptions  cannot  be  derived 
from  external  experience,  because  it  can  give  us  only  general, 
and  not  necessary  and  universal  truths,  such  as  we  have  in  the 
demonstrations  of  geometry.  Yet  the  certainty  of  such  demon- 
strations depends,  not  upon  the  origin,  but  upon  the  nature 
of  the  conceptions  with  which  they  deal.  Time  and  space  are 
the  simplest  of  all  our  conceptions,  and  the  simplest  of  all  rela- 
tions of  things  and  events,  because  they  have  no  quality  but 
their  limits;  and  these  we  can  take  from  nature,  or  form  them 
by  our  imagination.  In  pure  geometry  they  are  mere  concep- 
tions, treated  of  without  any  reference  to  real  things  ; and  the 
conceptions  being  perfectly  definite,  so  must  be  the  science 
that  depends  upon  them.  There  is  no  such  definiteness  in  real 
things  and  facts  and  their  relations,  and  therefore  there  can  be 
no  such  accuracy  and  certainty  in  the  science  of  them.  Time 
and  space  absolute  are  nothing  in  reality,  and  nothing  in  the 
mind,  but  the  general  terms  or  frames  in  which  we  set  all  our 
limited  conceptions  of  relative  time  and  place.  As  relations, 
they  are  as  real  as  any  other  relations  of  facts  and  things,  and 
therefore  are  proper  objects  of  knowledge;  and  our  minds  are 
so  constituted  that  they  naturally  receive  them. 


1864.] 


Man's  Mental  Instincts. 


599 


These  are  fundamental  errors  in  the  philosophy  of  Kant,  and 
lie  at  the  bottom  of  the  vicious  idealism  or  subjectivism  into 
■which  his  school  has  run.  Others  have  adopted  them,  without 
running  them  out  to  their  consequences.  If  Kant  had  applied 
his  searching  analysis  to  the  human  mind,  in  its  progress  from 
infancy  to  maturity,  instead  of  applying  it  only  to  the  matured 
mind,  he  would  have  been  saved  from  such  errors.  He  might, 
indeed,  have  insisted  that  space  and  time  are  involved  in  all 
growth,  and  that  without  them  we  can  have  no  conception  of 
growth ; and  therefore  they  are  aprioral  conditions  of  all  growth 
and  life,  and  aprioral  elements  of  all  growing  things.  We  admit 
inherent  and  aprioral  functions  and  tendencies  to  grow,  but  no 
aprioral  products  of  growth,  though  they  may  be  essential  to 
its  conception. 

Faith  is  a spiritual  or  mental  tendency  which  is  an  essential 
element  of  mind,  and  of  our  conception  of  mind,  the  importance 
of  which  can  hardly  be  overestimated,  and  we  desire  to  appro- 
priate to  it  the  most  of  what  we  have  yet  to  say.  Faith — not 
so  much  in  its  religious  acceptation,  as  constituting  our  relation, 
to  a divine  and  personal  being — as  in  its  more  general,  intel- 
lectual application,  and  as  constituting  our  relation  to  all 
created  things,  or  bringing  us  into  intellectual  relation  with 
them.  This  kind  of  faith  is  associated  with  every  act  of  our  life. 

Instinctively  we  believe  in  our  sensations  and  in  the  world 
which  they  reveal  to  us;  and  without  this  instinctive  faith 
we  could  not  take  the  first  step  in  knowledge.  Without  the 
belief  and  knowledge  thus  instinctively  acquired,  we  can  make 
no  attainments  in  reasoning;  for,  without  them,  argument  could 
have  no  existence,  because  it  would  be  destitute  of  premises. 
Instinctively  we  believe  in  the  narrations  of  others;  and  with- 
out this  there  could  be  no  history,  and  no  society — confidence 
in  others  being  an  essential  and  fundamental  element  of  both. 
It  is  only  after  our  instinctive  belief  has  been  violated  by  mis- 
takes or  mendacity,  that  we  feel  called  upon  to  test  the  evidence 
that  is  submitted  to  us;  and  even  then  all  our  tests  are  neces- 
sarily founded  on  other  beliefs  that  are  fundamentally  instinc- 
tive. 

Instinctively  we  believe  in  the  faculties  of  mind  and  body 
that  God  has  given  us,  and  without  this  we  could  do  nothing. 


600  Man's  Mental  Instincts. > [October 

We  do  not  believe  because  we  have  tried  them,  but  we  try 
them  because  we  believe  in  them ; and  by  this  faith  we  grow, 
for  by  trying  them  we  improve  their  capacity,  and  even  enlarge 
our  confidence  in  them,  unless  our  trials  of  them  are  rashly 
adventurous,  and  thus  unsuccessful.  Failures  in  this  way  have 
often  a most  depressing  effect  by  producing  a morbid  caution 
or  timidity;  as  we  often  see  the  most  thorough  radicalism, 
when  disappointed  in  its  purposes,  oscillate  into  the  most  rigid 
conservatism  and  formalism.  A modest  and  duly  cautious 
faith  is  always  a growing  one;  while  one  that  is  audacious 
may  degenerate  into  fickleness  and  pusillanimity,  or  into  mere 
unreasoning  obstinacy.  Our  faith  in  our  capacities  is  naturally 
limited  by  our  conscious  inexperience,  and  by  a knowledge  of 
our  weaknesses.  It  must  be  connected  with  our  reason  as  well 
as  with  our  impulses,  and  therefore  with  both  acting  together. 
We  may  yield  to  our  impulses  and  subdue  our  reason,  or  to 
our  reason  and  subdue  our  impulses;  but  we  cannot  avoid 
believing  in  one  or  the  other,  or  in  their  combined  action. 

And  rationalism  could  not  take  one  step  of  progress  without 
faith  in  another  form ; that  is,  faith  in  the  regular  connection 
of  events  and  principles,  in  the  law  of  cause  and  effect.  With- 
out such  an  instinctive  belief  there  could  be  no  argument ; for 
no  consequences  could  be  affirmed  as  the  results  of  any  given 
premises.  We  do  not  choose  to  believe  in  a cause  for  events, 
for  we  cannot  help  believing  in  it.  We  did  not  choose  such  a 
belief  the  first  time  it  came  into  the  mind;  for  it  arose  natu- 
rally and  spontaneously,  and  may  have  been  called  into  action 
many  thousand  times  before  it  could  be  revealed  to  our  reflec- 
tion that  it  is  a law  of  our  mental  action  to  assume  a cause  for 
every  event.  Our  natural  curiosity  involves  this  belief ; for, 
without  it,  it  could  never  perform  its  function  of  asking, 
Whence  comes  this?  It  believes  in  a cause  first,  and  then 
seeks  what  it  is. 

It  is  thus  that  the  spontaneous  act  of  faith  takes  the  lead  of 
all  knowledge,  and  of  the  voluntary  act  of  reasoning.  We  can 
make  no  rational  attempt  at  analysis  or  synthesis,  at  induction 
or  deduction,  without  a previous  hypothesis  which  we  seek  to 
test  or  prove;  and  a hypothesis  is  always  a mere  formula  of 
faith;  we  do  not  create  it  by  any  voluntary  act,  but  merely 


1864.] 


Man's  Mental  Instincts. 


601 


accept  it  as  a suggestion  of  faith,  presented  for  our  investi- 
gation. 

We  have  already  spoken  of  faith  and  reason  as  distinct  por- 
tions, or  rather  functions,  of  our  intellectual  nature,  and  before 
we  go  further  we  m\y  notice  how  they  are  usually  distin- 
guished. A very  common  acceptation  of  reason  is,  that  ele- 
ment of  the  human  intellect  which  distinguishes  it  from  the 
intellect  of  the  brute;  but  it  requires  very  little  effort  to  use 
this  definition  in  order  to  discover  that  it  is  too  defective  to  be 
of  any  scientific  value.  It  is  sometimes  called  the  director  of 
the  will;  but  this  is  inaccurate,  for  it  implies  that  reason  itself 
is  or  has  a will  directing  tfye  true  will  of  the  mind ; unless  we 
understand  by  “director”  merely  the  light  which  it  furnishes 
to  the  will,  and  then  it  is  equivalent  to  our  knowing  faculties 
generally. 

Perhaps  the  most  ordinary  view  is  that  in  which  reason  is 
contradistinguished  from  faith ; and  this  view  is  involved  in  the 
term  rationalism,  as  it  is  ordinarily  understood.  Rationalism 
professes  to  be  reason  in  action  without  faith.  It  is  therefore 
different  from  religion,  for  of  this  faith  is  an  essential  element; 
and  it  is  opposed  to  religion  in  so  far  as  it  rejects  faith  as 
incompatible  with  its  functions.  In  this  sense  reason  is  a 
voluntary  faculty  of  the  mind;  it  is  the  human  will  itself 
gathering  up  for  itself  the  light  by  which  it  acts,  and  the 
materials  upon  which  it  acts,  and  by  its  own  power,  as  inde- 
pendent human  will,  working  out,  by  its  own  logical  and  scien- 
tific processes,  its  elements  and  systems  of  belief. 

Surely  such  a reason  as  this  can  have  no  existence,  and  the 
rationalism  that  pretends  to  it  is  ignorant  of  itself.  If  there  is 
such  a thing  as  a superstitious  faith,  as  undoubtedly  there  is, 
this  is  just  as  certainly  a superstitious  reason.  If  faith  is 
sometimes  bigoted,  so  also  is  reason.  We  can  conceive  of  faith 
without  reason;  but  what  can  reason  be  without  faith?  It  is 
like  substance  without  attributes,  matter  without  form,  and 
mind  without  thought,  or  any  tendency  to  think.  For  conve- 
nience of  thinking  about  them  we  may  treat  the  mind,  and 
certain  forms  of  mental  activity,  as  separable,  when  in  reality 
they  are  naturally  concrete,  and  not  susceptible  of  analysis. 
And  so  it  is  with  reason ; without  faith  it  can  have  no  exist- 
VOL.  XXXVI. — NO.  IV.  76 


602  Man's  Mental  Instincts.  [October 

ence.  As  the  arm  without  the  nerves,  that  give  it  power  and 
direction,  is  nothing,  much  more  is  the  reason  nothing  without 
faith. 

Faith  is  the  crystallizing  force  that  attracts  to  a common 
centre  all  the  elements  of  intelligence  of  which  reason  is  con- 
stituted. When  this  force  acts  with  all  its  normal  and  pristine 
purity,  the  progress  of  the  intellectual  formation  is  perfect. 
The  more  it  is  disturbed,  the  more  abnormal  or  degraded  are 
the  results. 

Faith  furnishes  all  the  materials  on  which  reason  operates, 
and  which  it  classifies  and  arranges  into  scientific  systems. 
We  have  already  said  that,  without  it,  we  can  have  no 
knowledge  of  the  most  usual  things  in  life;  it  reveals  to  us  our 
own  existence  and  that  of  the  external  world,  and  it  is  only 
reflecting  and  erring  reason  that  ever  questioned  these  facts. 
Faith  reveals  to  us  the  connection  of  cause  and  effect,  and 
experience,  observation,  and  reflection  only  enable  us  to  define 
the  various  laws  of  this  relation,  to  assign  them  their  proper 
place  in  the  midst  of  other  laws.  By  faith  we  learn  the  lan- 
guage, and  customs,  and  institutions  of  the  family  and  of  the 
country;  and  it  is  only  a selfish  and  unsocial  reason  that  leads 
us  either  in  violating  established  social  institutions,  or  in 
attempting,  by  agitation,  to  introduce  others  for  which  the 
public  mind  is  not  prepared.  Agitation  is  a species  of  social 
force  and  not  proper  social  influence,  and  it  is  not  by  it,  but  by 
education,  that  a people  is  to  be  trained  to  better  institutions. 

Reason,  it  may  be  said,  proceeds  by  a regular  and  scientific 
process,  founded  on  evidence  and  axioms.  Granted;  but  what 
is  light  to  us  without  the  natural  eye  to  receive  it,  and  what 
is  evidence  without  that  natural  faith  that  accepts  it?  Neither 
of  these  is  the  creation  of  reason.  We  have  a natural  tendency 
to  believe  in  evidence,  and  this  gives  it  all  its  value.  Our  faith 
may  sometimes  mislead  us;  but  we  have  other  faculties,  which, 
if  properly  developed  and  used,  will  correct  its  tendency  to 
error,  just  as  our  judgments  of  sight  may  be  corrected  by  those 
of  touch  and  taste,  if  we  join  the  caution  of  experience  to  our 
actions. 

And  what  are  axioms  but  instinctive  truths  revealed  to  us  by 
faith?  No  amount  of  reasoning  can  reveal  them  to  us,  for 


Mans  Mental  Instincts. 


603 


1864.] 

often  they  are  the  very  ground  on  which  reason  erects  its 
structures,  and  never  the  result  of  its  efforts.  Individual  rea- 
soners  sometimes  undertake  to  deny  or  disprove  them,  but  they 
never  succeed  to  the  satisfaction  of  any  but  themselves.  The 
most  thorough  sceptic  is  forced  to  admit  them  as  fundamental 
principles  of  his  practical  life,  however  he  may  attempt  theo- 
retically to  reject  them  from  his  religious  or  philosophic  creed. 

Whatever  may  be  the  power  of  our  will,  it  is  very  far  from 
having  the  entire  control  of  the  mind  in  reasoning.  We 
do  not  depend  upon  our  will  for  our  mental  activity,  however 
this  activity  may  be  increased  and  directed  by  it.  Reasoning 
is  one  of  the  natural  forms  of  the  mind’s  activity,  and  it  is  only 
by  observing  this  spontaneous  activity  in  ourselves,  or  what  it 
has  grown  to  in  others,  that  we  know  what  reasoning  is.  And 
it  is  only  by  observing  the  degree  of  control  that  we  can  exert 
over  our  processes  of  reasoning,  that  we  can  learn  what  is 
the  office  of  the  will  in  this  respect.  That  the  will  has  duties 
to  perform  in  relation  to  all  our  mental  activities  is  plain 
enough;  but  it  would  require  a whole  volume  of  psychology  to 
explain  them.  It  is  enough  for  our  present  purpose  to  say, 
that  we  instinctively  perform  all  the  processes  of  reasoning, 
and  that  by  our  will  we  may  have  such  control  over  them  that 
we  may  greatly  improve  or  degrade  our  reasoning  powers. 

Man  naturally  believes,  and  naturally  reasons.  There  must, 
therefore,  be  both  a legitimate  faith  and  a legitimate  rationalism, 
and  either  may  be  one-sided  and  bigoted.  Faith  may  shut  its 
eyes  against  reason,  or  reason  against  faith.  Reason  may  deny 
to  faith  more  or  less  of  its  legitimate  functions,  and  faith 
may  do  the  same  with  reason.  True  faith  and  true  reason 
exist  together  in  the  same  mind  when  each  is  allowed  to  act  its 
proper  part.  In  the  early  period  of  life,  all  the  acts  of  the 
mind  are  acts  of  faith,  and  necessarily  so,  because  it  must  lay 
up  a considerable  stock  of  facts  and  of  mental  skill  in  the 
spontaneous  use  of  its  faculties,  before  it  can  apply  itself  to 
any  voluntary  and  calculated  control  and  direction  of  them. 
At  first,  perhaps,  it  merely  notices,  as  a whole,  the  concrete 
scene  around  it ; afterwards  analyzes  it  into  its  several  parts 
of  things  and  acts ; afterwards  gradually  generalizes  these 
acquisitions  when  they  have  become  familiar;  then  begins  to 


604 


Mans  Mental  Instincts. 


[October 


discover  the  fitness  of  familiar  language  to  express  these  gene- 
ralizations; then  commences  to  require  and  to  learn  language 
for  its  own  purposes,  and  thus  to  fix  its  acquisitions ; and  then 
to  rise  to  higher  and  broader,  and  to  more  spiritual  generaliza- 
tions and  their  corresponding  language,  until  the  amount  of  its 
stores,  and  its  skill  in  handling  them,  prepares  it  first  for  spon- 
taneous, and  afterwards  for  intentional  and  voluntary  reflec- 
tion upon  them.  Looking  thus  at  the  growth  of  mind  and  of 
mental  skill,  its  analogy  to  the  growth  of  the  body  and  of  phy- 
sical skill,  will  very  naturally  suggest  itself;  and  this  may  con- 
tribute to  the  illustration  of  the  subject. 

This,  we  trust,  will  be  recognized  as,  at  least,  a rude  ap- 
proximation to  accuracy  in  the  expression  of  the  actual  process 
of  mental  growth  ; and  it  is  to  be  hoped  that  it  will  not  be  long 
until  its  accuracy  will  be  improved  by  carefully  taken,  recorded, 
analyzed,  and  generalized  observations  of  the  mind,  begin- 
ning with  its  earliest  infancy.  We  have  said  enough  to  show 
that  there  is,  and  must  be,  a very  large  amount  of  intelligence, 
spontaneously  received  and  assimilated,  before  there  can  be 
any  calculated  or  intentional  reflection  upon  it,  or  Reasoning 
upon  or  by  means  of  it. 

It  is  in  this  way,  also,  that  the  mind  receives  the  common 
opinions,  maxims,  customs,  and  sentiments  of  the  family  and  of 
society,  and  thus  grows  into  fitness  with  the  people  with  whom 
it  is  to  associate.  These  are  the  common  social  atmosphere 
which  it  continually  breathes,  and  from  which  it  has  no  dispo- 
sition and  no  power  to  escape,  though  by  the  aid  of  higher 
minds,  communicating  a higher  education,  it  may  acquire  both. 
But  it  must  at  first  accept  this  social  atmosphere  before  it  can 
reason  about  it  and  learn  its  fundamental  principles,  and  how 
to  use  them  in  any  better  way.  It  is  thus  that  laws,  customs, 
and  opinions  become  acquisitions  of  faith,  and  then  a higher 
faith  directs  the  mind  to  the  investigation  and  discovery  of  the 
principles  out  of  which  they  grow,  and  enables  us  to  correct 
their  growth  by  improved  training  and  education. 

And  this  suggests  to  us  how  ignorant  and  unjust  are  the  cen- 
sures which  we  usually  pass  upon  the  conduct  of  children,  and 
upon  people  of  other  ages  and  places  of  the  world.  Their  con- 
duct may  be  the  natural  product  bf  their  capacity  and  circum- 


Man's  Mental  Instincts. 


605 


1864.] 

stances,  and  they  are  not  answerable  to  us  for  it,  except  so  far 
as  they  are  under  a law  that  is  binding  on  us  and  them  in  com- 
mon. Yet  this  does  not  forbid  the  training  of  our  children 
even  so  far  as  to  compel  their  submission  to  the  order  of  the 
family;  for  their  conduct  may  be  wrong,  even  though  not 
consciously  or  intentionally  so,  and  we  must  correct  it, 
even  though  we  do  not  understand  the  principle  from  which 
the  wrong  proceeds.  And  thus,  according  to  the  maxim — 
“ignorance  of  law  excuses  no  man,” — we  correct  the  crimes  of 
adult  persons  in  society,  often  regarding  only  the  evil  of  the 
deed,  and  not  of  the  intention  ; as  we  correct  the  vicious  growth 
of  a tree  without  understanding  its  principles.  It  is  by  such 
treatment,  and  by  the  natural  consequences  of  wrong  doing 
that  children  and  grown  persons  are  taught  to  reflect  upon  and 
respect  the  laws  and  order  of  nature,  and  of  society,  and  its 
rights.  If  we  understood  these  things,  we  should  know  how  to 
look  upon  and  correct  most  of  the  disorders  of  society  without 
indignation  and  excited  censui'es;  yet,  in  our  ignorance,  this 
sentiment  seems  to  be  a necessary  spur  to  the  vindication  of 
our  social  rights.  In  the  conditions  in  which  it  arises,  it  is 
natural  and  spontaneous,  as  all  other  sentiments  are,  and  not 
at  all  a matter  of  intention  or  volition. 

We  all  grow  up  by  degrees  to  the  knowledge  that  we  have, 
and  of  course,  in  the  early  stages  of  our  growth,  our  knowledge 
is  very  defective;  but  this  is  not  saying  that  it  is  wrong,  for  it 
may  be  exactly  adapted  to  our  age  and  circumstances.  Our 
natural  instinct  of  imitation,  which  is  necessary  to  our  social 
nature,  draws  us  into  conformity  with  society,  without  any 
intention  of  ours ; and  thus  we  share  in  all  the  erroneous  cus- 
toms and  opinions  of  society,  just  as  we  do  in  the  defects  of  its 
language.  It  is  expected  of  a child  or  of  an  ignorant  person 
that  he  will  speak  in  such  a way  of  day  and  night,  of  the  action 
of  a pump,  of  the  falling  of  stones  and  rising  of  balloons,  as  to 
show  that  he  is  totally  mistaken  in  his  views  of  the  laws  that 
rule  in  these  phenomena:  even  intelligent  persons  may  employ 
the  same  forms  of  speech  if  the  usages  of  language  require  it, 
though  he  knows  that,  in  their  form,  they  express  a false 
theory.  The  knowledge  of  a*  child  is  not  adequate  to  the 
higher  aims  of  science,  but  it  is  adequate  for  him,  and  fits  bet- 


606  Man  s Mental  Instincts.  [October 

ter  in  his  imperfect  system  than  the  scientific  truth  would  do. 
He  can  use  his  defective  knowledge  as  a basis  on  which  to  con- 
tinue his  intellectual  structure,  and  he  may  some  day  compre- 
hend the  truth  as  men  of  science  do.  But  if  he  is  to  do  nothing 
and  know  nothing  until  he  obtains  perfect  truth,  he  will  never 
know  nor  do  anything  at  all. 

A child  is  not  to  be  censured  for  not  knowing  all  that  is 
taught  in  the  Bible,  and  all  that  the  most  accurate  hermeneutic 
skill  can  draw  out  of  it  concerning  spiritual  and  divine  things; 
for  it  is  not  his  time  to  know  so  much  yet.  If  he  has  faith,  in 
the  sense  of  spiritual  life  or  vitality,  aspiring  after  higher  and 
higher  principles,  and  especially  after  the  highest  spiritual 
principles,  he  is  growing  towards  it,  and  will  ever  grow.  Our 
want  of  charity  for  those  who,  by  reason  of  their  youth  or  of 
unfavourable  circumstances,  are  not  so  intelligent  or  so  correct 
in  their  conduct  as  to  satisfy  our  standard,  is  most  generally 
chargeable  to  our  forgetfulness  of  the  steps  by  which  we  have 
ourselves  risen.  Perhaps  the  best  teachers  of  every  branch  of 
human  knowledge,  and  conduct,  and  duty,  are  those  who  best 
remember  the  inner  and  outer  difficulties  which  they  had  them- 
selves to  overcome. 

We  grow  by  faith,  and  not  by  law.  Faith  is  the  inner  prin- 
ciple of  all  spiritual  life,  and  when  it  is  the  faith  of  Christ,  it  is 
the  inner  principle  of  true  religious  life.  Law  is  one  of  the 
outer  circumstances,  in  the  midst  of  which  faith  produces 
growth,  and  also  the  expression  of  the  general  form  of  the 
actual  attainments  of  society,  or  of  its  accomplished  growth ; 
and,  to  be  right,  the  principle  and  the  form,  as  received  and 
comprehended,  must  be  adapted  to  each  other.  If  we  impose 
on  children  the  outer  forms  of  life,  that  belong  to  mature  age, 
we  stint  and  distort  their  growth,  and  make  it  artificial  and  dis- 
ingenuous. If  no  regimen  can  be  admitted  but  the  most  perfect 
rules  of  conduct  that  can  be  conceived  of  for  the  holiest  intelli- 
gences, then  the  higher  our  views  of  legal  perfection,  the  more 
unfit  should  we  be  to  govern  those  who  are  in  the  first  stages  of 
human  progress;  and  the  best  trained  intellects  would  be  totally 
unfit  to  govern  ignorant  or  barbarous  people,  however  fit  to 
teach  them.  If  they  are  to  rise  to  the  higher  degrees  of  human 
cultivation,  they  must  pass  through  the  lower  ones.  They 


1864.] 


Man's  Mental  Instincts. 


607 


cannot  comprehend  your  highest  generalizations  in  morality 
and  religion,  any  more  than  they  can  those  of  philosophy  and 
mathematics,  -without  having  experienced  the  special  facts  out 
of  which  these  generalizations  are  formed. 

God,  in  the  absoluteness  of  his  perfections,  is  entirely  beyond 
our  comprehension;  but  we  may  gradually  catch  glimpses  of 
those  perfections  by  observing  the  finite  manifestations  of  them, 
and  get  them  still  more  clearly  by  his  direct  revelation  of  them. 
Yet  the  knowledge  of  the  child  cannot  be  like  that  of  the 
mature  man  in  this  respect,  and  we  must  not  require  that  it 
should  be.  Let  all  things  be  adapted  to  their  place  and  func- 
tions. We  do  not  feed  swine  on  pearls,  nor  put  new  wine  into 
old  sacks;  and  let  us  not  attempt  to  force  a ripe  and  indurated 
hull  upon  a growing  nut.  The  faith  of  a child  is  often  better 
and  more  hopeful  than  the  knowledge  of  the  man ; and  it  is 
always  so  when  this  knowledge  is,  by  a bigoted  rationalism  or 
a bigoted  faith,  wrapped  up  in  unyielding  forms,  which  give  no 
freedom  of  action  to  the  vital  principle  of  the  soul,  of  which 
true  faith  is  an  essential  element. 

Faith  and  law,  soul  and  body,  spirit  and  letter,  are  essential 
to  each  other;  the  former  being  the  substance  of  which  the 
latter  is  the  approximate  natural  expression.  The  latter  cannot 
be  produced  without  the  former,  nor  the  former  comprehended 
without  the  latter.  We  must  receive  them  together,  before  we 
can  analyze  and  learn  them  ; and  if  the  former  changes,  so  will 
the  latter,  as  the  human  countenance  changes  with  the  growth 
of  intelligence  and  virtue,  or  of  fatuity  and  vice,  and  with  all 
the  changes  of  temper  in  our  daily  life.  There  is,  therefore,  a 
true  Christian  and  philosophic  progress,  which  expects  a con- 
stant change  of  form,  in  consequence  of  a continued  growth  in 
intelligence  and  virtue ; but  this  progress  operates  as  quietly, 
regularly,  and  naturally,  as  the  growing  seed.  'Opposed  to 
this,  on  one  hand,  are  the  disorderly  radicals,  or  reforming 
rationalists,  who  mistake  their  own  moral  and  social  theories 
for  law,  and  endeavour  to  agitate  them  into  authority,  and  to 
amend  the  world  by  subjecting  it  to  them,  in  a fixed  and 
ungrowing  uniformity.  And  opposed,  on  the  other  hand,  are 
the  conservative  rationalists,  who  trust  only  in  our  present 
human  law,  for  the  growth  and  preservation  of  society.  Both 


608  Man's  Mental  Instincts.  [October 

alike  mistake  the  true  functions  of  law,  and  are  ignorant  of  the 
inner  social  principle  of  growth;  and  have  no  trust  in  the 
natural  law  of  social  progress  which  God  has  ordained  as  an 
element  of  our  humanity.  The  former  would  tear  away  the 
protecting  and  nourishing  pod,  before  the  seed  is  ripe;  and  the 
other  would  bind  it  up,  to  prevent  the  seed  from  scattering 
according  to  the  free  laws  of  growth,  with  wastefulness  and 
disorder. 

There  is  another  form  of  rationalism,  equally  ignorant  of  our 
human  spontaneities,  which  is  very  often  introduced  into  the 
family  training,  to  the  great  injury  of  the  future  prospects  of 
the  children,  and  which  opposes  all  control  of  the  conduct  of 
children,  until  they  are  able  to  understand  the  reasons  of  the 
duties  required  of  them,  or  to  perform  them  freely,  out  of  filial 
affection.  Children  very  soon  learn  that  coaxing  and  reason- 
ing do  not  at  all  interfere  with  their  having  their  own  way,  and 
thus  this  mode  of  training  very  naturally  results  in  teaching 
children,  among  their  first  lessons,  that  the  wishes  of  their 
parents  are  of  no  consequence.  Indians  teach  their  children 
better,  when  they  turn  them  loose  to  attend  to  themselves, 
without  this  pernicious  training,  which  teaches  only  disrespect. 
Children  are  much  better  taught  by  their  fellows  at  school, 
who  instinctively  compel  them  to  respect  the  rights  and  feel- 
ings of  others,  and  to  submit  to  the  order  and  common  customs 
of  their  little  society. 

Reason  children  into  submission  to  authority!  Why,  they 
must  first  have  submitted  to  authority  before  they  can  know 
what  authority  or  submission  is;  and  they  must  also  have 
experience  of,  and  much  reflection  upon,  the  blessings  of  sub- 
mission, before  you  can  have  any  argument  to  enforce  it  which 
they  can  possibly  appreciate.  Authority  exercised,  they  can 
understand,  in  so  far  as  they  feel  it  as  a power  above  them 
controlling  their  actions;  and  feeling  that  it  is  above  them,  they 
cannot  suppress  the  sentiment  of  respect  or  reverence,  more  or 
less  crude,  that  naturally  belongs  to  the  perception;  and  this 
is  a real  gain.  A proper  training  is  not  at  all  commenced  until 
they  have  felt  the  necessity  of  submitting  to  authority;  and 
this  step  in  their  education  is  among  the  most  important  of 
their  lives.  Until  it  is  taken,  their  development  continues  to 


1864.] 


Man's  Mental  Instincts. 


609 


be  purely  selfish;  and  if  parents  cannot  bring  them  to  it 
■wisely  and  steadily,  the  sooner  they  commit  their  children  to 
the  boys  and  girls  at  school  the  better  for  them. 

And  what  parents  can  act  on  pure  rational  principles,  or 
know  what  they  are?  None  of  us  know  enough  about  human 
nature,  in  all  its  stages,  to  know  how  to  deal  with  it  rationally. 
Parents  have,  therefore,  their  mental  instincts,  that  are  a 
better  guide  than  any  light  furnished  them  by  the  ordinarily 
limited  extent  of  their  science  of  education.  Our  instincts  tell 
us  that  parents  know  better  than  their  children  what  is  proper 
for  them,  and  therefore  mere  instinct  teaches  the  parent  to 
insist  upon  and  enforce  his  will.  Let  not  this  be  laid  aside 
because  sciolists  are  heard  to  say  that  there  ought  to  be  no 
training  that  is  not  guided  and  accepted  by  reason.  The 
training  must  be  done,  and  if  we  have  not  reason  enough  to 
guide  us,  we  must  go  by  our  mental  instincts,  as  the  next  best 
course.  If  we  carefully  follow  and  observe  their  lead,  and 
study  the  character  of  children,  and  train  ourselves  to  modera- 
tion, and  kindness,  and  good  sense,  we  shall  gradually  learn 
for  ourselves  and  our  children  what  is  the  reason  by  which  we 
are  to  be  guided.  Until  we  obtain  this  light  of  reason,  we 
must  act  upon  our  spontaneous  promptings,  under  the  restraints 
of  good  sense  and  caution. 

We  have  the  life  of  faith  and  that  of  law  well  illustrated  in 
the  history  of  the  Jewish  people.  It  is  very  evident  that  they 
were  much  degraded  by  idolatry  at  the  time  of  their  delivery 
from  Egyptian  bondage ; and  their  forty  years  of  desert  life, 
with  its  adventurous  freedom  and  its  miraculous  teachings, 
seem  to  have  been  necessary  to  awake  in  them  that  degree  of 
faith  which  they  needed  in  order  to  insure  their  future  growth, 
and  to  enable  them  to  master  all  the  difficulties  they  were  to 
encounter  in  settling  themselves  in  the  promised  land.  Their 
subsequent  history  is  the  measure  of  their  comprehension  of 
the  principles  of  the  Mosaic  institutions.  We  cannot  doubt 
that  those  institutions  were  adapted  to  their  customs,  but  so  far 
modified  as  was  necessary  to  give  adequate  expression  to  the 
divine  spirituality  then  begun  to  be  revived  among  them. 
The  mistake  is  often  made  of  supposing  that,  because  of  their 
divine  origin,  they  must  be  absolutely  perfect,  whereas  their 

VOL.  xxxvi. — no.  iv.  77 


610  Man's  Mental  Instincts.  [October 

wisdom  could  be  shown  only  by  their  relative  perfection,  or 
their  adaptation.  They  are  not  fit  for  man  in  all  circumstances, 
but  only  for  a people  with  the  inner  principles  and  outer  cir- 
cumstances then  constituting  the  life  of  the  Jewish  people. 
But  the  divine  principles  which  they  contained — the  unity, 
spirituality,  and  perfections  of  God  revealed  in  them — the 
high  ideas  that  were  presented  of  our  moral,  social,  and  reli- 
gious duties,  and  the  promises  of  the  future;  these  were  the 
objects  to  which  their  faith  was  directed — and  by  this  faith 
they  were  to  grow,  and  did  grow.  But  when  this  faith  died  out 
under  the  indurating  formalism  of  an  irreligious  priesthood, 
they  ceased  to  grow,  falling  away  first  into  a superstitious 
idolatry,  and  afterwards  into  a bigoted  rationalism  that  ex- 
cluded all  faith  containing  any  real  vitality,  in  the  sense  of  a 
growing  principle.  They  had  a life  of  form,  analogous  to  the 
crystal’s  growth  in  size  and  hardness,  which  resists  dissolution; 
but  not  the  true  life,  of  which  the  mustard-seed,  with  its  grow- 
ing and  aspiring  tendencies,  is  a genuine  analogy.  They  had 
a legal  “form  of  knowledge  and  truth,”  but  no  more  than  the 
Samaritan  woman  could  they  understand  the  symbol  of  the 
water,  that  should  become  in  them  a well  of  water  springing 
up  in  everlasting  vitality. 

Pharisees  and  Sadducees  were  alike  materialists  in  this,  that 
they  rejected  that  spiritual  faith  which  is  the  life-principle  of 
human  progress;  they  admitted  for  man  the  growth  of  the 
crystal  and  the  coral  reef,  by  accretion;  but  not  that  of  the 
tree,  with  its  blossoms  and  fruit — and  especially  not  of  the 
divine  in  human  nature,  with  its  beautifying  and  elevating 
principles  communicated  by  the  Holy  Spirit.  In  vain  did  the 
prophets  of  God  warn  them  against  their  formalism,  reject 
their  sacrifices,  purifications,  and  tithes,  and  call  them  to  under- 
stand the  principles  expressed  by  their  institutions,  and  to 
observe  justice,  mercy,  and  faith,  and  to  a life  and  growth  born 
“not  of  blood,  nor  of  the  will  of  the  flesh,  nor  of  the  will  of 
man,  but  of  God.” 

All  forms  of  natural  religion  which  are  suggested  by  human 
reason,  founded  upon  our  dim  and  undefined  faith  in  divine 
things,  or  wherein  this  is  the  prevailing  element,  seem  naturally 
to  run  into  this  formalism,  because  their  faith  is  misdirected, 


Man's  Mental  Instincts. 


611 


1864.] 

and  fixed  on  objects  too  gross  to  excite  any  true  reverence, 
or  too  impalpable  to  reach  the  intelligence,  and  thus  attract 
the  affections  of  men.  And  it  is  only  when  the  object  of 
faith  is  a holy,  all-wise,  and  almighty  sympathizing  God,  re- 
vealed to  us  through  his  Son,  manifest  in  the  flesh,  and  dying 
for  us,  that  we  obtain  a definite,  yet  living  and  growing  faith, 
having  an  object  sufficiently  intelligible  to  attract  our  love.  “We 
love  him  because  he  first  loved  us,”  and  because  we  can  perceive 
that  he  did  so.  This  true  faith  requires  no  hierarchical  mag- 
nificence, imposing  rituals,  solemn  ceremonies,  mysterious  tradi- 
tions, or  grand  legal  unity,  to  supply  its  defect  of  principle; 
for  its  very  simplicity  of  principle  demands  simplicity  of  form. 

Now,  if  minerals,  plants,  and  animals  must  have  natural 
tendencies  and  instincts  according  to  their  several  natures,  in 
order  to  be  what  they  are,  then  surely  man  must  have  natural 
tendencies  that  incline  him  to  a complete  fulfilment  of  his  des- 
tiny. If  the  tendencies  and  instincts  of  plants  and  animals 
are  susceptible  of  improvement,  much  more  so  must  be  man’s. 
And  if  the  infant  has  spiritual  instincts  by  which  it  gradually 
appropriates  to  itself  the  common  knowledge  and  principles 
which  Providence  casts  in  its  way,  and  thus  gradually  enlarges 
the  province  in  which  its  activity  may  exert  itself,  surely  there 
must  still  be  natural  tendencies  that  urge  it  to  occupy  that 
territory.  These  tendencies  may  be  almost  always  too  weak 
to  resist  the  lower  tendencies  of  human  nature,  and  to  over- 
come the  difficulties  that  lie  in  the  way ; but,  with  the  blessing 
of  God,  they  will  have  power  enough. 

Faith  is  the  vital  principle  of  all  these  tendencies,  and  it  has 
a natural  germ  in  every  human  heart.  If  we  are  destitute  of 
faith  and  trust  in  any  given  line  of  action,  we  must  fail.  If 
we  do  not  believe  in  our  natural  craving  after  food,  we  must 
die.  It  is  because  we  trust  to  our  natural  desire  for  knowledge 
that  we  ever  attain  any  intelligence;  and  it  is  only  when  we 
trust  to  our  natural  desire  after  the  highest  spiritual  gifts  that 
we  can  ever  make  any  advance  towards  them.  We  call  this  a 
natural  desire,  because  man,  however  degraded,  has  still  some 
remains  of  it. 

“Seek,  and  ye  shall  find;”  but  how  can  we  seek  without  a 
previous  faith  that  there  is  something  to  be  sought  after  ? 


612 


Man's  Mental  Instincts. 


[October 


And  God  assures  to  us  this  faith,  for  the  world  is  full  of  adap- 
tations to  man’s  physical,  moral,  and  intellectual  nature;  and, 
grow  as  he  may,  their  variety  will  never  he  exhausted.  Natu- 
rally we  look  upward  in  search  of  goodness  and  intelligence 
superior  to  our  own,  and  faith  is  our  natural  aspiration  towards 
their  attainment.  And  this  faith  in  beings  higher  and  holier 
than  ourselves  is  always  attended  by  a sentiment  of  reverence, 
varying  in  degree  from  the  ordinary  respect  felt  for  our  equals 
up  to  the  profound  awe  with  which  we  recognize  the  divine. 
This  is  worthy  of  special  attention.  Every  complete  impres- 
sion of  any  act,  event,  thing,  or  being,  is  at  least  double  in  its 
nature,  consisting  of  the  intellectual  act  by  which  the  object 
is  recognized,  and  the  sentiment  that  naturally  follows  such 
recognition.  Thus,  the  sight  of  an  object  that  is  sublime,  or 
beautiful,  or  ugly — or  of  an  act  that  is  cruel,  ungenerous,  or 
mean,  raises  a corresponding  sentiment;  and  it  is  this  that 
makes  virtue  attractive  and  vice  repulsive  to  us.  All  our  sen- 
timents rise  in  this  perfectly  spontaneous  way,  depending  on 
the  judgments  which  the  mind  forms  of  its  objects;  and  hence 
the  great  importance  of  careful  reflection  in  the  formation  of 
our  judgments,  and  of  being  on  our  guard  to  exclude  from  our 
mind  all  thoughts  that  excite  corrupting  and  misleading  emo- 
tions. If  we  recognize  in  another  any  excellence  to  which  we 
have  not  attained,  the  natural  sentiment  of  a generous  heart  is 
reverence,  or  at  least  respect,  and  a desire  to  imitate  it.  But 
it  may  be  envy,  and  a desire  to  degrade  that  excellence  to  a 
level  with  ourselves.  If  we  have  cultivated  or  indulged  a habit 
of  selfishness  in  all  our  calculations  and  conduct,  the  represen- 
tation or  judgment  that  we  form  of  an  excellent  man,  will  likely 
be  that  he  stands  in  our  way,  or  that  we  compare  badly  with 
him;  and  then  our  natural  sentiment  will  be  envy.  Our  judg- 
ments are  the  sources  of  our  sentiments,  the  very  springs  of 
our  inner  and  outer  life,  the  cords  of  all  the  moral  harmonies 
of  the  soul;  and  it  is  when  we  allow  the  tempters  and  the 
moral  and  political  charlatans  of  society  to  play  upon  them  at 
their  pleasure,  that  we  are  sure  to  lose  all  proper  self-control, 
and  become  the  slaves  of  social  excitements  and  seductions. 

Faith,  in  its  highest  and  most  general  spiritual  sense,  is  the 
judgment  of  the  mind  concerning  things  above  us — “things 


Mari’s  Mental  Instincts. 


613 


1864.] 

unseen” — and  reverence  for,  and  desire  to  reach  them,  are  its 
naturally  attendant  sentiments.  And  this  reverence  is  the 
very  blossom  of  the  tree  of  life ; it  gives  to  faith  its  upward 
look  and  hopeful  aspirations  after  the  unseen  excellencies  that 
it  feels  to  be  above  it.  This  reverence  may  be  in  excess  or  in 
deficiency,  and  thus  be  timid  and  superstitious,  or  rude,  im- 
pudent, and  audacious;  but  it  must  exist  wherever  there  is 
faith  enough  to  “look  at  things  which  are  not  seen.”  There 
can  be  no  more  important  sentiment  belonging  to  our  spiritual 
nature,  and  we  must  endeavour  to  correct  its  excess  or  defi- 
ciency by  exercising,  with  measured  and  reflecting  caution,  the 
faith  out  of  which  it  flows. 

But  we  have  gone  much  further  than  we  intended  in  elabor- 
ating these  views;  perhaps  further  than  our  readers  care  to 
follow  us,  and  we  must  stop.  We  need  not  go  back  upon  what 
we  have  said  in  order  to  convince  our  readers  that  the  Inductive 
Method  does  not  unduly  bind  philosophy  to  the  leading  strings 
of  material  nature,  so  as  to  exclude  all  the  mental  knowledge 
that  is  to  be  derived  from  our  internal  experience.  It  does 
take  nature  as  it  finds  it,  because  that  is  a main  object  of  its 
study;  but  it  also  studies  how  far  nature  may  be  improved  by 
man.  And  especially  does  it,  or  may  it,  study  human  nature, 
and  find  wherein  and  how  it  may  be  improved.  Life  and 
growth  are  essential  characteristics  of  this  method.  It  operates 
by  appropriation,  digestion,  and  assimilation,  like  the  plant  or 
animal.  From  the  concrete  gifts  of  nature  it  rises  to  the 
highest  classifications,  and  from  its  most  obvious  laws  to  the 
highest  principles.  And  in  the  performance  of  this  work,  the 
mind  of  man,  also  an  object  of  philosophy,  is  continually 
growing  and  developing  its  natural  tendencies,  and  always 
urging  philosophy  upwards,  and  always  forbidding  it  to  be 
complete.  There  can  be  no  aprioral  philosophy  to  fix  or  mea- 
sure the  destiny  of  man,  except  in  the  mind  of  his  Creator. 


614 


The  Russian  Church. 


[October 


Art.  II. — The  Russian  Church. 

/■<  S . Z>  , ' - ■ ) J ^ •/ 1 

f ».  » • i-yx  f C"  f’  ■ ■ ^ / ■ f p-/i  1 / ^ / > c 

The  foundation  of  the  great  Russian  Empire  was  laid  by  Ruric, 
a Varangian  knight,  about  the  year  862.  He  reigned  first  at 
Ladoga,  and  afterwards  at  Novgorod,  which  was  then  a large 
and  opulent  city. 

To  Vladimir,  a descendant  of  Ruric,  belongs  the  honour  of 
establishing  Christianity  among  the  Russians ; which  event 
took  place  near  the  close  of  the  tenth  century.  There  had 
been  instances  of  conversion  at  an  earlier  period — some  even 
in  the  royal  family.  But  Christianity  was  not  permanently 
established  before  the  year  986.  The  circumstances  of  its 
introduction  are  thus  stated  by  Karamsin,  in  his  learned  His- 
tory of  Russia.* 

In  the  year  above  mentioned,  there  came  to  Vladimir  envoys 
or  missionaries  from  the  different  religions  of  the  known  world. 
First  came  Bulgarian  Mussulmen  from  the  region  of  the  Volga. 
“Illustrious  Prince,”  said  they,  “wise  and  prudent  as  thou  art, 
thou  knowest  neither  law  nor  religion.  Believe  in  our  religion, 
and  honour  Mohammed.” 

“What  is  your  religion?”  said  Vladimir.  “In  what  does  it 
consist?” 

“We  believe  in  God,”  they  replied,”  and  believe  what  the 
Prophet  teaches: — Be  circumcised;  abstain  from  pork;  drink 
no  wine ; and  after  death,  from  seventy  beautiful  wives  select 
the  most  beautiful.” 

Vladimir  listened  to  them  for  the  last  reason ; but  he  did  not 
like  circumcision,  or  abstinence  from  pork,  and  least  of  all,  the 
prohibition  of  drinking:  for  drinking  was  then,  as  now,  the 
great  delight  of  the  Russians. 

Next  came  the  representatives  of  Western  or  Roman  Catholic 
Christendom.  “The  Pope  begs  us  to  tell  you,”  said  they, 
“that  though  your  country  is  like  our  own,  your  religion  is 
not.  Ours  is  the  right.  We  fear  God,  who  made  the  heavens 
and  the  earth,  the  stars  and  the  moon,  and  every  living  crea- 
ture; whilst  thy  gods  are  of  wood  and  stone.” 


* In  eleven  volumes,  8vo. 


The  Russian  Church. 


615 


1864  ] 


“What  does  your  law  command?”  asked  Vladimir. 

“We  fast,  to  the  best  of  our  power;  and  when  any  one  eats 
or  drinks,  he  does  it  in  honour  of  God,  as  taught  the  apostle 
Paul.” 

“Go  home,”  said  Vladimir.  “Our  fathers  did  not  believe  in 
your  religion,  or  receive  it  from  the  Pope.” 

Next  came  some  Jews,  who  lived  among  the  Khozars.  “We 
have  heard  that  the  Mohammedans  and  Christians  have  tried 
to  persuade  you  to  adopt  their  religion.  The  Christians  believe 
in  him  whom  we  have  crucified.  We  believe  in  one  God,  the 
God  of  Abraham,  and  Isaac,  and  Jacob.” 

“In  what  does  your  law  consist?”  asked  Vladimir? 

“Our  law  requires  circumcision;  prohibits  pork  and  hare; 
and  enjoins  the  observance  of  Saturday.” 

“And  where  is  your  country?” 

“At  Jerusalem.” 

“And  what  is  Jerusalem?” 

“ God  was  wroth  with  our  forefathers : he  dispersed  us,  for 
our  sins,  throughout  the  world;  and  our  country  has  fallen  into 
the  hands  of  strangers.” 

“What!”  said  Vladimir;  “do  you  wish  to  teach  others — 
you,  whom  God  has  rejected  and  dispersed?  If  God  had  loved 
you  and  your  law,  he  would  not  have  scattered  you  abroad. 
You  wish,  perhaps,  that  we  should  suffer  the  same.” 

Another  agent  now  appears  on  the  scene.  He  is  not  a bar- 
barian, as  before,  but  a Christian  philosopher  from  Greece. 
“We  have  heard,”  said  he,  “that  the  Mohammedans  have  sent 
to  induce  you  to  adopt  their  belief.  Their  religion  and  their 
practices  are  an  abomination  in  the  face  of  heaven  and  earth, 
and  judgment  will  fall  upon  them,  as  of  old’ upon  Sodom.  We 
have  also  heard  that  messengers  have  come  from  Rome  to  teach 
you.  Their  belief  differs  somewhat  from  ours.  They  celebrate 
the  mass  with  unleavened  bread;  and,  on  this  account,  as  well 
as  others,  have  not  the  true  religion.” 

Vladimir  then  added:  “I  have  also  had  Jews  here,  who  said 
that  the  Greeks  and  Germans  believe  on  him  whom  we  cruci- 
fied. Can  you  tell  now  why  he  was  crucified?” 

“If  you  will  listen,”  replied  the  philosopher,  “I  will  tell  you 
all,  from  the  beginning.”  And  so,  commencing  at  the  creation, 


616  The  Russian  Church.  [October 

he  detailed  to  the  king  the  principal  events  of  Jewish  and 
Christian  history.  He  described  the  true  faith;  spoke  of  the 
future  reward  of  the  righteous,  and  punishment  of  the  wicked ; 
and  showed  to  the  king  a tablet  on  which  was  painted  the  scene 
of  the  last  judgment.  He  showed  him  the  righteous,  who,  filled 
with  joy,  were  just  entering  into  paradise;  and  also  the  sinners 
who  were  going  into  hell. 

The  king  was  moved,  and  heaving  a sigh,  exclaimed: 
“ Happy  are  those  who  are  on  the  right,  but  woe  to  the  sinners 
on  the  left!” 

“If  you  wish,”  said  the  philosopher,  “to  enter  heaven  with 
the  just,  you  must  repent  and  be  baptized.”  But  the  king,  on 
reflection,  concluded  to  wait  a little,  that  he  might  be  more 
thoroughly  instructed  in  religion.  So  he  loaded  the  philoso- 
pher with  presents,  and  sent  him  away. 

The  next  year  Vladimir  sent  for  his  nobles  and  elders,  told 
them  what  he  had  heard,  and  asked  their  advice.  Their  reply 
was  as  follows:  “No  one,  0 Prince,  talks  evil  of  his  country’s 
religion,  but  each  one  praises  his  own.  If  you  would  know  the 
exact  truth — you  have  wise  men  here — send  them  to  examine 
the  faith  of  each,  and  the  manner  of  their  worship.” 

The  Prince  accepted  their  advice,  and  sent  out  his  ambassa- 
dors. On  their  return,  they  reported  unfavourably  respecting 
the  Mohammedan  and  Popish  religions,  but  were  delighted  with 
what  they  saw  at  Constantinople  among  the  Greeks.  They 
happened  to  be  present  at  one  of  the  high  festivals  in  the  mag- 
nificent church  of  St.  Sophia,  and  were  placed  in  a situation  to 
see  all  to  the  best  advantage.  The  incense  smoked,  the  chants 
resounded,  the  Patriarch  appeared  in  his  splendid  vestments, 
and  (what  affected  the  envoys  more  than  all)  the  deacons  and 
sub-deacons  came  forward  in  dazzling  robes,  with  white  linen 
wings  upon  their  shoulders.  These,  they  were  told,  were 
angels,  who  had  come  down  from  heaven  to  take  part  in  the 
service.  “We  are  satisfied  now,”  said  the  Russians;  “we  need 
no  further  proof.  Send  us  home,  that  we  may  make  report.” 

And  they  did  report,  in  terms  the  most  ecstatic.  “We  knew 
not  whether  we  were  in  heaven  or  on  the  earth.  We  cannot 
describe  to  you  all  that  we  have  seen.  We  seemed  to  be  in  the 
very  presence  of  God.  We  shall  never  forget  so  much  grandeur 


The  Russian  Church. 


617 


1864.] 

and  magnificence.  Whoever  has  seen  so  imposing  a spectacle 
can  be  pleased  with  nothing  else.” 

Still  Vladimir  was  not  more  than  half  convinced.  He  was 
besieging  the  city  of  Cherson,  in  the  Crimea,  and  made  a vow 
that,  if  he  succeeded  he  would  be  baptized.  At  the  same  time, 
hesent  to  the  Greek  emperor,  Basil,  demanding  the  hand  of 
his  sister  Anne  in  marriage.  He  obtained  his  bride,  was  bap- 
tized at  Cherson,  and  gave  orders  for  the  general  baptism  of 
his  people  at  Kieff.  The  great  idol,  Peroun,  was  dragged  over 
the  hills  at  a horse’s  tail ; was  unmercifully  scourged  by  two 
thousand  mounted  pursuers,  and  then  thrown  into  the  Dnieper, 
where  it  was  pushed  along  the  stream  until  it  went  down  the 
rapids,  and  finally  disappeared  in  a spot  long  afterwards  known 
as  the  Bay  of  Peroun.  The  whole  people  of  Kieff  were  bap- 
tized in  the  same  river,  some  sitting  on  the  banks,  others  plung- 
ing in,  and  others  swimming,  while  the  priests  read  the  prayers. 
“It  was  a sight,”  says  Nestor,  “beautiful  to  see,  when  the 
whole  people  were  baptized,  and  each  one,  after  baptism, 
returned  to  his  house.”  The  spot  was  consecrated  by  the  first 
Christian  temple,  and  Kieff  became,  henceforward,  the  Canter- 
bury of  the  Russian  Empire. 

The  Greek  church,  being  thus  established  in  Russia,  has 
been  the  religion  of  the  empire  ever  since.  Like  the  religion 
of  Rome,  it  is  one  of  dead  formalism,  exhibiting  little  of  the 
life  and  power  of  the  gospel.  Like  Romanism,  too,  it  has  been 
an  intolerant  persecuting  church.  And  yet,  between  the  two, 
there  are  some  important  differences.  The  Greek  church  owes 
no  allegiance  to  the  Pope  of  Rome,  but  is  governed  by  Patri- 
archs, much  as  the  whole  church  was,  after  the  days  of  Con- 
stantine. Among  the  Greeks,  the  clergy  are  not  only  permit- 
ted but  required  to  marry  previous  to  ordination,  though  they 
are  not  allowed  to  marry  afterwards,  or  to  be  married  more 
than  once.  The  Greeks  have  no  images  in  their  churches,  but 
are  extravagantly,  even  fanatically,  attached  to  pictures. 
They  reject  purgatory,  and  administer  the  communion  in  both 
kinds,  giving  it  even  to  baptized  infants. 

There  are  other  minor  differences  between  these  two  churches, 
which  have  been  the  occasion,  at  times,  of  violent  disputes; 

VOL.  xxxvi. — no.  iv.  78 


618 


The  Russian  Church. 


[October 


such  as  those  respecting  the  procession  of  the  Spirit,  and  the 
use  of  unleavened  bread  in  the  Eucharist.  But  a more  import- 
ant difference,  practically,  than  any  other,  relates  to  the  circu- 
lation of  the  Scriptures  among  the  people,  and  the  use  of  their 
respective  liturgies  in  the  vernacular  tongue.  This  is  per- 
mitted among  the  Greeks;  and  this  rendered  the  conversion  of 
the  Russians  more  easy,  and  without  doubt  more  thorough, 
than  would  otherwise  have  been  possible. 

I have  spoken  of  the  attachment  of  the  Greeks  to  pictures. 
Among  the  Russians,  both  in  the  earlier  and  later  periods  of 
their  history,  this  attachment  is  carried  to  an  almost  ridiculous 
extent.  “It  is,”  says  Dr.  Stanley,  “the  main  support  and 
standard  of  their  religious  faith  and  practice.  It  is  like  the 
rigid  observance  of  Sunday  to  a Scotchman,  or  the  Auto  da 
Fd  to  a Spaniard,  or  like  fasting  to  a Copt.  Everywhere,  in 
public  and  in  private,  the  sacred  picture  is  the  consecrating 
element.  In  the  corner  of  every  room,  at  the  corner  of  every 
street,  over  gateways,  in  offices,  in  steamers,  in  stations,  in 
taverns,  is  the  picture  hung,  with  the  lamp  burning  before  it. 
In  domestic  life  it  plays  the  part  of  the  family  Bible,  of  the 
wedding  gift,  of  the  birth-day  present,  of  the  ancestral  portrait. 
In  the  national  life,  it  is  the  watchword,  the  flag,  which  has 
sustained  the  courage  of  generals,  and  roused  the  patriotism  of 
troops.  It  has  gone  forth  to  meet  the  Tartars,  the  Poles,  and 
the  French.  It  has  been  carried  by  Demetrius,  by  Peter,  by 
Suwarrow,  by  Kutusoff.  A taste,  a passion  for  pictures,  not 
as  works  of  art,  but  as  emblems,  as  lessons  of  instruction,  is 
thus  engendered  and  multiplied  in  common  life,  beyond  all 
example  elsewhere.”* 

On  this  same  subject,  Macarius,  a Syrian  traveller  of  the 
17th  century,  remarks:  “The  Muscovites  are  vastly  in  love 
with  pictures,  regarding  neither  the  beauty  of  the  painting,  nor 
the  skill  of  the  painter;  for  with  them  a beautiful  and  an  ugly 
painting  are  all  one.  They  honour  and  bow  to  them  perpetu- 
ally, though  the  figure  be  only  the  daub  of  children,  or  a 
sketch  upon  a leaf  of  paper.  Of  a whole  army,  there  is  pro- 
bably not  a man  but  carries  in  his  knapsack  a gaudy  picture, 


* Lectures  on  the  Eastern  Church,  pp.  411,  412. 


The  Russian  Church. 


619 


1864.] 


in  a simple  cover,  with  which  he  never  parts ; and  whenever  he 
halts,  he  sets  it  up  on  a piece  of  wood  and  worships  it.”* 

Passing  from  common  life  to  the  church,  the  same  pecu- 
liarity presents  itself.  In  the  churches  of  Moscow,  for  exam- 
ple, “ from  top  to  bottom,  from  side  to  side,  walls,  and  roof, 
and  screen,  and  columns,  are  a mass  of  gilded  pictures ; not  one 
of  them  of  any  artistic  value,  not  one  put  in  for  the  sake  of 
show  or  effect,  but  all  cast  in  the  same  ancient  mould,  or  over- 
cast with  the  same  venerable  hue,  and  each  one,  from  the 
smallest  figure  in  the  smallest  compartment  to  the  gigantic 
faces  which  look  down,  with  their  large  open  eyes,  from  the 
arched  vaults  above,  performing  its  own  part,  and  bearing  a 
relation  to  the  whole.” 

Vladimir  I.,  the  founder  of  the  Russian  church,  has  been 
canonized,  and  is  called  a saint;  but  he  seems  not  so  well  to 
deserve  the  title  as  Vladimir  II.,  who  came  to  the  throne  in 
1114.  His  wife  was  Gytha,  a daughter  of  Harold,  king  of 
England.  The  details  of  his  life  can  be  understood  only 
through  the  obscure  and  fragmentary  records  of  his  time ; but 
his  general  character  may  be  sufficiently  gathered  from  his 
dying  injunctions  to  his  sons. 

“ 0 my  children,  praise  God,  and  love  men.  For  it  is  not 
fasting,  nor  solitude,  nor  monastic  life,  that  will  secure  your 
salvation,  but  only  doing  good.  Forget  not  the  poor,  but 
nourish  them.  Remember  that  riches  come  from  God,  and  are 
given  you  only  for  a short  time.  Do  not  bury  your  wealth  in 
the  ground ; for  this  is  against  the  precepts  of  Christianity. 
Be  fathers  to  orphans.  Be  judges  in  the  cause  of  widows,  and 
do  not  let  the  powerful  oppress  the  weak.  . . . Never  take  the 
name  of  God  in  vain;  and  never  break  the  oath  you  have 
made.” 

“ Be  not  envious  at  the  triumph  of  the  wicked,  and  the  suc- 
cess of  treachery.  Fear  the  lot  of  the  impious.  Do  not  desert 
the  sick,  or  fear  the  sight  of  a corpse,  for  we  must  all  die. 
Receive  with  joy  the  blessing  of  the  clergy,  and  do  not  keep 
thyself  away  from  them.  Do  them  good,  that  they  may  pray 
to  God  for  you.  Drive  out  of  your  heart  all  the  suggestions 


* Travels,  vol.  ii.  p.  50. 


620 


The  Russian  Church. 


[October 


of  pride,  remembering  that  we  are  all  perishable — to-day  full 
of  hope,  to-morrow  in  the  coffin.  Abhor  lying,  drunkenness, 
and  debauchery.  Love  your  wives,  but  do  not  suffer  them  to 
have  power  over  you.  Endeavour  constantly  to  acquire  know- 
ledge. Without  having  quitted  his  palace,  my  father  spoke 
five  languages — a thing  which  wins  for  us  the  admiration  of 
foreigners. 

“In  war  be  vigilant;  be  an  example  to  your  soldiers.  When 
you  travel  through  the  provinces,  do  not  suffer  your  attendants 
to  do  the  least  injury  to  the  inhabitants.  Entertain  always,  at 
your  own  expense,  the  master  of  the  house  in  which  you  stop  to 
rest.  0 my  children,  be  not  afraid  of  death,  or  of  wild  beasts. 
Trust  in  Providence;  for  this  surpasses  all  human  precau- 
tions.” 

Thus  counselled  a Russian  prince  in  the  12th  century. 
What  prince  or  potentate,  since  that  period,  has  given  better 
advice  to  his  children. 

The  monks  are,  and  long  have  been,  a numerous  and  power- 
ful body  of  ecclesiastics  in  Russia.  Some  of  them  reside  in 
convents,  following  the  rule  of  St.  Basil;  but  others,  notwith- 
standing the  severity  of  the  climate,  are  anchorets  of  the  wild- 
est and  most  fanatical  stamp.  Even  the  Stylites,  or  Pillar 
saints,  who  never  reached  the  west  of  Europe,  are  found  in  the 
heart  of  Russia.  The  following  account  of  them  is  by  English 
travellers  of  the  16th  century:  “There  are  certain  Eremites 
who  go  stark  naked,  save  a clout  about  their  middle,  with  their 
hair  hanging  long  and  wildly  about  their  shoulders,  and  many 
of  them  with  an  iron  collar  or  chain  about  their  necks  or  waists, 
even  in  the  depth  of  winter.  These  the  people  take  as  pro- 
phets and  men  of  great  holiness,  giving  them  the  liberty  to 
speak  what  they  list,  without  any  controlment,  though  it  be  of 
the  very  highest  himself.”  “One  of  this  class,  whom  they  call 
Basil,  took  upon  him  to  reprove  the  old  Emperor,  Ivan  IY.,  for 
all  his  cruelty  and  oppression  of  the  people.  The  body  of  this 
hermit  lies  in  a sumptuous  church,  built  on  purpose  to  receive 
it,  near  the  Emperor’s  house  in  Moscow,  his  iron  collar  and 
chain  hanging  over  it,  and  him  have  they  canonized  for  a 
saint.”* 

* Fletcher’s  Russian  Commonwealth,  p.  117. 


The  Russian  Church . 


621 


1864.] 

Another,  who  lived  at  the  same  time,  is  thus  described  by 
Mr.  Horsey.  “ I saw  this  impostor  or  magician — a foul  crea- 
ture. He  went  naked  both  in  winter  and  summer,  enduring  the 
extremes  both  of  heat  and  frost.  He  did  many  things  through 
the  magical  illusions  of  the  devil,  and  was  much  followed  and 
praised  both  by  prince  and  people.”  He  was  a means,  at 
one  time,  of  saving  his  native  town  of  Plescow.  When 
Ivan  IV.,  surnamed  “ the  Terrible,”  came  there  with  the 
design  of  murdering  all  the  inhabitants,  the  hermit  rebuked 
him  in  the  most  solemn  terms.  At  the  same  time  he  pointed  to 
a black  thunder  cloud  over  their  heads,  and  threatened  the 
Emperor  with  instant  destruction,  in  case  he,  or  one  of  his 
army,  touched  so  much  as  a hair  on  the  least  child’s  head  in 
the  city.  Ivan  trembled  and  retired,  and  the  city  was  saved. 

The  monasteries  in  Russia  are  very  numerous  and  strong. 
Standing,  for  instance,  on  the  walls  of  the  Kremlin,  and  look- 
ing over  the  city  of  Moscow,  the  eye  rests  at  once  on  the  towers, 
of  vast  monasteries,  which,  at  regular  intervals,  encircle  the 
outskirts  of  the  whole  city,  each  encompassed  with  its  embat- 
tled walls,  and  forming  together  a girdle  of  gigantic  for- 
tresses. 

About  the  year  1223,  commenced  the  onslaught  of  the  Mogul 
Tartars,  under  the  descendants  of  Genghis  Khan  and  Tamer- 
lane, upon  the  domains  of  Russia.  The  war  continued,  with 
various  success,  for  two  hundred  years;  and  it  is  of  the  Lord’s 
mercies  that  Christianity  was  not  entirely  obliterated.  It  is 
said  to  have  been  through  the  influence  of  the  clergy  and  the 
monks,  that  the  Tartars  were  finally  defeated  and  driven  from 
the  country.  The  most  sacred  of  the  Russian  convents  is  that 
of  “the  Troitza,”  or  the  holy  Trinity,  founded  in  the  year 
1338.  It  is  situate  about  sixty  miles  from  Moscow,  in  the 
midst  of  one  of  those  interminable  forests  which  cover  all  the 
uncultivated  parts  of  Russia.  It  is  as  much  a fortress  as  a 
monastery,  and  is  visited  by  pilgrims  innumerable,  from  all 
parts  of  the  empire.  In  this  wild  and  uncultivated  spot,  near 
the  close  of  the  fourteenth  century,  lived  the  renowned  hermit, 
Sergius.  It  was  his  prayers  and  blessing  which  encouraged 
the  desponding  Prince  Demetrius  to  renew  his  attack  upon  the 
Tartars  near  the  river  Don.  Two  of  his  monks  accompanied 


622 


The  Russian  Church. 


[October 


Demetrius  to  the  field.  They  fought  in  coats  of  mail  drawn 
over  their  monastic  garb,  and  the  enemy  was  repulsed. 

It  was  from  this  same  convent,  at  a later  period,  that  an 
influence  went  forth  to  confound  the  Tartars.  When  Ivan  III. 
wavered,  as  Demetrius  had  done,  it  was  by  the  remonstrance  of 
Archbishop  Bassian,  a former  prior  of  the  Trinity  convent, 
that  the  king  was  driven  to  take  the  field.  “Dost  thou  fear 
death?”  cried  the  aged  prelate.  “Thou  too  must  die,  as  well 
as  others.  Death  is  the  lot  of  all  men ; none  can  escape  it. 
Give  these  warriors  into  my  hand,  and,  old  as  I am,  I will  not 
spare  myself,  nor  turn  my  back  upon  the  Tartars.”  Aroused 
by  this  appeal,  Ivan  returned  to  the  camp.  The  Tartars  fled 
without  a blow,  and  Russia  was  delivered. 

As  the  invasion  and  expulsion  of  the  Tartars  form  the  first 
great  crisis  of  Russian  history,  so  the  invasion  and  expulsion  of 
the  Poles  constitute  the  second.  “We  are  so  much  accus- 
tomed,” says  Dr.  Stanley,  “to  regard  the  Russians  as  the 
oppressors  of  the  Poles,  that  we  find  it  difficult  to  conceive  a 
time  when  the  Poles  were  the  oppressors  of  the  Russians.  Our 
minds  are  so  preoccupied  with  the  Russian  partition  of  Poland, 
that  we  almost  refuse  to  admit  the  fact  that  there  was  once  a 
Polish  partition  of  Russia.  Yet  so  it  was;  and  neither  the  civil 
nor  the  ecclesiastical  history  of  Russia  can  be  understood,  with- 
out keeping  in  mind  that  long  family  quarrel  between  the  two 
great  Sclavonic  nations,  to  us  so  obscure,  but  to  them  so 
ingrained,  so  inveterate,  so  intelligible.”* 

The  Poles  were  at  the  time  here  referred  to  (A.  D.  1605),  as 
they  now  are,  Roman  Catholics;  and  the  wars  between  the  two 
countries  served  to  intensify  the  hatred  of  the  Russians,  not 
only  against  the  Poles  in  particular,  but  against  the  Catholic 
religion  everywhere. 

In  this  struggle,  as  in  the  last,  it  was  the  church  that  saved 
the  empire;  and  the  monastery  of  the  Trinity  saved  them  both. 
When  the  Sovereign  and  the  Patriarch  had  both  disappeared 
before  their  enemies,  the  convent  Troitza  still  stood  erect.  Its 
fortifications  again  served  a noble  purpose.  Its  warlike  tradi- 
tions revived  in  the  persons  of  its  warlike  monks.  As  Deme- 


* Lectures  on  the  Eastern  Church,  p.  449. 


The  Russian  Church. 


623 


1864.] 

trius  had  formerly  received  his  blessing  from  Sergius,  so  the 
Prince  Pojarsky  was  sent  forth  on  his  mission  of  blood  by  Dio- 
nysius, a successor  of  Sergius.  In  a little  time,  Moscow  was 
retaken,  and  the  empire  was  saved. 

It  was  at  this  time  that  Demetrius,  the  only  remaining  scion 
of  the  stock  of  Ruric,  disappeared,  and  the  dynasty  of  Romanoff 
was  established.  Philaret,  once  a humble  parish  priest,  but 
afterwards  Patriarch  of  Moscow,  was  the  father  of  Michael 
Romanoff,  and  the  founder  of  this  illustrious  house. 

For  several  hundred  years,  the  sovereigns  of  Russia  had 
borne  the  title  of  Dukes; — Dukes  of  Kieff,  of  Vladimir,  and  of 
Moscow.  But  in  1538,  under  Ivan  IV.,  they  assumed  the  more 
pretentious  title  of  Czar;  which  is  but  a contraction  for  Cesar. 
The  Czar  of  Russia  is  a sacred  character.  His  coronation  is  a 
solemn  event,  preceded  by  fasting  and  seclusion,  and  occurring 
in  the  most  sacred  church  in  Moscow.  In  the  form  of  investi- 
ture, he  is  not  a mere  passive  recipient,  but  is  himself  the  most 
active  performer.  On  his  knees,  in  the  midst  of  the  assembled 
multitude,  he  recites  aloud  the  Confession  of  the  orthodox 
church,  and  offers  up  a prayer  of  intercession  for  the  empire. 
He  places  the  crown  upon  his  own  head;  and  entering  through 
the  doors  of  the  innermost  sanctuary,  he  takes  from  the  altar 
the  elements  of  bread  and  wine,  and  communicates  with  the 
bishops,  priests,  and  deacons. 

The  city  of  Moscow  was  founded  in  the  year  1147,  and  is, 
beyond  all  others,  the  sacred  city  of  Russia.  It  has  a hold  upon 
the  religious  mind  of  Christendom  greater,  perhaps,  than  that  of 
any  other  city,  if  we  except  Jerusalem  and  Rome.  Like  Rome 
it  is  a city  of  innumerable  churches,  of  everlasting  bells,  of 
endless  processions,  of  tombs  and  thrones,  of  relics,  treasures, 
invasions,  and  deliverances,  as  far  back  as  its  history  extends. 
Then  the  Kremlin,  with  its  crested  towers  and  impregnable 
walls,  unites  within  itself  all  the  elements  of  the  ancient  reli- 
gious life  of  Russia.  Side  by  side  stand  the  three  cathedrals  of 
the  marriages,  the  coronations,  and  the  funerals  of  the  Czars. 
In  the  last  of  these,  lie  the  coffins  of  the  Czars,  and  twice  every 
year  a funeral  service  is  performed  for  them  all.  Hard  by  are 
two  convents,  half  palatial  and  half  episcopal,  while  over  all 
stands  the  double,  triple  palace  of  the  Patriarch  and  the  Czar. 


624  The  Russian  Church.  [October 

I have  said  that  the  first  who  assumed  the  title  of  Czar  was 
Ivan  IV.,  surnamed  “the  Terrible,”  about  the  year  1538.  His 
character  was  made  up  of  strange  inconsistencies,  sometimes 
intensely  religious,  according  to  the  fashion  of  the  age;  at 
others,  intensely  savage  and  cruel.  Sometimes  he  would  retire, 
for  weeks  together,  to  a monastery  which  he  had  built  for  him- 
self at  Moscow.  He  would  himself  ring  the  bell  for  matins  at 
three  o’clock  in  the  morning;  and  during  the  services,  which 
lasted  seven  hours,  he  would  read,  and  chant,  and  pray,  with 
such  fervour  that  the  marks  of  his  prostrations  would  remain 
long  after  on  his  forehead.  In  the  intervals  he  would  go  down 
to  the  dungeons  underneath  the  convent,  that  he  might  see,  with 
his  own  eyes,  his  prisoners  tortured ; and  always  returned  with 
a face  beaming  with  delight.  On  one  occasion,  he  is  said  to 
have  nailed  the  hat  of  an  ambassador  to  his  head.  On  another, 
he  drove  his  huge  iron  walking-stick  thi’ough  the  foot  of  a man 
whose  attention  he  wished  to  secure.  Indeed,  during  the  last 
half  of  his  reign,  he  was  little  better  than  a madman.  Yet  so 
venerable  was  his  office,  that  he  seems  to  have  been  loved  by 
his  people,  as  well  as  feared,  and  to  have  been  regarded  with 
high  honour  when  he  was  no  more. 

Next  in  honour  to  the  Czar  was  the  Primate  or  Metropolitan. 
He  was,  at  the  first,  subordinate  to  the  Patriarch  of  Constan- 
tinople, but  became,  at  length,  independent ; and,  in  the  latter 
part  of  the  sixteenth  century,  was  himself  constituted  the 
Patriarch  of  Moscow.  The  Patriarchate  was  abolished  by 
Peter  the  Great,  who  could  not  brook  a rival  near  him;  but 
whether  Patriarch  or  Primate,  the  honours  paid  to  the  head  of 
the  Russian  Church  are  much  the  same.  “ When  he  leaves  the 
cathedral,”  says  Dr.  Stanley,  “it  is  with  difficulty  that  he  can 
struggle  through  the  crowd,  who  press  to  devour  his  hand 
with  kisses,  or  to  lay  a finger  on  the  hem  of  his  garment.  And 
when  he  drives  away  in  his  state-carriage,  every  one  stands 
bareheaded  as  he  passes,  while  the  bells  of  innumerable 
churches  and  chapels  join  in  an  ever  increasing  river  of 
sound.”  . 

But  neither  the  grandeur  of  the  office,  nor  the  enthusiasm  of 
the  people,  has  ever  raised  the  Primates  of  Russia  to  a level 
of  political  importance  with  some  of  the  prelates  of  Europe. 


The  Russian  Church. 


625 


1864.] 

There  has  been  no  Hildebrand,  or  Becket,  or  Anselm,  among 
them.  One  of  them  (Philip)  fell  a martyr  to  the  barbarity  of 
Ivan  the  Terrible.  For  administering  a merited  reproof  to 
this  monster  of  cruelty,  he  was  dragged  away  from  the  cathe- 
dral and  put  to  death. 

Perhaps  the  most  remarkable  of  the  Primates  of  Russia  was 
the  Patriarch  Nicon,  who  l’eceived  the  mitre  about  the  middle 
of  the  seventeenth  century.  He  introduced  some  important 
changes  into  the  service  of  the  church,  and  well  deserves  to  be 
called  a reformer.  He  set  himself  with  stern  severity  to  root 
out  some  of  the  more  flagrant  abuses  of  the  Russian  hierarchy, 
especially  the  crying  evil  of  intemperance.  In  his  own  person, 
he  exhibited  a new  type  of  pastoral  virtue  and  liberality.  He 
founded  hospitals  and  alms-houses,  relieved  the  wants  of  the 
poor,  visited  prisons,  and,  with  a promptitude  of  justice  rare  in 
the  east,  released  the  prisoners,  if  he  found  them  innocent. 
Through  his  intervention,  the  seclusion  of  the  female  sex  was 
partially  broken  up  ; so  that  the  Empress,  who  had  never  before 
entered  a church  but  in  the  night,  now  appeared  there  publicly 
by  day.  The  baptisms  of  the  Latin  church,  of  which  the 
validity  is  to  this  day  denied  by  the  Greeks,  were,  by  his 
sanction,  first  recognized  by  the  Russian  church. 

Nicon  also  showed  himself  the  friend  and  patron  of  educa- 
tion. The  printing-press  was  introduced,  and  Greek  and 
Latin  were  taught  in  the  schools.  The  study  of  the  Bible  was 
encouraged,  and  a new  and  more  accurate  translation  was 
attempted.  But  the  greatest  change  which  he  effected — one  at 
that  time  without  example  in  the  east — was  the  revival  of 
preaching.  From  his  lips  was  first  heard,  after  many  centu- 
ries, the  sound  of  a living,  practical  sermon.  Archdeacon  Paul 
has  given  us  several  examples  of  his  discourses,  which  he  com- 
plains of  as  tediously  long.  On  one  occasion,  when  the  Czar 
was  going  forth  to  war,  “the  Patriarch  blessed  him,  and  then 
raised  his  voice  in  prayer  for  him,  reading  a beautiful  exor- 
dium, with  parables  and  proverbs  from  the  ancients ; such  as 
how  God  granted  victory  to  Moses  over  Pharaoh,  and  to  Con- 
stantine over  Maximianus  and  Maxentius,  adding  many  exam- 
ples of  this  nature,  with  much  prolixity  of  discourse,  moving  on 
at  his  leisure  like  a copious  stream  of  flowing  water.  When  he 

VOL.  xxxvi. — no.  iv.  79 


626  The  Russian  Church.  [October 

stammered,  or  made  mistakes,  lie  set  himself  right  again  -with 
perfect  composure.  No  one  seemed  to  find  fault  with  him,  or 
to  be  tired  of  his  discourse,  but  all  were  silent  and  attentive 
like  a slave  before  his  master.”* 

Still,  we  cannot  hold  up  the  Patriarch  Nicon  as  an  object  of 
unqualified  admiration.  His  manners  were  rough,  and  his 
measures  not  unfrequently  harsh  and  repulsive.  “He  was,” 
says  Archdeacon  Paul,  “ a very  butcher  among  the  clergy. 
His  janissaries  are  perpetually  going  round  the  city,  and  when 
they  find  any  priest  or  monk  in  a state  of  intoxication,  they 
carry  him  to  prison,  strip  him,  and  scourge  him.  His  prisons 
are  full  of  them,  galled  with  heavy  chains  and  logs  of  wood  on 
their  necks  and  legs,  or  they  are  compelled  to  sift  flour  day 
and  night  in  the  bake-house.”  The  deserts  of  Siberia  were 
peopled  with  dissolute  clergy,  whom  Nicon  had  banished  there 
with  their  wives  and  children. 

For  a loDg  time  the  Patriarch  Nicon  and  the  Czar  Alexis 
lived  together  on  terms  of  the  most  intimate  friendship.  “They 
appeared,”  says  Mouravieff,  “as  one  and  the  same  person  in 
all  acts  of  government,  passing  most  of  their  days  together,  in 
the  church,  in  the  council- chamber,  and  at  the  friendly  board. 
To  unite  themselves  still  closer  by  the  bonds  -of  spiritual  rela- 
tionship, the  Patriarch  became  godfather  to  all  the  children  of 
his  sovereign,  and  they  both  made  a mutual  vow  never  to  desert 
each  other  on  this  side  the  grave.”f 

But  at  length  the  nobles,  who  were  displeased  with  the  rigor 
of  Nicon’s  government,  and  envious  at  the  favour  shown  him  by 
the  Czar,  contrived  to  separate  the  two  friends,  and  to  alienate 
Alexis  from  him.  The  breach,  once  opened,  gradually  in- 
creased; all  intercourse  between  the  two  was  broken  off;  and 
in  a burst  of  indignation,  the  Patriarch  resigned  his  place. 
He  afterwards  assayed  to  recall  his  resignation,  and  recover 
not  only  his  office,  but  his  place  in  the  affections  of  his  sove- 
reign; but  it  was  too  late.  He  was  formally  deposed,  degraded, 
and  imprisoned;  and  though,  after  the  death  of  Alexis,  the 
sun  of  the  royal  favour  once  more  shone  upon  him,  he  lived  not 
to  enjoy  it.  He  died  on  his  journey  from  the  Siberian  prison, 


* Macarius’  Travels,  vol.  ii.  pp.  59,  76. 


f Hist,  of  Russia,  p.  215. 


The  Russian  Church. 


627 


1864.] 

and  was  buried  in  the  convent  of  the  New  Jerusalem,  which 
himself  had  founded. 

Peter  the  Great  was  a son  of  Alexis  by  his  second  wife,  and 
came  to  the  throne  of  Russia  in  1696.  Of  the  perils  of  his 
early  years — of  his  romantic  journeys  and  residences  in  foreign 
lands,  to  copy  their  manners,  acquire  their  learning,  and  make 
himself  acquainted  with  their  arts — of  the  leading  events  of  his 
life  generally,  it  is  not  necessary  here  to  speak.  It  is  chiefly 
as  a civil  and  religious  reformer,  and  in  his  connection  with  the 
church,  that  he  claims  our  notice  at  the  present  time.  While 
abroad  in  foreign  lands,  Peter  conversed  with  their  ecclesiastics, 
attended  their  meetings,  and  made  himself  acquainted  with  the 
different  forms  of  Christian  faith  and  worship.  Still,  he  con- 
tinued faithful  to  the  church  in  which  he  had  been  baptized; 
although  in  several  particulars  he  attempted  a reformation. 

In  the  year  1700,  he  adopted  the  European  calendar,  com- 
mencing the  year  in  January  instead  of  September.  He  abol- 
ished the  office  of  Patriarch,  as  before  stated,  substituting  in 
its  place  a Synod  of  Prelates,  to  be  presided  over  by  himself, 
or  by  his  Legate.  He  abolished  the  Strelitzes  or  Janissaries, 
who  had  been  constituted  to  be  the  sovereign’s  bodyguard,  but 
who  had  virtually  controlled  the  sovereigns,  and  been  a terror 
to  them,  through  long  ages.  In  place  of  these,  he  organized  a 
new  army  on  the  German  model,  entering  the  ranks  himself, 
rising  through  every  grade  of  office,  and  requiring  his  nobles 
to  do  the  same.  Finding  Russia  without  ships,  he  laid  the 
foundation  of  a navy,  working  himself  in  foreign  shipyards,  and 
employing  Venetian  and  Dutch  shipwrights  to  build  his  vessels. 
By  his  sword  he  also  opened  ports  for  his  ships,  both  in  the 
Black  Sea  and  in  the  Baltic,  and  with  incredible  labour  founded 
the  city  of  Petersburg,  and  made  it  his  capital. 

To  raise  a revenue,  he  introduced  a general  taxation,  tax- 
ing, among  other  things,  the  beards  of  his  subjects,  and  their 
long-tailed  Tartar  coats;  and  as  the  Russians  did  not  care  to 
part  with  these  appendages,  they  became  a fruitful  source  of 
income.  He  encouraged  and  regulated  the  press,  caused  valua- 
ble translations  to  be  made  and  published,  and  established 
naval  and  other  schools.  He  fostered  commerce,  requiring  his 
people  to  trade  with  other  countries — a course  which,  up  to 


628 


The  Russian  Church. 


[October 


this  time,  had  been  sternly  prohibited.  He  dug  canals  and 
built  factories,  established  a uniformity  of  weights  and  mea- 
sures, framed  a new  code  of  laws,  organized  tribunals,  and 
built  hospitals.  He  set  himself  sternly  against  all  impostures 
and  pious  frauds,  insisting  that  divine  honours  should  be  paid 
to  God,  and  not  to  holy  pictures  and  relics,  and  that  no  false 
miracles  should  be  ascribed  to  them. 

It  is  not  to  be  supposed  that  these  numerous  innovations  in 
the  customs  of  a semi-barbarous  people  were  acquiesced  in 
without  opposition.  Peter  encountered  a strong  resistance, 
more  especially  in  his  change  of  the  calendar,  his  abolition  of 
the  Patriarchate,  and  his  attack  upon  the-  beards  and  the  long 
coats  of  his  people.  The  separatists,  called  Rascolniks  and 
Starovers,  caused  themselves  and  their  sovereign  a good  deal 
of  trouble;  but  Peter’s  intercourse  with  foreign  nations  had 
taught  him  toleration,  and  the  great  body,  not  only  of  his 
people  but  of  his  clergy,  were  prepared  to  follow  him. 

The  character  of  Peter  has  been  variously  estimated.  That 
he  had  talents,  shrewdness,  an  indomitable  perseverance,  and 
an  iron  will,  there  can  be  no  doubt;  but  then  he  was  badly 
educated,  and  early  contracted  pernicious  habits  which  could 
not  be  controlled.  “I  wish  to  reform  my  empire,”  said  he  on 
one  occasion,  “but  I cannot  reform  myself.”  One  of  the 
darkest  spots  upon  his  character  was  the  execution  of  his  first- 
born son,  on  a charge  of  treason,  but  with  the  intent,  probably, 
to  put  him  out  of  the  way. 

Peter’s  second  wife,  Catharine,  who  succeeded  him  on  the 
throne,  was  raised  from  a low  and  ignominious  life ; but  she 
had  great  influence  over  him  in  his  later  years,  and  this  influ- 
ence, it  may  be  hoped,  was  for  good.  He  became  temperate 
and  simple  in  his  habits,  while  his  time  was  devoted  to 
unwearied  labours  in  the  service  of  his  country.  After  a very 
painful  illness,  which  he  endured  with  calmness  and  resigna- 
tion, he  died  on  the  28th  of  January,  1725. 

Peter  was  the  first  of  the  Russian  sovereigns  who  assumed 
the  title  of  Emperor.  His  eleven  successors,  though  by  no 
means  bis  equals  in  vigour  and  in  power,  have  in  general 
adopted  and  carried  out  his  plans  of  reform;  and,  in  so  doing, 


Modern  Philology. 


629 


1864.] 


have  transformed  a rude  and  semi-barbarous  people  into  one 
of  the  great  powers  of  Europe  and  the  world. 

Alexander  I.,  who  died  in  1825,  was  perhaps  the  best  of 
the  Russian  emperors.  He  industriously  sought  the  good  of 
his  people,  favoured  the  circulation  of  the  Scriptures  among 
them,  and  is  supposed  to  have  been  a truly  pious  man.  His 
namesake  (Alexander  II.),  the  present  Emperor,  is  thought  to 
resemble  him  in  some  respects.  Like  him,  he  favours  the  cir- 
culation of  the  Scriptures ; and  he  has  commended  himself  to 
the  consideration  of  all  good  men  by  the  emancipation  of  mil- 
lions of  serfs. 

One  of  the  prelates  of  the  Russian  church  is  distinguishing 
himself,  at  the  present  time,  by  his  untiring  missionary  labours. 
I refer  to  the  Archbishop  of  Kamtschatka.  Not  in  cars  and 
steamers,  but  in  rough  canoes,  and  on  reindeer  sledges,  he 
traverses  the  long  chain  of  Pagan  islands  which  uiiite  the 
Asiatic  and  American  continents,  and  is  leading  many  of  the 
besotted  natives  to  a knowledge  of  Christian  truth.  Long 
may  he  live  to  pursue  successfully  these  labours  of  love,  and 
may  many  others  be  raised  up  to  copy  his  example,  and  to 
call  him  blessed.  And  may  this  latest  branch  of  the  ancient 
oriental  church,  divesting  itself  of  formality  and  superstition, 
and  bringing  forth  much  fruit  unto  holiness,  yet  prove  itself  to 
be  a living  branch  of  the  living  vine. 


/%  ft”-  AS  . ,a..v  - ^ - 0.  J, 

Art.  III. — Modern  Philology.  Its  Discoveries , History , and 
Influence ; with  Maps , Tabular  Views,  and  an  Index.  By 
Benjamin  W.  Dwight.  First  Series,  8vo,  pp.  360.  Second 
Series,  pp.  554.  New  York:  Charles  Scribner,  1864. 

Nothing  in  the  nature  of  man  is  more  wonderful  than  the  har- 
mony between  his  physical  and  spiritual  constitution,  and  the 
influence  exerted  by  the  one  upon  the  other.  The  soul  is  shut  up 
in  this  material  casing,  excluded  from  all  direct  contact  with 
anything  external.  The  bodily  organs  are  its  only  medium  of 
communication  with  the  world  without;  and  in  fact  the  soul 


630 


Modern  Philology. 


[October 


appears  to  come  first  to  the  consciousness  of  its  own  existence 
through  the  impressions  thus  received.  It  is  most  interesting 
to  observe  how  these  organs  are  contrived  to  accomplish  not 
only  the  physical  ends  which  they  are  designed  to  answer,  but 
in  addition,  to  meet  the  wants  of  the  soul,  promote  the  develop- 
ment of  its  latent  powers,  and  give  expression  to  its  hidden 
workings. 

The  organs  of  speech  and  hearing,  for  example,  are  purely 
material  instruments,  constructed  with  reference  to  the  laws  of 
sound,  as  created  and  propagated  in  the  subtle  medium  of  the 
atmosphere.  The  inferior  animals  have  similar  organs  for  the 
production  of  sounds  or  the  utterance  of  cries  which  accomplish 
ends  suited  to  the  wants  of  their  being.  But  it  would  have 
been  impossible  to  imagine,  prior  to  experience,  what  extensive 
and  varied  uses  they  could  be  made  to  subserve  on  behalf  of 
man.  ’lyith  a slight  modification  adapting  them  to  the  utter- 
ance and  ready  perception  of  articulate  sound,  intelligent  and 
intelligible  speech  has  become  possible.  Without  this,  man 
would  have  been  consigned  to  perpetual  and  hopeless  imbecility. 
His  intellectual  powers  and  capacities  never  could  have  been 
unfolded.  His  creation  would  have  been  a failure.  But,  by  a 
signal  instance  of  far-reaching  spiritual  consequences  suspended 
upon  a simple  mechanical  contrivance,  possessed  of  this,  man 
becomes  man.  The  development  of  reason,  civilization,  art, 
and  science,  are  the  sublime  sequences. 

When  in  early  infancy  we  began  to  learn  the  meanings  and 
use  of  words,  and  to  make  our  first  rude  attempts  at  their  pro- 
nunciation, our  education  was  begun,  and  in  the  most  effective 
manner.  We  were  learning  to  think,  for  speech  implies 
thought.  Language  is  not  learned  by  rote.  The  process  of 
its  acquisition  is  not  the  mere  retention  in  the  memory  of  so 
many  arbitrary  symbols  of  thought  put  together  by  equally 
arbitrary  rules.  It  is  not  as  when  a horse  or  a dog  is  trained 
by  forced  association  to  connect  a given  sense  with  particular 
sounds,  or  as  when  a parrot  is  made  mechanically  to  imitate 
them.  A child  is  taught  to  speak  by  awaking  the  faculty  of 
language  in  his  soul.  The  utterance  of  an  idea  or  of  an  emo- 
tion becomes  intelligible  to  him  only  as  it  excites  the  same 
within  him.  The  effort  to  comprehend  what  is  said  to  him, 


Modern  Philology. 


631 


1864.] 


exercises  and  strengthens  his  mind.  Every  one  who  ap- 
proaches him,  though  it  be  but  to  interest  or  amuse  him  for 
a moment,  becomes  his  teacher.  IIoAvever  simple  and  childish 
the  expressions  used  for  his  entertainment,  they  are  yet  the 
offspring  of  another  mind.  They  contain  the  forms  of  thought 
cast  in  the  mould  of  maturer  powers,  and  they  can  only  be 
understood  by  the  exercise  of  thought.  The  very  notion  of 
language  involves  classification,  comparison,  reflection.  The 
power  of  abstraction  is  called  into  exercise.  It  becomes  neces- 
sary to  refer  individuals  to  the  species  to  which  they  belong,  to 
distinguish  between  acts  in  themselves  considered,  and  the 
various  circumstances  of  time,  mode,  and  person,  to  separate 
qualities  from  substances,  to  conceive  of  the  different  degrees 
of  the  former  and  the  relations  of  the  latter,  to  perform  all 
those  mental  operations,  which  are  involved  in  a correct  appre- 
ciation of  whatever  belongs  to  the  derivation,  inflection,  and 
collocation  of  words.  The  most  cursory  review  of  what  is 
implied  in  the  acquisition  of  a language,  and  of  the  processes 
of  thought  necessary  to  accomplish  it,  will  reveal  how  large  a 
stock  of  ideas  must  be  amassed,  what  an  insight  must  be  gained 
into  their  several  relations,  and  what  an  amount  of  mental 
power  and  discipline  must  be  acquired. 

The  use  of  language  further  demands  besides  the  ability  to 
understand  what  is  spoken,  the  ability  to  speak  ourselves.  The 
former  renders  the  mind  active,  by  compelling  it  to  echo  and 
repeat  to  itself  the  thoughts  of  others ; the  latter  requires  it  to 
originate  and  express  its  own.  The  impulse  to  communicate  to 
others  what  is  passing  within  us,  is  instinctive  and  strong,  and 
this  not  only  when  required  by  some  necessity,  or  by  the  desire 
to  compass  some  particular  end,  but  without  any  more  definite 
motive  than  the  pleasure  of  saying  what  we  think  or  expressing 
what  we  feel.  And  this  impulse  is  of  incalculable  advantage  in 
the  unfolding  of  our  powers.  He  who  never  speaks,  will  think 
but  little.  The  fountain  must  be  allowed  to  flow  out,  or  it  will 
cease  to  flow  altogether.  A person  must  utter  his  ideas  if  he 
would  come  into  the  complete  mastery  and  possession  of  them ; 
he  must  put  them  into  a form  intelligible  by  others,  if  he  would 
arrive  at  a full  comprehension  of  them  himself.  In  intellectual 
things  the  law  is  of  rigorous  application.  He  that  scattereth 


632  Modern  Philology.  [October 

increaseth;  and  withholding  tendeth  to  poverty.  The  mind 
must  give  off  light  and  heat,  or  it  can  never  be  warmed  and  illu- 
mined itself.  We  have  no  clear  conception  even  of  our  own 
inward  states  until  we  are  roused  to  contemplate  them,  and  put 
them  into  a definite  and  objective  form  by  translating  them 
into  words.  Notions  which  we  have  never  sought  to  express  in 
this  precise  and  tangible  manner  may  float  vaguely  and  indis- 
tinctly in  the  mind ; but  they  will  not  be  relieved  of  this  dim 
and  misty  character  until  they  are  interpreted  in  language 
either  by  others  or  ourselves.  Language  is  the  vehicle  of 
thought  as  well  as  the  medium  of  its  expression.  It  is  by  it 
that  we  communicate  with  ourselves,  as  well  as  with  others. 

This  intimate  connection  between  language  and  our  inward 
exercises  discloses  a fresh  measure  of  the  influence  which  it  has 
upon  the  development  of  the  human  mind.  It  not  only,  as  we 
have  seen,  gives  its  earliest  stimulus  to  the  power  of  thought, 
by  teaching  the  child  both  to  reproduce  the  conceptions  of  others 
and  to  express  his  own,  but  it  supplies  the  permanent  mould  in 
which  his  thoughts  are  cast  forever  afterwards.  We  came  into 
being  surrounded  by  those  who  are  in  the  constant  and  familiar 
use  of  language,  to  whose  consciousness  it  has  not  the  charac- 
ter of  arbitrary  symbols,  representing  something  different  from 
themselves,  or  of  formal  rules  determined  by  some  external 
standard.  It  is  interwoven  with  every  operation  of  their 
minds.  It  is  their  souls’  natural  and  spontaneous  outgoing. 
They  know  no  difference  between  the  expression  they  utter  and 
the  thought  they  entertain.  One  is  not  only  the  precise  coun- 
terpart of  the  other ; but  they  are,  as  far  as  consciousness  can 
judge,  identical.  Language  is  simply  outspoken  thought,  the 
mind  unfolding  itself.  Now,  as  we  possess  the  same  mental 
and  physical  organization  with  those  by  whom  we  are  sur- 
rounded, disposing  us  originally  to  the  same  inward  exercises 
and  the  same  mode  of  expressing  them,  as  we  learn  to  think  in 
the  first  instance  by  thinking  their  thoughts,  and  are  thus  sup- 
plied with  a medium  by  which  our  thoughts  may  in  turn  be. made 
intelligible  to  them,  it  is  a matter  of  course  that  their  language 
becomes  ours,  not  merely  adopted  as  the  expression  of  thoughts 
independently  conceived,  but  wrought  into  the  whole  texture  and 
framework  of  our  souls.  It  gives  law  to  our  mental  operations, 


Modern  Philology. 


633 


1864.] 


determines  the  form  and  flow  of  our  thoughts,  becomes  itself 
our  inner  nature,  gives  a bent  to  our  powers  which  they  ever 
inflexibly  retain.  Language  is  consequently  not  to  be  re- 
garded as  something  wholly  external  to  the  soul,  which  it  uses 
as  a convenience.  It  is  not  even  something  foreign,  which  has 
been  obtruded  upon  it,  and  to  which  it  submits  from  sheer 
necessity.  It  is  something  precisely  conformed  to  its  nature, 
spontaneously  adopted  as  soon  as  it  is  proposed  and  understood, 
because  it  offers  the  legitimate  and  only  possible  unfolding  of 
the  faculties  originally  implanted  within  it.  It  becomes  thus  a 
part  of  its  constitution,  a law  of  its  life,  a power  in  the  soul, 
ever  present,  ever  active,  guiding  all  its  motions.  It  is  as  evi- 
dent and  uniform  in  its  operation  upon  the  human  mind  as 
gravitation  is  upon  matter.  We  are  made  sensible  of  one  as  of 
the  other,  not  by  a direct  perception  of  the  forces  themselves, 
but  by  beholding  their  effects. 

Every  living  language  has  its  seat  in  the  minds  of  those  who 
speak  it.  When  it  has  lost  its  present  hold  upon  their  souls, 
and  is  found  only  in  past  utterances  and  in  written  documents, 
it  is  petrified  and  dead.  While  it  lives,  it  exercises  a constraint 
which  is  felt  in  the  fashioning  of  every  sentence,  in  the  choice 
of  every  word  and  inflection.  With  all  the  free  variety  in  the 
sentiments  conveyed,  and  an  unlimited  range  in  the  mode  of 
conveying  them,  there  is  yet  a general  submission  to  the  control 
of  this  inward  power.  There  is  a constant  uniformity  in  the 
phenomena,  from  the  observation  of  which  the  grammarian 
deduces  his  rules,  and  the  lexicographer  the  meanings  of  words. 
But  the  law  of  the  language  is  anterior  to  all  grammars  and 
dictionaries,  and  independent  of  them.  They  who  have  seen 
neither,  will  use  words  and  inflections  with  unfailing  precision, 
even  where  delicate  shades  of  difference  are  involved;  and  this, 
though  they  might  be  able  to  give  no  other  reason  for  employ- 
ing this  word  rather  than  that,  or  this  form  in  preference  to 
another,  than  that  it  is  to  satisfy  an  inward  feeling.  These 
distinctions  are  felt  to  exist,  and  they  spontaneously  determine 
the  choice  of  words  and  forms,  even  though  the  philosophic 
student  of  language  may  find  himself  sorely  puzzled  to  explain, 
in  a complete  and  satisfactory  manner,  the  grounds  upon 
which  they  are  based,  or  even  to  define  exhaustively  their 
VOL.  xxxvi. — no.  iv.  80 


634 


Modern  Philology. 


[October 


precise  limits  and  character.  It  is  an  inward  law,  not  delib- 
erately submitted  to,  and  as  the  result  of  reflection,  but  the 
impress  of  the  language  under  which  the  mind  was  trained,  and 
its  habits  of  thought  formed. 

Language  may  be  said  to  be  the  body  of  which  thought  is 
the  soul,  a body  from  which  it  can  no  more  emancipate  itself, 
and  whose  character  can  no  more  be  changed  by  a direct  voli- 
tion than  the  human  soul  can  either  free  itself  from  the  clay  tene- 
ment in  which  it  dwells,  or  alter  its  nature.  There  is  a limita- 
tion in  both  cases,  no  doubt,  from  the  material  form  to  which 
the  spirit  is  bound:  its  actings  are  restricted  by  fixed  laws  and 
modes  of  operation.  How  far  this  is  an  evil  and  how  far  a 
good,  it  is  not  for  us  to  determine.  Higher  orders  of  spiritual 
intelligences  may  not  be  encumbered  by  these  restrictions, 
because  they  do  not  need  the  aid  which  material  forms  supply. 
It  is  enough  that  they  are  indispensable  to  us,  constituted  as 
we  are ; they  are  a necessity  imposed  upon  us  by  our  very 
nature.  To  attempt  to  rise  above  these  limitations  is  but  to 
destroy  ourselves.  Disembodied  spirits  and  thought  unfettered 
by  language  both  undoubtedly  exist ; but  we  can  form  no  more 
distinct  conception  of  one  than  of  the  other  in  our  present  state 
of  being.  These  material  aids  have  been  our  helpers  in  all 
that  we  know  of  activity;  and  for  us  to  refuse  to  use  them, 
because  something  higher  is  possible,  though  beyond  our  reach, 
is  to  cease  to  act  altogether. 

It  hence  results  that  every  language  is  possessed  of  organic 
unity  and  completeness.  It  is  not  an  accretion  but  a growth, 
the  product  of  a living  spirit,  the  expression  of  an  inner  law. 
It  must  accordingly  have  that  oneness  which  belongs  to  every 
living  body  and  which  consists  in  its  being  pervaded  by  its 
own  distinctive  vital  force.  This  reaches  to  every  part,  how- 
ever minute,  and  is  everywhere  the  same,  just  as  it  is  one  vitality 
which  animates  each  of  our  bodies.  The  same  blood  circulates 
through  the  whole  down  to  its  most  insignificant  portions,  and 
every  microscopic  molecule  of  that  blood  has  something 
about  it  by  which  it  can  be  recognized  as  belonging  to  a human 
being.  So  in  language  there  is  one  principle,  one  abiding  law, 
which  has  impressed  itself  on  every  part,  and  binds  in  one 
all  its  endless  ramifications  from  root  to  topmost  bough.  We 


1864.] 


Modern  Philology. 


635 


have  not  the  means  of  demonstrating  this  in  detail,  in  regard 
to  any  particular  language,  because  it  only  becomes  subject  to 
our  inspection  as  it  reveals  itself  in  the  phenomena  of  actual 
speech.  So  viewed  it  may  present  a fragmentary  appearance ; 
for  it  has  its  spring  in  what  is  accidental  and  occasional.  What 
is  actually  spoken,  depends  upon  the  need  or  the  impulse  of 
the  moment.  And  the  sum  of  these  occasional  utterances,  so 
far  as  we  can  gather  them  and  pass  them  in  review,  may  be 
chargeable  with  chasms  and  seeming  incoherencies  because  the 
links  that  unite  them  are  missing.  But  this  cannot  be  true  of 
the  language  in  its  proper  sense.  For  it  comprises  not  only 
the  sum  of  all  that  is  spoken,  but  of  all  that  could  be  thought 
or  spoken  by  the  people  of  whose  intellectual  life  it  is  the  per- 
manent and  necessary  law.  And  as  this  is  a unit  and  pos- 
sessed of  a specific  character,  which  distinguishes  it  from  the 
life  and  spirit  of  every  other  people  on  the  globe,  so  must  each 
language  have  its  governing  animating  principle,  in  which  its 
individuality  consists;  which  is  indestructible  and  invariable 
so  long  as  the  language  lives  and  remains  the  same.  The 
materials  of  which  the  body  of  a language  is  composed  may 
have  been  gathered  from  the  most  diverse  quarters,  and  when 
regarded  in  their  original  form  may  have  been  of  the  most 
heterogeneous  description.  But  as  they  are  wrought  into  this 
new  organism,  they  are  forced  to  undergo  an  assimilating  and 
vitalizing  process,  which  reduces  them  to  a harmonious  whole, 
informs  them  with  a common  life,  and  sets  each  in  organic 
relation  with  the  rest.  Thus  our  common  English  tongue  is 
based  upon  the  Anglo-Saxon,  and  has  drawn  from  the  Celtic, 
the  Latin,  the  Greek,  the  Norman,  and  other  sources,  and  yet 
it  is  an  independent  language,  not  a repetition  of  any  of  its 
predecessors,  nor  a confused  and  heterogeneous  mixture  of 
them.  It  has  as  distinct  a life  of  its  own,  governing  every 
part  and  impressed  upon  its  varied  elements,  as  if  all  had  been 
drawn  from  a single  source  or  had  been  created  expressly  for 
its  use.  On  the  other  hand,  modern  Italian  is  composed  of 
almost  the  identical  elements  of  the  ancient  Latin.  The  great 
bulk  of  its  words  are  the  very  same,  or  have  merely  undergone 
slight  phonetic  modifications.  But  so  diverse  a spirit  has  been 


636  Modern  Philology.  [October 

infused  into  these  elements,  that  the  entire  grammatical  struc- 
ture is  changed,  and  the  languages  are  totally  distinct. 

This  view  of  the  languages  of  the  world  suggests  a basis  for 
estimating  their  various  worth.  The  ideal  type  of  language  is 
that  which  shall  in  the  completest  manner  fulfil  its  proper  end ; 
which  shall  give  to  the  human  faculties,  so  far  as  this  falls 
within  its  province,  the  development  best  suited  to  their  nature, 
opening  to  them  the  amplest  range,  and  laying  the  least 
constraint  upon  their  free  expansion  and  legitimate  working; 
and  which  shall  at  the  same  time  supply  the  most  faithful  and 
adequate  representation  for  every  diversity  of  spiritual. states 
and  exercises.  It  is,  in  brief,  that  which  shall  be  best  fitted  to 
unfold  and  to  express  the  soul  of  man.  Approximation  to  this 
ideal  standard  is  the  test  of  excellence  in  languages.  They 
make  their  approaches  to  it  from  various  quarters  and  by 
every  conceivable  route;  and  one  of  the  most  curious  things  in 
their  comparative  study  is  the  tracing  out  of  the  diversity  of 
methods  employed  to  attain  a common  result  with  their  respec- 
tive merits  and  demerits.  Each  language  has  its  own  stock  of 
elemental  sounds,  chosen  from  the  entire  sum  of  those  which 
the  human  organs  are  capable  of  uttering,  the  Oriental  bring- 
ing in  his  harsh  and  difficult  gutturals,  the  Hottentot  his  pecu- 
liar click,  and  the  Chinese  converting  that  scale  of  tones,  which 
in  other  languages  indicates  the  varied  emotion  of  the  speaker, 
into  a constituent  part  of  the  signification  of  words.  The  mellow 
flexibility  of  the  Sanscrit,  linking  its  words  of  various  length  by 
their  significant  terminations  expressive  of  nice  modifications  of 
thought,  is  unknown  to  the  immovable  Chinese,  who  speaks  in 
rigid,  uninflected  monosyllables,  placing,  as  it  were,  his  un- 
wrought conceptions  side  by  side  without  elaboration,  and 
unfitted  together.  Relations  which  the  classic  tongues  subor- 
dinate and  cast  into  the  shade  by  making  of  them  mere  depen- 
dent syllables  attached  to  the  radical  word,  are  in  modern 
languages  brought  into  greater  prominence,  and  more  variously 
expressed  by  means  of  auxiliaries  and  particles.  Clearness 
and  logical  order  is  promoted  in  some  languages,  as  in  English, 
by  a uniform  sequence  of  words  in  the  sentence;  the  freer  col- 
location admissible  in  Latin  allows  of  nicer  shades  of  emphasis 
and  more  delicate  touches  of  feeling.  The  modern  Armenians 


Moral  Philology. 


637 


1864.] 


think  habitually  in  an  order  the  reverse  of  ours.  This  is  so 
precisely  true,  that  the  arrangement  of  the  words  adopted  in 
their  translation  of  the  Bible,  will  in  many  instances  be  yielded 
by  reading  the  verses  of  our  common  translation  backwards. 
And  one  of  the  difficulties  in  the  way  of  acquiring  a fluent  use 
of  that  tongue  is  this  necessity  which  it  imposes  of  inverting 
the  accustomed  style  of  thought,  by  requiring  the  introduction 
of  all  the  attendant  circumstances  first,  and  holding  back  the 
main  proposition  to  the  very  last  words  of  the  sentence.  The 
compound  words  and  complex  sentences  of  Indo-European 
tongues  have  no  counterpart  in  the  Semitic  languages,  which 
are  more  simple  and  intuitional,  but,  at  the  same  time,  less 
energetic  and  less  rigorously  exact.  And  in  the  necessity 
imposed  upon  all  languages  of  adapting  a limited  stock  of  roots 
to  the  expressive  unlimited  number  of  ideas,  there  is  endless 
room  for  the  play  of  the  imagination  or  of  the  logical  powers,  in 
suggesting  the  harmonies  and  relation  of  things  in  the  same  or 
separate  spheres;  so  that,  as  has  been  truly  said,  every  lan- 
guage embodies  a particular  conception  of  the  universe.* 

To  this  diversity  in  the  original  and  fundamental  character 
of  languages  may  be  added  that  arising  from  the  various  grade 
of  their  development  and  the  truthfulness  with  which  this  has 
been  conducted.  Language,  as  the  organ  of  thought,  may  be 
compared  to  the  human  body  in  its  influence  on  the  mind.  The 
degree  to  which  the  body  promotes  or  retards  intellectual 
activity,  and  is  the  faithful  exponent  of  the  states  of  the  soul, 
is  dependent  not  only  upon  its  original  physical  constitution, 
but  also  upon  the  measure  of  its  growth  and  its  healthful  con- 
dition. There  are  capabilities  in  every  language  reaching 
indefinitely  beyond  the  expansion  it  has  actually  received. 
The  same  unlimited  power  of  progression  inheres  in  it  as  in 
those  faculties  of  the  soul  where  it  has  its  seat.  It  will  unfold 
by  its  own  law,  adhering  strictly  to  that  course  upon  which  it 
has  set  out;  but  even  in  its  most  imperfect  state  it  has  its 
points  of  contact  with  the  highest  forms  of  thought  to  which 
the  soul  can  rise,  and  it  may  be  made  by  a legitimate  expansion 


* So  liegt  in  jeder  Sprache  eine  eigenthiimliche  Weltansicht. — Wilhelm,  von 
Humboldt. 


638  Modern  Philology.  [October 

to  take  them  in.  The  soul  lifts  itself  from  thought  to  thought, 
not  by  the  sudden  admission  of  ideas  unconnected  with  any  enter- 
tained before,  but  by  climbing  a ladder,  so  to  speak ; each  fresh 
idea  giving  it  a new  position  from  which  to  step  to  the  next. 
The  grandest  and  most  exalted  ideas  possible  to  the  human  mind 
are  so  connected  by  intervening  steps  with  its  feeblest  and 
most  rudimental  conceptions,  that  it  can  thus  proceed  either  by 
its  own  inherent  force,  or  by  the  help  of  teachers  from  one  to 
the  other.  And  in  like  manner,  if  a language  can  convey  the 
rudest  and  simplest  ideas,  it  thereby  proves  itself  to  possess  an 
expansibility  corresponding  to  that  of  the  mind  itself.  One  of 
the  important  functions  performed  by  great  thinkers,  poets, 
philosophers,  and  orators,  is  this  unfolding  of  their  native 
tongue,  bringing  forth  to  the  popular  consciousness  its  hidden 
stores  of  wealth,  revealing  elements  of  power  and  beauty  which 
were  not  previously  known  to  have  existed  in  it.  By  making 
it  the  vehicle  'of  thought  never  so  well  expressed  before,  by 
conducting  speculations  into  realms  yet  unexplored,  by  touch- 
ing'the  springs  of  feeling  with  unprecedented  skill,  by  the  gen- 
tleness of  soft  persuasion,  the  majesty  of  sublime  description, 
the  force  of  withering  invective  or  of  solemn  argument,  they 
touch  the  instrument  with  master  hands  and  its  latent  powers 
are  evoked.  So  the  progress  of  civilization,  refinement,  and 
learning  enriches  language  by  enlarging  the  circle  of  ideas 
which  must  in  this  manner  find  expression.  In  all  this  there 
is  no  change  of  the  native  characteristics  of  a language,  or  of 
the  measure  of  its  inherent  adaptedness  to  be  the  vehicle  of 
thought,  but  only  a further  elaboration  or  a finer  finish  of 
material  which  already  existed. 

Besides  the  various  extent  to  which  languages  may  be  un- 
folded, we  must  take  into  account  the  character  of  the  develop- 
ment itself,  if  we  would  estimate  aright  the  nature  of  their 
influence.  If  each  of  them  contains  its  own  conception  of  the 
universe,  and  impresses  this  upon  the  minds  into  which  it  is 
received,  it  becomes  a question  of  great  moment  whether  this 
conception  is  coincident  with  truth.  Does  it  waken  right  ideas 
and  proper  notions  in  the  soul?  Is  it  a pellucid  medium 
through  which  things  are  seen  clearly  and  in  their  true  rela- 
tions, or  a murky,  foggy  atmosphere,  by  which  objects  are 


Modern  Philology. 


639 


1864.] 


dimmed  and  distorted?  Or,  worse  than  this,  is  it  charged 
with  moral  miasma,  breathing  pestilence  and  deadly  disease, 
instead  of  healthful  invigoration  and  life?  Contact  with  pol- 
lution necessarily  breeds  defilement.  To  receive  into  the  mind 
a language  soiled  with  foul  ideas,  to  grow  familiar  with  vice 
under  palliative  and  honourable  names,  and  to  know  only  the 
caricatures  of  virtue,  nicknamed  by  those  who  hate  her,  and 
would  make  her  an  object  of  offence,  is  to  debase  the  soul,  and 
to  blind  or  corrupt  its  moral  sense.  It  is  difficult  to  form  an 
estimate  of  our  indebtedness  to  the  truth  which  there  is  in  lan- 
guage, and  the  correct  ideas  which  we  have  gained  from  finding 
them  there  expressed.  We  can  scarcely  image  to  ourselves 
the  difference  in  judgment,  character,  and  feeling  between  two 
minds,  whose  ideas  and  modes  of  thought  were  imbibed  respec- 
tively from  a Christian  and  from  a Pagan  language.  All  know 
the  embarrassment  under  which  missionaries  have  laboured  in 
China,  growing  out  of  the  lack  of  any  tolerably  exact  transla- 
tion for  the  name  of  the  Supreme  Being — any  term  for  God, 
which  would  not,  to  the  mind  of  a native,  convey  a pantheistic 
notion  of  the  object  of  worship,  or  suggest  one  of  the  false 
deities  to  which  they  are  accustomed  to  pay  their  adoration. 
There  is  no  such  idea  in  the  minds  of  the  people  as  is  suggested 
to  us  by  the  simple  utterance  of  the  name  God;  they  have  no 
notion  of  the  spirituality,  infinity,  eternity,  holiness,  and  glo- 
rious perfections  which  we  have  associated  with  it.  Their 
language  contains  no  term  to  express  it.  So  it  is  with  all 
ideas  peculiarly  Christian;  the  languages  of  the  heathen  do 
not  contain  them,  and  hence  the  difficulty  of  conveying  these 
ideas  to  their  minds.  An  entirely  new  class  of  notions  and 
associations  must  be  waked  up  within  them,  different  from  any 
they  have  ever  had,  and  which  there  are  no  terms  capable  of 
conveying  to  them.  It  requires  a slow  process  of  elaborate 
training  to  eradicate  or  correct  that  concatenated  system  of 
false  notions  which  is  thus  far  the  only  thing  that  has  ever 
entered  into  their  thoughts.  The  language  needs  to  be  chris- 
tianized as  well  as  the  people;  the  work  of  transformation  in 
the  latter  cannot  be  complete  and  thorough  until  the  former 
shall  be  reached  and  purified.  The  fountains  of  thought  are 
poisoned,  , and  their  streams  are  laden  with  death.  The  words 


640  Modern  Philology.  [October 

must  be  purged  of  these  false  ideas  and  degrading  associations 
before  the  natural  flow  of  thought  can  be  pure  and  true. 

The  importance  of  a proper  medium  for  the  spread  of  great 
ideas  may  be  illustrated  by  the  conduct  of  the  Most  High  him- 
self, in  his  providential  preparation  of  a language  to  be  the 
bearer  of  the  facts  and  doctrines  of  the  Christian  revelation. 
The  most  polished  and  refined  nation  of  antiquity  was  first 
engaged  in  the  service;  the  master-pieces  of  literature  which 
they  elaborated  are  still  the  admiration  of  the  world.  The 
Greek  thus  wrought  out  became,  in  a literary  sense,  one  of  the 
most  noble  and  cultivated  of  tongues.  As  the  language  of  a 
Pagan  people,  however,  it  needed  a thorough  purgation.  This 
was  effected  by  causing  it  to  circulate  for  centuries  in  the 
Jewish  mind,  until  it  was  charged  with  ideas,  and  breathed  a 
life  drawn  from  the  Old  Testament,  and  from  the  divine  train- 
ing to  which  the  people  of  Israel  had  been  subjected  for  ages. 
The  new  idiom  thus  created  by  the  transfusion  of  Jewish 
thoughts  into  the  tongue  of  classic  Greece,  then  stamped  into 
uniformity  and  permanence  by  a special  literature  of  its  own, 
was  finally  wrought  into  its  New  Testament  form  by  the  lips 
and  pens  of  apostles,  trained  by  Christ  himself  in  the  new 
truths  which  he  came  to  communicate. 

The  question  may  naturally  arise  here,  whether  a language 
shall  ever  be  produced  corresponding  to  its  true  ideal?  The 
process,  thus  far,  has  been  one  of  division  and  subdivision; 
each  people  has  laboured  at  the  problem  in  their  own  way; 
each  striven  to  evolve  a form  of  speech  adequate  to  all  their 
wants  as  a vehicle  of  thought  and  a medium  of  communication, 
and  with  the  greatest  possible  variety  in  the  result.  Can  it 
have  been  the  design  of  Providence  that  this  division  should 
exist  for  the  sake  of  an  ultimate  re-union? — that  the  partial 
elements  of  good  wrought  out  in  a disconnected  manner  among 
the  various  nations  of  the  earth  should  be  brought  together, 
and,  from  their  combination,  result  a language  which  may  be 
regarded  as  elaborated  by  the  entire  race  of  man? — which 
shall  contain  within  itself  every  valuable  product  of  the  expe- 
rience of  mankind  in  this  particular,  an  instrument  in  the 
highest  degree  adapted  to  excite  and  to  convey  the  legitimate 
workings  of  the  human  mind?  Such  a scheme  would  accord 


Modern  Philology. 


641 


1864.] 


•well  with  the  analogy  of  history.  The  present  civilization  of 
the  most  enlightened  nations  is  not  the  result  of  their  own 
unaided  efforts,  nor  can  it  be  traced  back  to  any  single  source. 
Every  great  historical  people  has  had  its  special  mission — some 
predominant  idea  to  develope  or  exemplify.  This  task  it  has 
performed  not  for  itself  alone,  but  for  the  benefit  of  the  race; 
its  gathered  stores  being  poured  into  the  common  treasury  of 
mankind.  If  it  is  thus  with  other  intellectual  products,  why 
not  with  language? 

This,  too,  accords  with  the  present  lines  of  progress.  The 
isolations  and  mutual  hostilities  which  have  driven  nations 
asunder,  or  kept  them  so,  are  yielding,  and  shall  continue  to 
yield,  to  the  bonds  of  amity  and  reciprocal  intercourse.  Diver- 
sities of  language  must  thus  be  reduced,  as  well  as  other  differ- 
ences; and  the  rather,  as  the  curse  entailed  upon  the  world  at 
Babel  is  one  of  the  most  formidable  barriers  to  intercommu- 
nion. It  was  designed  to  sever  a combination  which  aimed  to 
arrest  Heaven’s  decree  for  peopling  the  earth,  but  may  not  be 
permitted  to  stand  in  the  way  of  such  a combination  as  the 
peopled  earth  is,  in  the  purpose  of  God,  destined  to  form. 
Languages  and  dialects,  of  limited  extent  and  minor  conse- 
quence, are  already  melting  away.  Others  will  do  the  same. 
The  leading  languages  of  the  earth  are  daily  extending  their 
limits,  and  are,  besides,  becoming  more  and  more  necessary 
beyond  their  proper  bounds  as  mediums  of  intercourse.  May 
it  not  be  possible  that  the  whole  earth  shall  again  be  “of  one 
language  and  of  one  speech”?  And  is  it  an  unwarrantable 
stretch  of  fancy  that  such  a consummation  may  be  shadowed 
forth  by  the  prophet,  when  he  predicts  a day  as  coming  in 
which  there  shall  be  “ one  Lord,  and  His  name  one”  ? 

From  considering  the  influence  of  language  upon  man,  we 
now  turn  to  the  counter-influence  of  man  upon  language.  We 
have  thus  far  contemplated  it  chiefly  as  a power  resident  in 
the  mind;  we  shall  henceforth  have  to  deal  with  it  in  its  objec- 
tive form,  as  uttered  whether  in  writing  or  in  speech.  The 
operation  of  language  and  of  thought  is  reciprocal.  We  have 
seen  how  language  gives  birth  to  thought  and  continues  ever 
after  its  permanent  vehicle.  It  is  itself  likewise  born  of  thought 
and  perpetuated  by  it.  It  is  the  creation  of  the  mind,  its  spon- 

vol.  xxxvi. — no.  iv.  81 


642 


Modern  Philology. 


[October 


taneous  product,  flowing  forth  from  it  as  naturally  and  inevi- 
tably as  rays  from  the  sun,  and  bearing  as  indelibly  upon  it  the 
impression  of  its  source.  The  clothing  of  individual  concep- 
tions and  mental  states  in  particular  words  and  sentences  is  in 
a sense  voluntary,  for  the  mind  frames  them  agreeably  to  its 
own  idea  of  fitness.  But  the  general  laws  which  underlie  all 
these  particular  utterances  are  not  a matter  of  reflection  or 
choice;  they  are  determined  by  the  constitution  of  the  soul  itself. 
The  languages  of  men  unfold  the  mind  of  the  race,  in  even  its 
most  latent  and  unobserved  workings;  the  study  of  language 
is  therefore  a most  important  aid  to  the  mental  philosopher, 
it  puts  into  his  hands  a key  which  will  unlock  more  effectually 
than  any  other  the  inmost  recesses  of  the  soul.  Its  evanescent 
and  shifting  states  are  here  wrought  into  permanent  and  tangi- 
ble forms.  The  phenomena  submitted  to  the  student’s  observa- 
tion are  indefinitely  multiplied ; and  the  best  opportunities  are 
afforded  for  examining  into  their  real  character. 

Since  language  is  thus  a mirror  of  the  mind,  it  follows  as  a 
necessary  consequence  that  the  speech  of  no  two  men  can  be 
absolutely  identical,  neither  can  the  speech  of  any  two  be 
totally  unlike.  On  the  one  hand,  every  man’s  utterances 
must  bear  the  impress  of  his  own  individuality,  he  will  have  his 
own  characteristic  style  of  thought  and  of  expression.  And  on 
the  other  hand,  the  community  of  nature  which  belongs  to  all, 
must  reveal  itself  in  the  character  of  their  thoughts  and  in 
the  mode  of  their  expression.  There  is  a sense,  therefore,  in 
which  all  the  languages  of  the  earth  are  one.  Beneath  the 
superficial  differences  of  words  and  forms,  and  special  gram- 
matical rules,  there  are  certain  great  facts  and  principles 
which  belong  alike  to  all,  which  have  their  root  in  that  mental 
organization  and  those  fundamental  laws  of  thought  which  inhere 
in  all  men.  There  is  a limit,  accordingly,  beyond  which  the  diver- 
gencies of  language  cannot  extend ; a bond  which  holds  all  in 
unity  and  harmony,  in  spite  of  every  appearance  of  distracted 
confusion. 

Between  this  limit  of  possible  divergence  and  the  other  limit 
of  possible  approach,  conditioned  respectively  by  the  generic 
unity  and  the  individual  diversity  of  men,  there  is  every  vari- 
ous grade  of  agreement  and  of  difference.  There  is  no  more  cer- 


1864.] 


Modern  Philology. 


643 


tain  or  delicate  test  than  language  affords,  of  the  measure  of 
the  community  which  obtains  amongst  the  several  portions  of 
the  human  race.  Thus  the  different  degrees  of  consanguinity 
between  the  members  of  the  great  human  family  are  here 
exhibited.  Affinities  between  the  languages  of  different  na- 
tions betoken  the  affinities  of  those  nations.  The  English 
spoken  in  this  country,  the  French  in  Canada  and  Louisiana, 
the  Portuguese  in  Brazil,  the  Spanish  in  the  rest  of  South 
America  and  Mexico,  indicate  the  quarter  from  which  the  body 
of  early  settlers  came.  Ancient  authors  inform  us  that  Car- 
thage was  a colony  of  Tyre;  the  identity  of  their  languages 
declares  the  same.  That  the  builders  of  the  pyramids  were 
ancestors  of  the  Copts  can  no  longer  be  doubted,  since  the 
hieroglyphic  inscriptions,  which,  though  a puzzle  to  the  an- 
cients, have  yielded  to  the  persevering  labours  of  modern 
students,  resolve  themselves  into  Coptic.  The  book  of  Gene- 
sis, which  would  be  invaluable  had  it  no  other  merit  than  that 
of  being  a repository  of  the  early  history  of  our  race,  records 
that  Nineveh  was  founded  by  a colony  from  Babylon;  in  strict 
accordance  with  this  is  the  testimony  of  the  monuments 
recently  exhumed  upon  the  site  of  the  Assyrian  capital. 
These  have  brought  to  light,  together  with  the  civilization  and 
manners  of  that  great  empire,  its  language,  which  had  been 
lost  for  ages;  and  now  that  the  mystery  of  the  strange  charac- 
ter in  which  its  inscriptions  are  written  has  been  uncovered, 
this  is  found  to  be  kindred  to  the  Babylonish. 

We  have  thus  a means  of  tracing  the  course  of  the  various 
currents  of  population  from  the  beginning,  and  determining 
the  migrations  of  tribes  and  races  long  before  they  are  men- 
tioned in  authentic  history.  The  primitive  branches  into 
which  mankind  were  divided,  as  they  spread  abroad  from  their 
original  centre  to  cover  the  world,  can  still  be  distinguished  by 
the  several  families  of  languages  which  arose  amongst  them, 
each  having  a clearly  defined  type  of  its  own,  which  is  pre- 
served in  all  its  subsequent  divisions  and  ramifications.  And 
whatever  doubt  there  may  be  as  to  the  exact  limits  of  these 
grand  divisions  as  they  shade  off  almost  imperceptibly  into  one 
another,  the  leading  facts  are  perfectly  apparent  and  quite 
unmistakable.  The  various  strata  of  human  population  became 


644 


Modern  Philology. 


[October 


thus  as  easy  to  be  separated  and  to  be  recognized  as  the  strata 
of  rocks  which  compose  the  crust  of  the  globe.  Here  we  find 
a broad  belt  of  nations  speaking  affiliated  tongues;  these  must 
all  have  sprung  from  the  same  stock  gradually  overspreading 
the  soil.  There  is  a language,  as  the  Turkish,  interjected  into 
a body  of  others  entirely  dissimilar,  like  a mass  of  granite  per- 
forating a bed  of  limestone;  this  testifies  of  ancient  convul- 
sions, the  irruption  of  a conquering  horde  from  some  distant 
quarter.  Again,  small  remnants  of  ancient  strata  are  found, 
like  the  Welsh  and  other  fragments  of  the  old  Celtic,  cropping 
out  through  more  recent  layers,  identifying  the  early  tenants 
of  the  soil.  Or,  as  in  the  Caucasus,  with  its  wonderful  medley 
of  tongues,  heterogeneous  fragments  may  be  found  dropped 
without  any  order  or  system  here  and  there,  like  erratic  boul- 
ders fallen  from  the  avalanches  of  nations  which  in  various 
ages  have  swept  past  that  wild  inhospitable  region.  And  even 
loose  sands  driven  by  the  winds  from  clime  to  clime,  such  as  the 
gypsies  of  the  old  world  wandering  in  scattered  bands  without 
a settled  habitation,  may  thus  be  recognized  in  spite  of  their 
disintegration  and  the  foreign  materials  which  they  have  accu- 
mulated, and  assigned  to  their  proper  home.  And  if  the  vexed 
question  of  the  origin  of  the  aborigines  of  this  continent  is  sus- 
ceptible of  a satisfactory  solution,  it  is  most  probably  to  be 
looked  for  in  a careful  scrutiny  of  the  native  American 
tongues. 

Language  may  not  only  teach  us  the  origin  of  nations  and 
enable  us  to  trace  each  back  to  its  respective  /Source,  but  it 
reveals  their  several  ages.  It  contains  a scale  of  chronology 
not  absolute  indeed  and  fixing  precise  epochs,  but  relative, 
exhibiting  the  order  in  which  the  events  in  question  occurred. 
The  greater  the  divergence  between  branches  springing  from 
the  same  stem,  the  closer  to  the  root  will  the  point  of  departure 
be;  and  the  greater  their  contiguity,  the  more  recent  must 
their  separation  have  been.  Families  of  languages  divide 
themselves  into  subordinate  groups,  the  individual  members  of 
which  are  more  closely  allied  to  each  other  than  to  any  mem- 
ber of  the  affiliated  groups.  Each  of  these  groups  must  repre- 
sent an  offshoot  of  the  race  to  which  they  belong,  which  separated 
first  in  a body,  and  afterwards,  as  they  spread  further,  again 


Modern  Philology. 


645 


1864.] 


diverged.  Now  language  may  be  interrogated  as  to  the  rela- 
tive ages  of  these  different  groups,  in  what  order  they  severed 
themselves  from  the  parent  stem,  and  also  in  what  order  the 
several  members  of  each  group  attained  to  a separate  exist- 
ence. 

And  further  still,  it  may  indicate  successive  eras  in  the  life 
of  the  same  people,  mark  the  stages  of  their  literature,  and 
assign  their  intellectual  products  each  to  its  proper  date. 
Successive  steps  are  plainly  distinguishable  in  the  language  of 
England,  viz.,  the  Anglo-Saxon  of  Alfred,  the  old  English  of 
Henry  III.,  the  English  of  Chaucer,  and  that  of  modern  days. 
And  it  is  easy  to  perceive,  that  if  some  writing  of  unknown  date 
were  now  to  be  discovered  in  one  of  the  libraries  of  that  ancient 
kingdom,  an  important  criterion  of  its  age  would  be  gained  by 
ascertaining  which  of  these  periods  in  the  English  language  it 
represented.  What  has  just  been  imagined  in  relation  to  our 
own  tongue  has  actually  been  done  in  the  case  of  others.  The 
epochs  of  Hindoo  literature  and  of  the  sacred  literature  of  the 
Zoroastians  rest  upon  well  defined  criteria  of  this  very  nature; 
and  whatever  doubt  may  overhang  the  question  of  the  absolute 
age  of  these  various  writings,  there  can  be  none  as  to  the  order  of 
their  production.  Attempts  have  also  been  made  in  both  these 
cases  to  go  beyond  this,  and  to  establish  not  only  a relative 
scale  of  measurement,  but  a fixed  point  of  time  from  which  to 
measure.  Monuments  of  known  date  exist  in  both  India  and 
Persia;  in  the  former,  nearly  contemporaneous  with  the  expe- 
dition of  Alexander,  in  the  latter,  belonging  to  the  period  of  the 
Aclnemenides.  These  fix  the  character  of  the  two  languages  at 
those  dates  respectively;  now  if  it  were  only  possible  to  recog- 
nize the  same  stage  of  each  language  in  its  literary  remains, 
their  date  would  be  absolutely  settled. 

If  to  community  of  descent  be  added  other  bonds  of  connec- 
tion, this  increased  intimacy  of  relationship  will  have  its  coun- 
terpart in  a closer  approximation  in  point  of  language.  While 
those  sprung  from  the  same  race  speak  tongues  which,  though 
distinct,  belong  to  the  same  family  or  group,  those  who  together 
form  one  people,  with  a consciousness  of  their  unity,  occupying 
one  country,  subject  to  the  same  government  and  the  same 
laws,  with  a common  literature  and  free  intercourse  among 


646  Modern  Philology.  [October 

themselves,  but  severed  geographically,  as  well  as  politically 
and  socially,  from  other  states  around  them,  will  speak  one 
language  peculiarly  their  own.  Hence  the  boundaries  of 
nations  do  commonly  mark  the  limits  of  languages,  as  Spain 
and  Portugal,  France  and  Denmark.  And  nations  which  once 
existed,  but  have,  like  Germany,  been  broken  into  fragments, 
or  like  Poland,  parcelled  amongst  larger  states,  may  still,  in 
some  instances,  be  traced  by  the  prevalence  of  their  proper 
language.  The  petty  states  of  Greece,  whilst  they  maintained 
their  independence,  had  each  a separate  dialect;  but  when 
Philip  of  Macedon  united  them  under  a common  government, 
their  dialects  too  were  fused  into  one;  and  when  the  conquests 
of  his  illustrious  son  extended  his  empire  over  Asia,  the  Greek 
language  everywhere  followed.  At  the  foundation  of  Rome, 
several  distinct  though  related  tongues  were  spoken  by  the 
various  tribes  which  peopled  Italy;  but  as  the  sway  of  Rome 
extended,  her  language  supplanted  all  its  rivals.  The  assimi- 
lating power  of  the  dominant  language  of  a people  is  shown  in 
a most  remarkable  degree  in  our  own  country.  The  people, 
the  government,  and  the  literature  are  English ; and  the  vast 
numbers  who  have  emigrated  from  other  lands  of  Europe,  or 
have  been  brought  from  Africa,  or  have  even  been  attracted 
from  Asia,  make  no  more  impression  than  rivers  pouring  into 
the  briny  ocean  make  upon  the  constitution  of  its  waters. 
Settling  together  in  large  communities,  as  the  Germans,  or 
brought  in  by  the  cessions  of  extensive  territory,  as  the  French 
in  Louisiana,  and  the  Spanish  in  Mexico,  they  may  maintain, 
for  a while,  a sort  of  separate  existence,  and  hold  fast  to  the 
relics  of  their  former  nationality,  like  rivers  which  at  their 
junction  sometimes  appear  to  flow  side  by  side  for  a considera- 
ble distance  without  a complete  mingling  of  their  waters.  But 
this  isolation  cannot  long  be  maintained.  The  pulses  of  a 
people’s  life  must  be  felt  in  every  artery  of  its  body,  and  what- 
ever is  not  its  proper  expression  and  outgrowth  must  gradually 
yield. 

If  there  be  not  sufficient  vigour  in  the  national  heart  to  effect 
this  result,  every  addition  will  be  a source  of  weakness,  not  of 
strength.  Instead  of  being  compacted  with  the  body  as  an 
organ  in  vital  union  with  the  rest,  bound  together  in  sympathy, 


Modern  Philology. 


647 


1864.] 


acting  in  concert,  knowing  but  one  interest,  obedient  to  one 
impulse  and  a common  will,  it  becomes  a dead  weight  and  an 
incumbrance ; or  rather  a foreign  body,  with  a unity  and  life 
of  its  own,  bound  by  outward  constraint  to  another  with  which 
it  has  no  real  fellowship.  A schism  is  thus  effected  which  only 
waits  the  occasion  to  develope  it  into  disorganization  and  ruin. 
It  was  thus  with  the  great  Asiatic  empires;  it  was  thus  with 
the  old  Roman  empire.  This  is  one  of  the  notorious  causes  of 
the  peril  of  Austria  at  this  hour.  The  distinct  languages 
spoken  within  its  domain  prevent  its  population  from  being 
blended  into  one  homogeneous  mass.  They  form  so  many  lines 
of  demarcation  and  division,  which  have  sundered  it  in  feeling, 
and  will,  in  all  probability,  ultimately  lead  to  its  political  dis- 
memberment. Its  Italian  provinces  are  partly  lost  already, 
and  the  rest  detest  its  sway;  while  Hungary  looks  hopefully 
towards  that  emancipation  for  which  it  has  thus  far  vainly 
struggled.  On  the  other  hand  Italy,  though  disunited  at  pre- 
sent, and  split  up  into  different  states,  feels,  nevertheless,  the 
drawings  of  a common  tongue.  And  the  enthusiasm  with  which 
Sardinia  and  her  noble  ruler  are  everywhere  openly  hailed,  or 
secretly  regarded,  induce  the  hope  that  neither  despotism  nor 
priestcraft  can  long  avail  to  crush  the  popular  will,  which  has 
made  itself  heard  in  such  unmistakable  tones;  the  hope,  that 
they  who  speak  the  language  of  Dante  and  of  Petrarch  will 
yet  salute  one  another  as  brethren  and  fellow-citizens,  and  a 
united  Italy  be  more  than  a romantic  dream. 

The  political  power  of  language  has  long  been  understood  by 
the  wily  government  of  Russia.  It  has  been  its  steady  policy, 
through  the  medium  of  the  national  church,  to  extend  the 
Russian  language  and  letters,  and  extirpate  all  others.  This 
process  was  going  forward  in  the  Danubian  principalities  prior 
to  the  recent  Crimean  war.  And  in  pressing  his  ambitious 
designs  upon  his  feeble  neighbour  in  the  south,  the  Czar 
counted  largely  upon  the  lack  of  coherence  in  Turkey  in  this 
very  respect.  The  disintegrating  power  of  a multiplicity  of 
tongues  lent  essential  aid  in  the  reduction  of  the  rebellious 
tribes  of  the  Caucasus.  Could  the  concert  of  action  possible 
with  people  of  one  speech  have  been  effected  among  those 
brave  and  hardy  mountaineers,  and  could  their  redoubtable 


648  Modern  Philology.  [October 

chieftain  have  had  the  opportunity  which  he  would  then  have 
possessed  of  infusing  into  them  his  own  desperate  energy  and 
hatred  of  the  invader,  he  might  still  be  in  his  native  fastnesses, 
defying  all  the  armies  that  could  be  brought  against  him. 

The  minor  diversities  which  exist  in  nations  speaking  a com- 
mon tongue,  likewise  reproduce  themselves  in  language.  Hence 
the  provincialisms  of  a widely  extended  country,  if  its  several 
parts  be  not  bound  together  by  the  utmost  frequency  of  inter- 
course; and  these,  in  more  secluded  localities,  and  with  a popu- 
lation that  rarely  stirs  from  home,  lead  even  to  distinct  patois 
and  dialects,  as  in  various  chunties  of  England  and  France. 
The  same  thing  appears  in  distinct  classes  or  professions,  form- 
ing a sort  of  community  of  their  own,  with  their  peculiar  tech- 
nical expressions  and  slang  phrases.  The  dialect  of  college 
life,  with  its  chum , and  fizzle , and  rowl,  &c.,  may  illustrate 
this.  The  sailor  has  his  dialect;  so  has  the  prize-ring,  and  the 
degraded  poor  of  our  cities,  each  of  which  would  be,  in  many 
points,  unintelligible  to  the  uninitiated. 

These  divergent  tendencies  would  exhibit  themselves  far 
more  than  they  do  were  it  not  for  the  harmonizing  and  uniting 
influence  of  a widely  circulated  literature.  This  acts  as  a sort 
of  balance-wheel,  preserving  regularity  of  motion,  and  pre- 
venting any  material  deviation.  It  is  a fixed  and  permanent 
standard,  conformity  to  which  on  the  part  of  all  secures  a 
close  approximation  to  one  another.  Hence,  among  well  edu- 
cated people,  the  provincialisms  and  patois  just  spoken  of  are 
unknown.  Hence,  too,  the  dialects  of  savages,  who  have  no 
written  literature,  are  liable  to  such  constant  and  serious 
change.  An  expression  figuratively  used  to-day,  becomes  the 
ordinary  phrase  of  to-morrow ; descriptive  epithets  are  adopted 
in  place  of  appellatives  previously  employed;  so  that  in  a very 
short  time  their  vocabulary  may  undergo  a total  change. 
Accordingly,  every  inconsiderable  tribe  of  Indians  has  its  own 
distinct  language;  and  no  matter  how  frequently  they  might 
divide  and  subdivide,  the  result  would  be  the  same.  The 
speech  of  the  separated  portions  would  speedily  become  mutually 
unintelligible.  It  is  this  which  occasions  such  serious  difficulty 
in  defining  the  limits  of  groups  and  families  of  languages 
spoken  by  roving  and  barbarous  tribes.  The  uniform  and 


1864.]  Modern  Philology.  649 

consistent  type  "which  characterizes  the  affiliated  tongues  of 
enlightened  nations  is  unknown  amongst  them.  No  check 
remains  upon  the  utmost  possible  divergence. 

It  has  been  seen  how  the  inward  relationships  created 
amongst  men  by  lineage  and  by  political  association  are,  in 
their  several  shades  and  varieties,  reflected  in  language.  The 
same  is  the  case,  likewise,  with  the  slighter  and  more  casual 
correspondences  produced  by  contiguity  and  intercourse. 
These  do  not,  like  the  more  influential  causes  already  referred 
to,  affect  the  essential  structure  of  a language,  but  lead  rather 
to  the  borrowing  of  individual  words  and  phrases.  And  the 
extent  to  which  this  transfer  takes  place,  and  the  general 
character  of  the  instances  in  which  it  is  found,  affords  an  indi- 
cation of  the  nature  and  amount  of  the  influence  exerted  by 
one  people  over  another.  Commerce  and  trade,  while  effecting 
an  exchange  of  commodities,  transport  the  name  as  well  as  the 
thing;  and  hence  the  current  names  of  articles  often  tell  us 
whence  they  were  originally  brought.  Thus  the  words  them- 
selves declare  that  tea  came  from  China,  myrrh  from  Arabia, 
cherries  from  Asia  Minor,  quinine  from  Peru.  We  have  thus 
a means,  independently  of  any  direct  statements  of  ancient 
authors,  of  arriving  at  some  knowledge  of  the  trade  which  was 
maintained  between  the  several  nations  of  antiquity,  the  re- 
moteness of  the  regions  to  which  it  extended,  and  the  character 
of  the  goods  in  which  they  respectively  dealt.  The  native 
names  of  Asiatic  products  found  in  Greek  and  Latin  authors 
bear  as  explicit  testimony  to  the  existence  of  a traffic  between 
the  East  and  West,  as  do  the  coins  of  Greece  and  Rome  found 
scattered  as  far  even  as  India.  Whatever  obscurity  may  rest 
upon  the  tradition  of  Cadmus  and  his  alphabet,  the  names  of 
the  Greek  letters  point  to  Phoenicia  as  the  land  of  their  origin. 
The  figures  with  which  the  mathematician  performs  his  calcu- 
lations, and  the  merchant  keeps  his  accounts,  are,  (if  the  results 
of  the  most  recent  investigations  shall  prove  to  be  correct,) 
proved  to  be  a gift  from  India  to  the  world,  by  being  traced 
back  to  forms  which,  in  the  language  of  that  country,  are  the 
initials  of  the  numerals  from  one  to  nine.  The  multitude  of 
Greek  words  which  found  their  way  into  Latin,  is  a perpetual 
monument  of  the  literary  preeminence  of  Greece,  and  the 
VOL.  xxxvi. — no.  iv.  82 


650  Modern  Philology.  [October 

crowds  of  Romans  who  resorted  thither  for  instruction,  plea- 
sure, or  gain.  The  scientific  terms  now  in  vogue  which  have 
their  roots  in  Arabic,  remind  us  that  the  Arabs  were  once  the 
teachers  of  Europe. 

The  careful  accuracy  with  which  language  receives  the  im- 
pression of  the  human  mind  in  all  its  phases,  and  especially  as 
affected  by  the  various  grades  of  relationship  or  intercourse 
subsisting  amongst  men,  has  been  cursorily  exhibited.  It 
remains  to  add  that  it  reproduces  with  equal  distinctness  and 
preserves  with  a like  tenacity  the  great  facts  of  man’s  inward 
and  of  his  outward  life,  the  ideas  which  have  prevailed  and  the 
events  which  have  occurred. 

The  language  of  any  people  presents  in  a compact  form  the 
limit  and  range  of  their  ideas.  The  conceptions  which  they 
entertain  find  expression  in  their  words,  and  whatever  is  lack- 
ing in  the  former  will  be  betrayed  by  a corresponding  gap  in 
the  latter.  We  may  thus  deduce  the  measure  of  a people’s 
enlightenment  and  civilization.  Gather  their  language  and  you 
discover  what  they  are.  If  this  could  be  done  fully  in  the 
case  of  any  nation  of  ancient  or  modern  times,  it  wmuld  afford 
a perfect  picture  of  their  condition. 

The  same  thing  holds  with  races  as  well  as  with  individual 
■nations.  If  the  languages  of  the  same  group  or  family  be  com- 
pared together,  whatever  is  common  to  the  whole  must  have  be- 
longed to  the  original  stock  from  which  all  alike  have  descended. 
It  is  thus  possible  to  determine  a circle  of  objects  and  ideas  with 
which  the  primitive  ancestors  of  these  several  tribes  and  na- 
tions must  have  been  familiar.  If  the  process  be  carried  further 
•still,  and  a comparison  be  instituted  between  all  the  languages 
-of  mankind,  we  shall  arrive  at  those  ideas  which  are  common 
to  the  entire  race,  and  which  must  therefore  be  grounded  in  our 
eommon  nature.  And  we  shall  thus  hear  the  world,  as  with  one 
voice,  uttering  its  protest  against  atheism  and  a dreamy  intan- 
gible idealism,  and  expressing  its  faith  in  the  great  truths  of  a 
distinction  between  right  and  wrong,  moral  accountability,  and 
the  existence  of  a world  to  come. 

Ideas  and  philosophies  once  prevalent,  but  which  have  since 
passed  away,  may  here  be  rediscovered.  They  have  here  erected 
to  themselves  a monument  recording  to  after  ages  that  they 


1864.] 


Modern  Philology. 


651 


have  lived.  The  words  by  which  they  were  once  expressed  no 
longer  suggest  to  the  popular  consciousness  the  meanings  which 
they  were  originally  designed  to  convey.  They  are  like  fossils 
imbedded  in  the  strata  of  our  current  speech,  witnesses  of  a 
former  life,  remains  of  extinct  species,  the  shell  or  skeleton  out- 
lasting the  animating  principle  to  which  it  owed  its  particular 
organic  form.  Or  they  may  be  compared  to  broken  columns 
of  an  ancient  architecture  wrought  into  some  modern  edifice, 
which  by  their  peculiarity  of  style  still  betray  their  real  origin. 
Thus  our  current  designation  of  the  days  of  the  week  is  a stand- 
ing proof  that  they  who  so  named  them  were  idolaters  ; yet  no 
one  in  speaking  of  Sunday  thinks  of  it  as  dedicated  to  the  sun, 
or  in  speaking  of  Monday  has  any  idea  of  paying  homage  to 
the  moon.  No  one  is  ever  charged  with  giving  credit  to  astrol- 
ogy, and  believing  that  the  stars  control  the  destinies  of  men, 
because  he  uses  such  words  as  disaster,  lunacy,  mercurial,  mar- 
tial, saturnine  ; and  yet  the  existence  of  these  words  is  evidence 
that  this  belief  did  once  prevail. 

Past  events  and  customs  no  longer  observed  may,  in  like 
manner,  leave  their  record  in  language.  The  Saxon  names  we 
give  to  living  animals,  while  the  same  animals  slain  for  food 
bear  Norman  names,  are  echoes  of  the  Norman  conquest  and  of 
the  exactions  for  their  table  levied  by  the  lordly  conquerors 
from  the  subject  peasantry.  The  word  September  suggests  to 
us  that  what  is  now  the  ninth,  was  once  the  seventh  month  of 
the  year;  and  February  tells  us  of  the  expiation  customary  as 
the  year  was  closing,  Bank  reminds  us  from  what  small 
beginnings  our  great  moneyed  institutions  have  arisen,  when 
fiscal  transactions  were- conducted  upon  a bench  in  the  street, 
which  bench  was  broken  in  cases  of  failure  and  its  owner  de- 
clared bankrupt.  We  still  speak  of  calculation,  though  the 
process  so  denominated  is  no  longer  performed  by  meanp  of 
pebbles  ; of  ballots,  though  little  balls  are  not  now  used ; of  the 
exchequer,  though  the  table  with  its  checked  cover  is  gone ; of 
candidates,  though  they  are  not  robed  in  white;  of  manumis- 
sion, though  the  forms  of  Roman  law  are  dispensed  with ; of  the 
pound  sterling,  in  spite  of  the  diminution  of  its  weight;  and  of 
the  chancellor,  though  the  lattice  work  has  been  taken  away. 

We  extend  a cordial  welcome  to  the  interesting  and  instruc- 


652  Modern  Philology.  [October 

tive  volumes  named  at  the  head  of  this  article,  whose  contents 
we  have  had  in  mind  throughout  the  train  of  remark  in  which 
we  have  indulged.  The  science  of  language,  as  at  present 
understood  and  prosecuted,  has  sprung  up  so  recently,  and  has 
been  developed  with  such  amazing  rapidity,  that  those  who 
have  not  had  their  attention  specially  directed  to  it  are  scarcely 
aware  of  its  existence  or  claims.  And  yet  it  has  already 
attained  such  dimensions,  established  such  relations  with  other 
branches  of  inquiry,  and  is  withal  possessed  of  such  intrinsic 
interest  and  importance,  that  no  educated  man  can  afford  to  be 
ignorant  of  its  methods  and  results. 

We  know  of  no  work  accessible  to  English  readers  in  which 
80  satisfactory  a view  of  this  subject  can  be  obtained  in  so 
brief  a compass  and  in  so  attractive  a form.  The  general 
scholar  will  find  it  an  admirable  compend  of  just  the  informa- 
tion that  he  seeks,  while  they  who  desire  to  enter  upon  the 
comparative  study  of  language  with  more  thoroughness  and  in 
fuller  detail,  will  do  well  to  begin  with  the  careful  perusal  of 
these  volumes,  for  the  sake  not  only  of  their  masterly  outline 
view  of  the  whole  field  and  the  skilful  presentation  of  first 
principles,  but  the  copious  hints  and  suggestions  which  will 
prove  an  invaluable  guide  in  the  further  prosecution  of  their 
inquiries.  And  even  those  for  whom  philology  in  its  broader 
aspects  has  few  charms,  if  they  desire  to  understand  the 
mechanism  of  our  own  language,  at  least  upon  its  classic  side, 
and  possess  the  results  of  the  latest  and  best  investigations, 
conducted  upon  a solid  scientific  basis,  instead  of  the  crudities 
and  random  guesses  current  in  most  of  the  accessible  authori- 
ties, will  feel  that  the  article  on  Comparative  English  Ety- 
mology, with  its  satisfactory  analysis  of  more  than  three  thou- 
sand six  hundred  words,  is  worth  the  cost  of  the  entire  work. 


1864.] 


Lange  s Commentary. 


653 


Art.  IY. — A Commentary  on  the  Holy  Scriptures , Critical , 
Doctrinal , and  Homiletical.  By  Dr.  John  P.  Lange,  Pro- 
fessor of  Theology  at  the  University  of  Bonn,  assisted  by  a 
number  of  Continental  Divines.  Translated  into  English, 
with  Additions,  original  and  selected,  by  Dr.  Philip  Schaff, 
in  connection  with  a number  of  American  Divines  of  various 
denominations.  New  York:  Charles  Scribner.  Yol.  I.,  con- 
taining the  General  Introduction  and  the  Gospel  of  Matthew. 
By  Dr.  Lange  and  the  American  Editor.  1864. 

It  is  an  argument  of  no  mean  force  for  the  divine  origin  and 
character  of  the  Bible,  that  it  has  been  the  subject  of  more 
discourses  and  commentaries  than  any  other  book  or  class  of 
books,  and  constantly  invites  new  investigation,  with  the  pro- 
mise of  a plentiful  reward.  Fathers,  schoolmen,  reformers, 
and  modern  critics,  German,  French,  English,  or  American, 
have  dug  in  its  mines  of  truth,  and  brought  forth  precious  ore 
for  the  benefit  of  their  age  and  generation,  and  the  long  line  of 
commentators  will  never  break  off  until  our  faith  is  turned  into 
vision,  and  we  shall  know  even  as  we  are  known. 

Exegesis  has  its  history,  like  every  other  branch  of  theolo- 
gical science.  It  has  its  productive  and  its  digestive  periods, 
its  periods  of  rise  and  decline.  Prominent  among  the  produc- 
tive epochs  are  three : the  age  of  the  fathers ; the  age  of  the 
reformers;  and  the  age  of  modern  critics  and  scholars.  The 
first  laid  the  foundation  of  Catholic,  the  second  that  of  Evan- 
gelical theology,  the  third  makes  respectful  use  of  both,  but  is 
more  critical,  scientific,  and  liberal  in  its  character  and  method, 
and  seems  to  open  new  avenues  for  the  future  and  ever  deepen- 
ing development  of  Christian  theology. 

The  patristic  exegesis  of  a Chrysostom  and  Theodoret, 
Jerome  and  Augustine,  is,  to  a large  extent,  the  mature  result 
of  a victorious  conflict  of  ancient  Christianity  with  Ebionism, 
Gnosticism,  Arianism,  Pelagianism,  and  other  radical  heresies 
which  stimulated  the  fathers  to  a vigorous  investigation  and 
defence  of  revealed  truth.  The  exegetical  works  of  Luther  and 
Calvin,  and  the  other  reformers,  breathe  throughout  a polemi- 
cal spirit  against  the  peculiar  dogmas  and  traditions  of  Itoman- 


654  Lange's  Theological  and  [October 

ism.  So  the  modern  evangelical  exegesis  of  Germany  has 
grown  up  on  the  battle-field  of  Christian  truth  against  the 
gigantic  foes  of  rationalism  and  infidelity. 

If  Germany  should  succeed  in  the  end  in  thoroughly  routing 
the  most  scientific  and  most  powerful  forms  which  heresy  has 
ever  assumed,  it  will  achieve  as  great  a work  as  it  did  by  the 
Reformation  of  the  sixteenth  century.  For  now  the  very  foun- 
dations of  Christianity  are  called  into  question,  and  the  life  of 
the  Saviour  itself  is  turned  into  a myth.  Inspiration  is  denied, 
and  the  sacred  writers  dissected  and  criticised  like  any  profane 
author  of  ancient  Greece  and  Rome.  Never  before  has  the 
Bible  been  assailed  with  so  much  learning,  acumen,  and  perse- 
verance as  during  the  last  fifty  years  in  Germany,  and  within 
the  last  few  years  in  England.  Never  before  has  it  been  sub- 
jected to  such  thorough  and  extensive  critical,  philological, 
historical,  antiquarian,  and  theological  investigation  and  re- 
search. But  never  before  has  it  been  more  zealously  and 
thoroughly  vindicated,  and  defended  with  the  help  of  all  the 
means  which  the  latest  advances  of  classical  and  oriental  philo- 
logy and  antiquarian  investigation  have  made  available.  The 
productivity  of  the  German  mind  in  the  critical,  exegetical, 
and  historical  field  has  been  intense  and  prodigious  during  the 
present  century.  It  is  almost  impossible  to  keep  up  with  the 
ever-multiplying  commentaries  on  almost  every  book  of  the 
sacred  canon,  but  more  especially  on  the  Gospels,  the  Life  of 
Christ,  and  the  Epistles  of  the  New  Testament. 

In  view  of  this  immense  activity  still  going  on,  it  is  high 
time  now,  and  a very  favourable  juncture,  such  as  rarely 
occurs,  for  the  publication  of  a large  and  comprehensive  com- 
mentary, which  should,  from  a truly  evangelical  point  of  view, 
present  the  best  and  most  valuable  results  of  this  last  creative 
period  of  exegesis,  and  make  them  available  for  the  practical 
benefit  of  ministers  and  intelligent  laymen,  thus  forming  a 
bridge  between  the  scientific  divines  and  the  congregation  of 
the  people. 

Such  a Commentary  on  the  Holy  Scriptures  of  the  Old  and 
New  Testament  is  the  one  which  is  now  in  course  of  prepara- 
tion and  publication  under  the  editorial  supervision  of  the  Rev. 
Professor  Dr.  John  Peter  Lange,  in  Bonn.  It  is  intended  to 


1864.] 


Homiletical  Commentary. 


655 


be  a Theological  and  Homiletical  Commentary,  a treasure- 
house  to  the  pastor,  and  an  exegetical  library  in  itself.  The 
idea  originated  with  the  publishers,  and  the  execution  was 
intrusted  to  a distinguished  divine,  who  is  peculiarly  qualified 
for  such  a work.  Dr.  Lange  is  undoubtedly  one  of  the  ablest 
and  best  men  whom  Germany  has  given  to  the  world.  He  com- 
bines a rare  variety  of  talents  as  a divine,  a philosopher,  a 
preacher,  and  a poet.  But  he  has  more  than  talent,  he  is  a 
real  genius,  of  extraordinary  fertility  of  mind,  and  abounding 
in  original  and  fresh  ideas.  For  the  more  sober  class  of  minds 
he  is  somewhat  too  imaginative  and  fanciful,  but  this  feature  is 
not  so  prominent  in  his  later  works,  and  his  fancies  are  always 
pious,  suggestive,  and  edifying.  He  is  a profoundly  spiritual 
Christian,  evangelical  and  orthodox  in  all  the  fundamental  arti- 
cles of  faith,  yet  liberal  and  truly  catholic.  He  has  written  a 
considerable  number  of  works,  poetical,  theological,  and  lite- 
rary. He  was  one  of  the  earliest  and  most  successful  oppo- 
nents of  Strauss,  and  was  elected  professor  in  Zurich  after  the 
defeat  of  Strauss  in  1839,  as  the  one  best  qualified  to  represent 
the  opposite  side.  Several  years  ago  he  was  called  to  a pro- 
fessorship in  Bonn.  He  is  a moderate  Calvinist,  (German 
Reformed,)  but  without  any  sectarian  exclusiveness.  His  most 
important  works  are  a system  of  Christian  Dogmatics,  in  three 
volumes,  and  a Life  of  Jesus  Christ,  of  which  an  English  trans- 
lation, in  six  volumes,  has  just  been  published  by  Messrs. 
Clark  in  Edinburgh. 

These  previous  labours,  especially  the  comprehensive  and 
profound  work  on  the  life  of  Christ,  gave  him  the  best  prepara- 
tion for  the  Commentary,  to  which-  he  is  now  devoting  his 
whole  time  and  strength,  and  which  will  long  survive  him  as  the 
most  valuable  and  useful  work  of  his  life.  He  has  associated 
with  him  a number  of  German,  Swiss,  and  Dutch  divines,  dis- 
tinguished for  sound  theological  learning,  pulpit  eloquence,  and 
practical  evangelical  piety,  as  Dr.  van  Oosterzee  of  Utrecht, 
Dr.  Lechler  of  Leipzig,  Dr.  Gerok  of  Stuttgart,  Dr.  Moll  of 
Konigsberg,  Drs.  Auberlen  and  lliggenbach  of  Basel,  Dr. 
Kling,  Dr.  Fronmiiller,  and  others. 

The  publication  of  the  work  commenced  in  1857,  with  the 
first  volume,  containing  the  General  Introduction,  and  the 


656  Lange's  Theological  and  [October 

Commentary  on  the  Gospel  of  Matthew.  It  has  since  gone 
forward  without  interruption.  The  New  Testament  is  nearly 
completed;  the  Epistle  to  the  Romans,  and  the  Epistles  and 
Revelation  of  John  being  the  only  books  still  wanting.  The 
Old  Testament  has  likewise  been  taken  in  hand  by  a number 
of  contributors,  but  will  not  be  completed  for  a number  of 
years.  The  first  and  pioneer  volume  of  the  Old  Testament 
department,  embracing  a General  Introduction  and  Commen- 
tary on  the  Book  of  Genesis,  prepared  by  the  editor,  has  just 
appeared.  In  the  General  Introduction  to  the  Old  Testament, 
Dr.  Lange  discusses,  in  eighty-two  pages,  under  suitable  head- 
ings, in  a very  fresh  and  original  manner,  all  the  usual  histori- 
cal, critical,  and  hermeneutical  questions,  closing  with  a brief 
sketch  of  Biblical  Theology  in  systematic  form ; the  practical 
exposition  and  homiletical  use  of  the  Old  Testament;  the 
organism,  with  a valuable  excursus  on  the  so-called  offensive 
passages  of  the  Old  Testament,  as  foci  of  the  glory  of  the  Old 
Testament  religion.  The  last  essay  is  especially  valuable  at 
the  present  time,  as  it  furnishes  the  biblical  student  with  excel- 
lent weapons  against  the  Colenso  school,  and  other  modern 
attacks  on  the  Old  Testament.  Dr.  Lange  is  very  ingenious  in 
transforming  the  offences  into  “ foci  of  glory;”  and  if  he  is  not 
everywhere  satisfactory,  he  is  always  fresh,  suggestive,  and 
edifying. 

The  Commentary  of  Lange  and  his  associates  is  a threefold 
Commentary — critical , doctrinal , and  homiletical.  These  de- 
partments are  kept  distinct  throughout,  which  makes  the  book 
much  more  convenient  for  use. 

1.  The  Critical  and  Exegetical  Notes * explain  the  words  and 
phrases  of  the  text  according  to  the  principles  of  grammatico- 
historical  exegesis.  On  all  the  more  important  passages  the 
different  views  of  the  principal  commentators,  ancient  and 
modern,  are  given ; yet  all  mere  show  and  pedantry  of  learn- 
ing is  avoided.  The  main  object  is  to  clear  up  every  difficulty 
as  briefly  as  possible,  and  to  present  the  most  valuable  and 
permanent  results  of  original  and  previous  exegetical  labours, 
without  the  process  of  investigation  itself,  in  a condensed  form 
for  convenient  reference.  These  exegetical  notes  are  based  on 


* Exegetische  Erlauterungen. 


1864.] 


Homiletical  Commentary. 


657 


a new  translation  of  the  text,  which  precedes  them  in  larger 
type.  The  different  readings  are  given  in  foot-notes,  but  only 
as  far  as  they  affect  the  sense,  or  are  of  some  particular 
interest.  In  general,  Dr.  Lange  follows  the  critical  editions 
of  Lachmann  and  Tischendorf. 

2.  The  Doctrinal  and  Ethical  Ideas  or  Thoughts * present, 
under  a number  of  heads,  the  leading  theological  truths  and 
principles  cohtained  in,  or  suggested  by,  the  text.  In  the 
Gospels  these  doctrines  are  viewed  mainly  from  the  christological 
point  of  view,  or  as  connected  with  the  person  and  work  of  the 
Saviour.  The  reader  will  find  here  a vast  amount  of  most 
valuable  living  theology,  fresh  from  the  fountain  of  primitive 
Christianity,  and  the  contemplation  of  the  divine  human  person 
of  Christ,  who  stands  out  prominent  throughout  as  the  great 
central  Sun  of  truth  and  righteousness. 

3.  The  third  department  is  headed,  Homiletical  Hints  or 
Suggestions ,f  and  is  of  special  importance  and  use  to  the 
preacher  for  preparing  sermons  and  biblical  lectures.  It  con- 
tains a rich  variety  of  themes  and  parts,  and  mediates  between 
the  chair  and  the  pulpit,  the  scientific  exposition  and  the  prac- 
tical application  of  the  word  of  God.  It  shows  the  inexhausti- 
ble wealth  and  universal  applicability  of  the  Scriptures  to  all 
classes  and  conditions  of  men.  These  “hints”  are  by  no 
means  intended,  however,  to  supersede,  but  only  to  stimulate 
the  labour  of  pulpit  preparation.  Under  this  department  the 
authors  give  not  only  their  own  homiletical  suggestions,  but 
also  judicious  selections  of  older  and  more  recent  practical 
commentators,  as  Quesnel,  Caustein,  Starke,  Lisco,  Gerlach, 
and  Heubner. 

From  this  sketch  it  will  be  seen  that  the  plan  of  Lange’s 
Bibelwerk  is  the  most  comprehensive  of  any  recent  commentary, 
German  or  English,  and  views  the  Bible  under  every  aspect, 
showing  it  to  be  truly  a diamond,  which  shines  and  sparkles 
which  ever  way  it  is  turned.  It  is  a very  important  feature, 

* In  German,  “Dogmatisch-ethische  Grundgedanken;”  in  the  Gospels, 
where  the  christological  element  preponderates,  they  are  called  “Christologisch- 
dogmatische  Grundgedanken.” 

f Homiletische  Andeutungen. 

VOL.  XXXVI. — NO.  IV. 


83 


658  Lange  s Theological  and  [October 

as  a matter  of  convenience  and  economy  of  time,  that  the  three 
departments  are  not  mixed  up,  but  kept  distinct  throughout,  so 
that  the  reader  can  easily  find  just  what  he  wants  at  a particu- 
lar time,  without  going  over  a mass  of  irrelevant  matter. 

The  work  is  mainly  designed  for  ministers  and  students  of 
theology,  and  is  sufficiently  learned  to  give  the  reader  the 
assurance  that  he  is  everywhere  on  safe  and  solid  ground,  and 
under  the  guidance  of  a master  who  has  gone*  through  the 
whole  tedious  process  of  critical  research.  But  it  gives  the 
results,  and  not  the  process  itself,  and  presents  the  building  in 
its  beautiful  finish,  without  any  of  the  scaffolding.  It  is  also 
sufficiently  popular  in  its  whole  tone  to  be  accessible  to  intelli- 
gent laymen  and  teachers  of  Sabbath-schools,  if  they  should  at 
all  desire  to  refer  occasionally  to  a work  of  such  dimensions. 

The  spirit  of  the  Commentary  is  truly  Christian  and  evan- 
gelical, and  falls  in  very  well  with  the  reigning  theology  of  our 
American  Christianity — certainly  far  better  than  most  German 
works  of  the  kind,  not  excluding  Olshausen  and  Tholuck, 
whose  Commentaries  have  become  so  widely  popular  among  us. 
We  do  not  know  an  exegetical  work  which  is  so  well  adapted 
to  commend  itself  to  all  the  evangelical  denominations  of 
this  country.  It  is  altogether  free  from  sectarianism,  and 
avoids  all  polemics,  except  against  skepticism  and  rationalism, 
and  occasionally  against  Romanism.  And  yet  it  is  by  no  means 
loose  and  latitudinarian,  but  most  decided  and  positive  in  all 
the  fundamental  articles  of  our  Christian  faith  and  practice. 

Upon  the  whole  we  do  not  hesitate  to  call  Lange’s  Bibelwerh 
the  most  useful  Commentary  on  the  Scriptures  which  ever 
appeared  in  Germany,  or  in  England  and  America.  There  are, 
indeed,  single  commentaries  on  separate  books,  and  also  com- 
plete commentaries  on  the  whole  New  Testament,  which  are 
superior  in  a particular  feature,  critical  or  practical,  but  there 
is  none  which  combines  so  many  excellencies  and  elements  of 
long-continued  usefulness.  It  is  more  particularly  the  pastor  s 
commentary.  It  is  almost  an  exegetical  library  in  itself,  and 
has  already  taken  rank  among  those  indispensable  works  which 
are  constantly  consulted  as  safe  guides  and  intimate  friends. 
The  work  has  already  been  a decided  success,  and  is  selling 


Homiletical  Commentary. 


659 


1864.] 


extensively  not  only  in  Germany,  but  in  all  parts  of  Europe 
and  in  the  United  States.  The  German  booksellers  of  this 
country  sell  a larger  number  of  Lange’s  Bibeliverk  than  of 
all  other  German  commentaries  combined.  Six  parts  of  the 
original  have  already  gone  through  two  or  three  editions. 

A work  of  such  sterling  and  permanent  value  should  by  all 
means  be  made  accessible  to  the  theological  and  religious 
public  of  Great  Britain  and  the  United  States.  Several  years 
ago  a translation  was  seriously  projected  by  Ur.  Schaff,  then  at 
Mercersburg,  in  connection  with  several  others,  and  the  pre- 
liminary arrangements  were  made  with  Mr.  Scribner,  of  New 
York,  as  publisher.  But  the  Presidential  election  of  1860, 
and  the  consequent  Southern  secession  and  rebellion,  led  to  an 
abandonment  or  indefinite  postponement  of  so  extensive  and 
expensive  an  undertaking.  In  the  meantime  Mr.  Clark,  of 
Edinburgh,  commenced  to  issue  translations  of  the  first  three 
Gospels  of  Lange’s  work,  which  introduced  it  to  the  English 
public,  and  created  a taste  for  the  whole. 

In  the  spring  of  1863  the  original  plan  was  resumed  by 
Mr.  Scribner  as  publisher,  and  Dr.  Schaff  as  editor,  and  mea- 
sures were  at  once  taken  to  carry  it  into  execution.  A number 
of  distinguished  biblical  and  German  scholars  of  different  evan- 
gelical denominations,  most  of  whom  are  already  known  as 
successful  translators  of  German  works,  were  secured,  and  are 
now  at  work  on  most  of  the  volumes  already  published  in  Ger- 
man. Dr.  Schaff  assumed  the  Gospels  of  Matthew  and  Luke, 
and  moved  to  New  York  in  January  last,  to  devote  himself 
more  fully  to  this  task.  Dr.  Shedd,  of  Union  Theological 
Seminary,  New  York,  has  in  hand  the  Gospel  of  Mark;  Dr. 
Yeomans,  of  Rochester,  (the  able  translator  of  Dr.  Schaff’s 
History  of  the  Apostolic  Church,)  commenced  the  Gospel  of 
John ; Dr.  Schaffer,  Professor  at  Gettysburg,  (the  excellent 
translator  of  Kurtz’s  Sacred  History,)  has  already  finished 
about  one-half  of  the  Commentary  on  Acts.  The  Epistles  to 
the  Corinthians  were  assigned  to  the  Rev.  Dr.  Poor,  of  New- 
ark ; the  Epistle  to  the  Hebrews,  to  Dr.  Kenrick,  Professor  of 
Rochester  University,  and  reviser  of  the  Edinburgh  translation 
of  Olshausen;  the  Catholic  Epistles  to  Rev.  Dr.  Mombert,  of 


660 


Lange  s Theological  and 


[October 


Lancaster,  who  translated  Tholuck’s  Psalms;  the  Epistle  to 
the  Galatians  to  Rev.  Mr.  Starbuck,  recently  assistant  Pro- 
fessor in  Andover  Theological  Seminary;  the  Epistles  to  the 
Thessalonians  to  Rev.  Dr.  Lillie.  Several  other  distinguished 
divines,  most  of  them  in  connection  with  Theological  Semina- 
ries, will  probably  take  part,  sooner  or  later,  as  the  translation 
is  expected  to  extend  also  over  the  Old  Testament;  and  it 
is  likely  that  the  Commentary  on  Genesis,  which  has  just 
appeared,  will  be  one  of  the  first  to  be  translated  and  pub- 
lished. 

The  American  edition  will  faithfully  reproduce  the  whole  of 
the  original,  without  abridgment  and  alteration,  in  idiomatic 
English,  and  contain  such  additions,  original  and  selected,  as 
promise  to  be  of  special  interest  to  the  American  reader,  and 
to  give  the  work  an  Anglo- German  character,  or  to  make  it  a 
repository  of  the  most  valuable  results  of  Anglo-American  as 
well  as  German  Biblical  learning.  But  these  additions  are  to 
be  carefully  distinguished  from  the  original  by  brackets  and  the 
initials  of  the  translator.  Each  contributor  assumes  the  entire 
literary  responsibility  of  his  part  of  the  work.  Instead  of 
giving  a new  translation,  the  Authorized  English  Version, 
according  to  the  present  standard  edition  of  the  American 
Bible  Society,  is  made  the  basis;  but  the  more  literal  render- 
ings required  by  the  Commentary,  or  new  and  generally 
approved  readings,  are  to  be  inserted  in  brackets,  and  justified 
in  Critical  Notes,  immediately  after  the  text,  with  reference  to 
the  principal  ancient  and  modern  translations  in  the  English 
and  other  languages. 

The  first  volume  of  the  American  edition,  containing  the 
General  Introduction  to  the  Bible,  and  the  Commentary  on  the 
Gospel  of  St.  Matthew,  prepared  by  Dr.  SchafF,  is  now  nearly 
finished,  and  will  probably  be  ready  for  publication  in  Novem- 
ber, or  at  all  events,  before  the  close  of  this  year. 

To  give  the  reader  a clear  idea  of  the  forthcoming  American 
edition  of  this  Exegetical  opus  magnum,  we  present  a specimen, 
selecting  a difficult  and  important  section  of  the  sixteenth  chap- 
ter of  Matthew. 


1864.] 


Homiletical  Commentary. 


661 


The  Church  as  confessing  Christ , the  Son  of  Go'd. 

Matt.  xvi.  13 — 19. 

(Parallel  passages — Mark  viii.  27 — 30;  Luke  is.  18 — 21.) 

When  Jesus  came  into  the  coasts  [parts,  rd  ysprf\  of  13 
Cesarea  Philippi,  he  asked  his  disciples,  saying,  Whom  do 
men  say  that  I,1  the  Son  of  man,  am  ? And  they  said,  14 
Some  say  that  thou  art  John  the  Baptist;  some  Elias 
[Elijah];  and  others,  Jeremias  [Jeremiah],  or  one  of  the 
prophets.  He  saith  unto  them,  But  whom  say  ye  that  I 15 
am  ? And  Simon  Peter  answered  and  said,  Thou  art  the  16 
Christ  [the  Messiah],  the  Son  of  the  living  God.  And  17 
Jesus  answered  and  said  unto  him,  Blessed  art  thou,  Simon 
Bar-jona  [Bar  Jonah,  son  of  Jonah]:2  for  flesh  and  blood 
hath  not  revealed  it  unto  thee,  but  my  Father  which  [who] 
is  in  heaven  [the  heavens].  And  I say  also  [And  I also,  18 


Revision  of  the  Text. 

1 Yer.  13. — The  pers.  pron.  ft  in  Cod.  C.  after  \eyourn,  [in  the  text.  rec.  before 
the  verb],  is  wanting  in  Cod.  B.  [and  in  Cod.  Sinaiticus]  and  in  several  ver- 
sions, and  is  omitted  by  Tischendorf  [and  Tregelles  and  Alford] ; Lacbmann 
retains  it,  but  in  brackets.  The  insertion  is  more  easily  explained  than  the 
omission. — [If  we  omit  pA,  we  must  translate  with  Campbell  and  Conant : Who 
do  men  say  that  the  Son  of  man  is?  Or  with  Alford,  who  retains  the  grammati- 
cal anomaly,  if  not  blunder,  of  the  author.  Vers.:  Whom  (rk)  do  men  say 
that  the  Son  of  Man  is?  Tcv  viov  tcu  avfi/u;rcu  is  equivalent  to  I in  the  correspond- 
ing sentence  below,  ver.  15.  Some  who  retain  pi  in  the  text  (Beza,  Cleri- 
cus,  etc.)  translate:  Who  do  men  say  that  I am?  the  Son  of  Man?  i.  e.  Bo  they 
believe  me  to  be  the  Messiah?  But  this  does  not  suit  the  form  of  the  answer, 
and  would  require  either  an  affirmative  Yea,  or  a negative  No.  In  the  received 
text  >roy  i j!cv  to u 3-sou  must  be  regarded  as  opposition  to  /A,  and  is  so  rendered  in 
the  E.  V.— P.  S.] 

2 Ver.  17. — \Bar  (“l?)  is  the  Aramaic  or  Chaldaic  word  used  by  Daniel  in 
the  prophetic  passage,  vii.  13  (“/  saw  . . . and  one  like  the  Son  of  Man  came 
with  the  clouds  of  heaven,  etc.),  for  the  Hebrew  ben  (is)  son.  In  the  Author- 
ized E.  V.  it  is  retained  as  the  patronymic  of  Peter,  as  Matthew  retained  it  in 
Greek,  Rap  'lava ; Jerome  in  Latin,  Bar-Jona;  Bengel,  de  Wette,  and  Ewald, 
in  their  German  Versions,  Bar-Jona;  while  Tyndale,  Cranmer’s,  and  the 
Geneva  Bibles,  also  Luther  and  Lange  translate  it  into  the  corresponding  ver- 
nacular. Compare  similar  compound  names:  Bar- Abbas,  Bar-Jesus,  Bar- 
Nabas,  Bar-Sabas,  Bar-Timoeus,  Bar-Tholomceus.  The  translation  depends  on 
whether  the  name  is  here  simply  the  patronymic,  or  whether  it  has  an  allego- 
rical meaning,  as  Olshausen  and  Lange  contend.  In  the  latter  case  it  must  be 
translated  son  of  Jonah,  or  Jonas.  See  Lange’s  Exeg.  Notes,  and  my  protest- 
ing footnote  on  ver.  17. — P.  S.] 


662 


Lange's  Theological  and 


[October 


•/Aya>dk,  say]  unto  thee,  That  thou  art  Peter  [ ITerpo^'],  and 
upon  this  rock  [ Tthpakf  I will  build  my  Church  [ixxfaj- 


3 Ver.  18. — [2u  u IIst/isc,  x*'<  in)  nkpu, — one  of  the  profoundest  and 

most  far-reaching  prophetical,  but,  at  the  same  time,  one  of  the  most  contro- 
verted sayings  of  the  Saviour,  the  exegetical  rock  on  which  the  Papacy  rests 
its  gigantic  claims  (but  not  by  direct  proof,  but  by  inference  and  with  the  help 
of  undemonstrable  intervening  assumptions,  as  the  transferability  of  Peter’s 
primacy,  his  presence  in  Rome,  and  his  actual  transfer  of  the  primacy  upon 
the  bishop  of  Rome),  under  the  united  protest  of  the  whole  Greek  Catholic  and 
Protestant  Evangelical  Churches,  who  contend  that  Christ  says  not  a word 
about  successors.  Leaving  the  fuller  exposition  to  the  Exegetical  Notes,  we 
have  to  do  here  simply  with  the  verbal  rendering.  In  our  Engl.  Vers.,  as  also 
in  the  German,  the  emphasis  is  lost,  since  rock  and  Fels  are  never  used  as 
proper  names.  We  might  literally  translate:  “Thou  art  Peter,  and  upon  this 
petress;”  or:  “Thou  art  Stone,  Rockman,  Man  of  rock  ( Felsenmann ),  and  upon 
this  rock;'”  but  neither  of  them  would  sound  idiomatic  and  natural.  It  is  per- 
haps remarkable  that  the  languages  of  the  two  most  Protestant  nations  cannot 
render  the  sentence  in  any  way  so  favourable  to  the  popish  identification  of  the 
rock  of  the  church  with  the  person  of  Peter;  while  the  Latin  Vulgate  simply 
retained  the  Greek  Petrus  and  petra,  and  the  French  translation:  “Tu  es 
Pierre , et  sur  cette  pierre,”  even  obliterates  the  distinction  of  the  gender.  The 
Saviour,  no  doubt,  used  in  both  clauses  the  Aramaic  word  (hence  the 

Greek  K»$ac  applied  to  Simon,  John  i.  42;  comp.  1 Cor.  i.  12;  iii.  22  ; ix.  5> 
xv.  5 ; Gal.  ii.  9),  which  means  rock,  and  is  used  both  as  a proper  and  a com- 
mon noun.  Hence  the  old  Syriac  translation  of  the  N.  T.  renders  the  passage 
in  question  thus:  “ Analh-hu  Kipha,  v’all  hode  Kipha.”  The  Arabic  transla- 
tion has  alsachra  in  both  cases.  The  proper  translation  then  would  be:  “ Thou 
art  Rock,  and  upon  this  rock,”  etc.  Yet  it  should  not  be  overlooked  that  Mat- 
thew in  rendering  the  word  into  Greek,  no  doubt  under  the  influence  of  the 
Holy  Spirit,  deliberately  changed  the  gender,  using  the  masculine  in  the  one 
case  and  the  feminine  in  the  other.  He  had,  of  course,  to  use  Xlhpos  in  address- 
ing a man  (as  Maldonatus  in  loc.  correctly  remarks : Petrus,  quia  vir  erat,  non 
petra  fcemineo,  sed  Petrus  masculino  nomine  vocandus  erat ) ; but  he  might  with 
perfect  propriety  have  continued : in)  rcurqi  nZ  nkpu,  instead  of  ini  nains  t? 
n’np-j.  (which  change  Maldonatus  less  satisfactorily  accounts  for  simply  on  the 
philological  reason  that  the  masculine  nirpos  el  Atticum  et  rarum  est).  The 
masculine  nkpos  in  Greek  (in  Homer  and  elsewhere)  means  generally  only  a 
piece  of  rock,  or  a stone  (like  the  corresponding  prose  word  \idc;),  and  very 
rarely  a rock.  (Meyer,  however,  quotes  for  the  latter  signification  a passage 
from  Plato  : ’Z:av<pw  nfrpo t,  one  from  Sophocles,  and  one  from  Pindar) ; but  the 
feminine  nkpu  always  signifies  rock,  whether  it  be  used  literally  or  metaphori- 
cally (as  a symbol  of  firmness,  but  also  of  hardheartedness).  I would  not  press 
this  distinction,  in  view  of  the  Syriac  and  in  opposition  to  such  eminent 

commentators  as  Bengel  and  Meyer,  who,  like  the  Rom.  Cath.  commentators, 
admit  no  difference  of  the  terms  in  this  case.  (Bengel : hoec  duo,  nkp-x  et 
n'npcis  slant  pro  uno  nomine,  sicut  unum  utrinque  nomen  Kepha  legitur  in  Sgriaco.” 
But  it  is  certainly  possible,  and  to  my  mind  almost  certain,  that  Matthew 
expressed  by  the  slight  change  of  a word  in  Greek,  what  the  Saviour  intended  in 
using,  necessarily,  the  same  word  in  Syriac,  viz.,  that  the  petra  on  which  the 
Church  is  built  by  Christ,  the  Divine  architect  and  Lord  of  this  spiritual 
temple,  is  not  the  person  of  Peter  as  such,  but  something  more  deep  and  com- 
prehensive ; in  other  words,  that  it  is  Peter  and  his  confession  of  the  central 
mystery  of  Christianity,  or  Peter  as  the  confessor  of  Christ,  Peter  in  Christ, 
and  Peter,  moreover,  as  representing  all  the  other  apostles  in  like  relation  to 
Christ  (comp.  Eph.  ii.  20;  Rev.  xvi.  14).  Nor  should  we  explain  ver.  18inde- 


1864.]  Homileticai  Commentary.  668 

aca]  ;4  and  the  gates  of  hell  [hades]5  shall  not  prevail  against 
it.®  And  I will  give  unto  thee  the  keys  of  the  kingdom  of  19 

pendently  of  ver.  23.  It  is  very  significant  that,  while  the  believing  and  con- 
fessing Peter  here  is  called  rock,  the  disobedient  and  dissuading  Peter  immedi- 
ately afterward  (ver.  23),  with  surprising  severity,  is  called  for  the  time  being 
Satan,  the  enemy  of  Christ.  If  the  papacy  has  any  claim  to  the  rocklike  nature 
of  Peter,  it  has  certainly  also  fallen  at  times  under  the  condemnation  of  the 
Satanic,  anti-christian,  and  denying  Peter.  Let  us  hope  that  it  may  imitate 
Peter  also  in  his  sincere  repentance  after  the  denial.  Bengel : Videat  Petra 
romana,  ne  cadat  sub  censuram  versus  23. — Comp,  the  Exeg.  Notes  below,  and 
the  translator’s  History  of  the  Apostolic  Church,  | 89,  p.  351  sqq. — P.  S.] 

4 Ver.  18. — [All  the  English  versions  before  Queen  Elizabeth,  except  that  of 
Wiclif  (which  reads  chirche),  translate  hex hsaia  by  the  corresponding  English 
word  congregation ; but  the  Bishop’s  Bible  substituted  for  it  church,  and  this, 
by  express  direction  of  King  James,  was  retained  not  only  here,  but  in  all  the 
passages  of  the  N.  T.  in  the  revised  and  authorized  version  of  1611.  Among 
German  translators  and  commentators,  the  Roman  Catholics,  (Van  Ess,  Ar- 
noldi,  Allioli)  render  htioWa  by  the  term  Kirche  ( church ) ; while  the  Protest- 
ant translators  and  commentators  (Luther,  John  Friedr.  von  Meyer,  Stier,  de 
IVette,  Ewald,  H.  A.  W.  Meyer  and  Lange)  render:  Gemeinde  ( congregation ).  The 
Greek  ixxxw ria,  from  ixx.a\w,  to  call  out,  to  summon,  occurs  114  times  in  the 
N.  T.  (twice  in  the  Gospel  of  Matthew,  but  in  no  other  Gospel,  24  times  in  the 
Acts,  68  times  in  the  Epistles,  20  times  in  Revelation,)  and  corresponds  to  the 
Hebrew  blip.  It  is  not  to  be  confounded  with  the  more  spiritual  and  compre- 
hensive term  kingdom,  of  God  or  kingdom  of  heaven,  so  often  used  by  our  Saviour. 
It  means  generally  any  popular  convocation,  congregation,  assembly,  and  in  a 
Christian  sense  the  congregation  of  believers  called  out  of  the  world  and  conse- 
crated to  the  service  of  Christ.  It  is  used  in  the  N.  T.  (1)  in  a general  sense, 
of  the  whole  body  of  Christian  believers,  or  the  church  universal,  Matt.  xvi.  18; 
1 Cor.  xii.  28;  Gal.  i.  13;  Eph.  i.  22  (and  in  all  the  passages  where  the  church 
is  called  the  body  of  Christ)-,  1 Tim.  iii.  15;  Heb.  xii.  23,  etc.  ; (2)  more  fre- 
quently in  a particular  sense,  of  a local  congregation,  as  in  Jerusalem,  in  Anti- 
och, in  Ephesus,  in  Corinth,  in  Rome,  in  Galatia,  in  Asia  Minor,  etc. ; hence, 
also,  it  is  often  used  in  the  plural,  e.  g.,  at  isKMo-iai  t its  'Amt,  1 Cor.  xvi.  19; 
eti  tKKMcriai  tJv  Rom.  xvi.  4;  the  seven  churches,  Rev.  i.  4,  11,  20,  etc. 
The  Saviour  himself  makes  use  of  the  word  only  twice,  viz. : in  our  passage, 
where  it  evidently  means  the  church  universal,  which  alone  is  indestructible, 
and  in  Matt,  xviii.  17,  where  it  can  be  understood  only  of  a local  church  or  con- 
gregation ( tell  it  to  the  church).  John  never  uses  the  term  except  in  his  third 
epistle.  The  word  church  is  properly  no  translation  of  hutoo-i*  at  all,  but  has 
etymologically  a different  meaning,  being  derived  from  the  Greek  itopxtx.ov,  i.  e. 
belonging  to  the  Lord,  through  the  medium  of  the  Gothic,  whence  also  the  cog- 
nate terms  in  the  Teutonic  and  Slavonic  languages,  the  German  Kirche,  the 
Scotch  kirk,  the  Swedish  kyrka,  the  Danish  kyrke,  the  Russian  zerkow,  the 
Polish  cerkiew , the  Bohemian  zyrkew.  (Leo,  Ferienschriften,  Halle,  1847,  de- 
rives the  word  from  the  Celtic  cyrch  or  cylch,  i.  e.,  centre,  meeting  place ; but 
this  would  not  explain  the  introduction  of  the  word  into  the  Slavonic  nations, 
who  received  Christianity  from  the  Greek  church.)  The  word  church  is  now 
used  both  in  the  general  and  in  the  particular  sense,  like  tnnKstria,  and  in  addi- 
tion to  this  also  in  a third  sense,  viz.,  of  a building,  or  house  of  worship, 
(Eusebius  Hist.  Eccl.  ix.  10,  calls  the  meeting-houses  of  the  Christians  ttvciax a 
eixtia).  As  regards  the  English  translation  of  tKiooiaia,  a number  of  modern 
commentators  advocate  a return  to  the  term  congregation  throughout  the  whole 
N.  T.  But  it  is  neither  possible  nor  desirable  to  expel  the  term  church  from 
the  English  Bible,  which  has  long  since  become  the  full  equivalent  of  the  Greek 
< KsKsaia..  We  might  use  church,  where  the  word  signifies  the  whole  body  of 
believers,  and  congregation,  where  a particular  or  local  assembly  of  Christians 


664  Lange  s Theological  and  [October 

heaven ; and  whatsoever  thou  shalt  hind  on  earth  shall  be 
bound  in  heaven ; and  whatsoever  thou  shalt  loose  on  earth 
shall  be  loosed  in  heaven. 

is  intended.  But  even  this  is  unnecessary.  The  Geneva  Bible  also  employed 
the  term  church  in  a few  passages,  though  not  in  ours,  where  it  seems  to  me  to 
be  more  appropriate  than  congregation. — P.  S.] 

5 Ver.  18. — [riuVai  acfiw,  in  Hebrew  biit'd  ''’(ISld  shaare  sheol,  Isa.  xxxviii.  10, 
an  alliteration.  On  hades,  as  distinct  from  hell,  compare  the  Exeg.  Notes  below, 
and  also  the  Grit.  Notes  on  xi.  23,  p.  210. — P.  S.] 

6 Ver.  18. — Oil  Kiair^uxci/iriv  from  K'-mayvuj  rive;,  prcevalere  adversus 

aliqucm,  comp.  Isa.  xv.  18,  Sept.  Tyndale,  the  Bishops’,  King  James’,  and  the 
Douay  Bibles  agree  in  translating:  shall  not  prevail  against  it;  the  Lat.  Vul- 
gate: non  prcevalebunt  adversus  earn;  Luther,  de  Wette,  Ewald,  Lange:  fiber- 
udltigen;  Meyer:  die  Obermacht  haben  ( behalten ).  I prefer  the  prevail  of  the 
Authorized  Vers,  to  overcome  (Geneva  Bible)  as  expressing  better  the  idea  of 
ultimate  triumph  over  long-continued  passive  resistance.  The  term  must  be 
explained  in  conformity  to  the  architectural  figure  which  runs  through  this 
whole  passage  : — gales,  build,  keys.  Hades  is  represented  as  a hostile  fortress 
which  stands  over  against  the  apparently  defenceless,  yet  immovable  temple  of 
the  Christian  Church,  to  which  our  Lord  here  promises  indestructible  life.  ( Eccle - 
sia  non  potest  deficere.)  The  gates  of  hades,  or  the  realm  of  death,  by  virtue  of 
the  universal  dominion  of  sin,  admit  and  confine  all  men,  and  (like  the  gates  in 
Dante’s  Inferno  with  the  famous  terrific  inscription)  were  barred  against  all 
return,  uutil  the  Saviour  overcame  death  and  “him  that  hath  the  power  of 
death”  (Hebr.  ii.  14)  and  came  forth  unharmed  and  triumphant  from  the 
empire  of  death  as  conqueror  and  Prince  of  life.  Hades  could  not  retain  Him 
(Acts  ii.  27,  31).  The  same  power  of  life  He  imparts  to  His  people,  who  often, 
especially  during  the  ages  of  persecution  and  martyrdom,  seemed  to  be  doomed 
to  destruction,  but  always  rose  to  new  life  and  vigor,  and  shall  reign  with 
Christ  forever.  Comp.  Rev  i.  18:  “I  am  alive  for  ever  more,  and  have  the 
keys  of  death  and  hades;”  aud  1 Cor.  xv.  2<3 : “The  last  enemy  that  shall  be 
destroyed,  is  death.”  This  interpretation  of  the  figure  appears  to  me  much 
more  appropriate  than  the  usual  one,  which  takes  hades  here  in  the  sense  of 
hell,  and  assumes  an  active  assault  of  the  infernal  armies,  rushing,  as  it  were, 
through  these  gates  and  storming  the  fortress  of  Christ’s  Church.  To  this 
interpretation  1 object:  (1)  That  gates  are  not  an  active  and  aggressive,  but  a 
passive  and  confining  power;  (2)  that  hades,  although  closely  related  to  geen- 
nah  or  hell  and  including  it,  is  yet  a wider  conception,  and  means  here,  as 
elsewhere,  the  realm  of  death  ( das  Reich  der  Todten),  which  swallows  up  all 
mortals  aud  confines  for  ever  those  who  have  no  part  in  the  victory  of  Christ 
over  death,  hell,  and  damnation. — P.  S.] 

EXEGETICAL  AND  CRITICAL  NOTES. 

Yer.  13.  Into  tbe  parts  of  Cesarea  Philippi. — The  cure  of  the  blind 
person  at  the  eastern  Bethsaida  (Mark  xiii.  22)  had  taken  place  before 
that.  Civs  area  Philippi,  formerly  called  Paneas  (Plin.  H.  N.  v.  15,)  from 
the  mountain  Panius,  dedicated  to  Pan,  in  the  immediate  neighbourhood. 
The  town  is  supposed  to  have  been  the  ancient  Leshem,  Josh.  xix.  47 ; 
Laish,  Judg.  xviii.  7 ; and  Dan — “from  Dan  to  Beersheba.”  It  lay  near 
the  sources  of  Jordan,  at  the  foot  of  Mount  Lebanon,  a day’s  journey 
from  Sidon,  in  Gaulonitis,  and  was  partly  inhabited  by  heathens.  The 
town  was  enlarged  and  beautified  by  Philip  the  Tetrarch,  who  called  it 
C cesarea  ( Kingston ) in  honour  of  Caesar  Tiberius.  The  name  Philippi  was 


1864.]  Eomiletical  Commentary.  665 

intended  to  distinguish  it  from  Ccesarea  Palestince  (Robinson,  Palest,  ii.  439 ; 
also,  vol.  iii.  sect,  ix.)  Tradition  reports  that  the  woman  with  the  issue 
of  blood  resided  here.  Her  name  is  said  to  have  been  Berenice.  Agrip- 
pa  II.  further  embellished  this  city,  and  called  it  Neronias  in  honour  of 
Nero.  The  modern  village  of  Banias,  and  the  ruins  around  it,  mark  the 
site  of  the  ancient  city. 

■Who  (not  whom)  do  men  say  that  I,  the  Son  of  Man,  am?— How  do 

men  explain  the -appearance  of  the  Son  of  Man?  Meyer:  What  do  they 
understand  by  the  designation,  Son  of  Man?  De  Wette:  I who  am  a 
humble,  lowly  man.  But  this  completely  misses  the  peculiar  import  of 
the  expression,  Son  of  Man. 

Yer.  14.  Some  say. — “ The  reply  shows  that,  in  general,  He  was  not  yet 
looked  upon  as  the  Messiah:”  Meyer.  But  according  to  the  representa- 
tion of  the  evangelist,  we  must  rather  infer  that  Christ’s  enemies  had  by 
their  calumnies  succeeded  in  lowering  the  popular  estimate  concerning 
him. 

John  the  Baptist. — See  ch.  xiv.  2.  This,  for  a time,  had  been  the 
opinion  of  the  courtiers  of  Herod. — Elijah, — as  the  precursor  of  the  Mes- 
siah. Such  was  the  view  professed  by  those  whom  fear  of  their  superiors 
induced  to  deny  His  claims  to  the  Messianic  office,  while,  from  a desire  of 
not.entirely  surrendering  the  expectations  which  had  been  excited  by  His 
appearance,  they  still  regarded  Him  as  a prophet. — Jeremiah. — Of 
course,  in  the  same  sense  as  Elijah, — not  in  the  sense  of  literally  revisit- 
ing the  earth,  nor  in  that  of  implying  the  doctrine  of  the  transmigration 
of  souls  [metempsychosis].*  The  opinion  of  these  persons  concerning 
Jesus  was  evidently  lower  than  that  of  those  who  regarded  Him  as 
Elijah.  (Mark  xv.  35;  John  i.  21).  The  one  party  referred  especially  to 
what  might  be  designated  as  the  reformation  inaugurated  by  Jesus,  while 
the  other  had  regard  to  His  denunciations  of  the  corruptions  of  the  times. 
— Or  one  of  the  prophets. — According  to  the  lowest  view,  He  was  repre- 
sented by  discouraged  friends  as  one  of  the  old  prophets.  Three  points 
are  clearly  brought  out  in  this  conversation : 1.  That,  to  a certain  extent, 
Jesus  was  still  generally  acknowledged  by  the  people.  2.  That  the  faith 
of  the  majority  had  been  lowered  and  misled  by  the  influence  of  their 
superiors,  so  that  diverging  opinions  were  now  entertained  regarding 
Him.  That  this  inconsistency  and  wavering  led  to  a decreasing  mea- 
sure of  homage. 

Ver.  15.  But  who  say  ye  that  I am? — This  was  the  decisive  moment 
in  which  the  separation  of  the  New  Testament  from  the  Old  Testar 

ment  theocracy  was  to  be  made.  The  hour  had  come  for  the  utterance  of 
a distinct  Christian  confession. 

Ver.  16.  Simon  Peter. — Peter  answered  not  merely  in  his  own  name, 

* [Some,  however,  no  doubt  believed  in  a bodily  resurrection  of  Elijah  or 
Jeremiah.  The  latter  was  accounted  by  the  Jews  as  the  first  in  the  prophetic 
canon.  See  Lightfoot  on  Matt,  xxvii.  9. — P.  S. ]' 

VOL.  XXXVI. — NO.  IV.  84 


666 


Lange's  Theological  and 


[October 


but  in  that  of  all  the  disciples.* — Thou  art  the  Christ, — i.  e.  the  Messiah 
Himself.  And  this,  not  in  the  sense  in  which  carnal  Jewish  tradition- 
alism held  the  doctrine  of  the  Messiah,  hut  in  the  true  and  spiritual 
import  of  the  title — the  Son  of  the  living  God.  The  latter  expression 
must  not  be  taken  merely  in  a negative  sense,  as  denoting  the  True  God 
in  opposition  to  false  deities ; it  must  also  he  viewed  in  a positive  sense, 
as  referring  to  Him  whose  manifestations  in  Israel  were  completed  in  and 
crowned  by  the  appearance  of  His  Son  as  the  Messiah.-  This,  however, 
implies  Sonship  not  only  in  a moral  or  official,  but  also  in  the  ontologi- 
cal sense.  Thus  the  reply  of  Peter  had  all  the  characteristics  of  a genu- 
ine confession — being  decided,  solemn,  and  deep. 

[The  confession  of  Peter  is  the  first  and  fundamental  Christian  confes- 
sion of  faith,  and  the  germ  of  the  Apostles’  Creed.  It  is  a confession,  not 
of  mere  human  opinions,  or  views,  or  convictions,  however  firm,  but  of  a 
divinely  wrought  faith,  and  not  of  faith  only  ( I believe  that  Thou  art),  but 
of  adoration  and  worship  ( Thou  art).  It  is  christological,  i.  e.,  a confes- 
sion of  Jesus  Christ  as  the  centre  and  heart  of  the  whole  Christian  system, 
and  the  only  and  all-sufficient  fountain  of  spiritual  life.  It  is  a confession 
of ’Jesus  Christ  as  a true  man  [Thou,  Jesus),  as  the  promised  Messiah 
(the  Christ),  and  as  the  eternal  Son  of  God  ( the  Son — not  a son — of  the 
living  God),  hence  as  the  God-Man  and  Saviour  of  the  world.  It  is  thus 
a confession  of  the  mystery  of  the  Incarnation  in  the  widest  sense,  the 
great  central  mystery  of  godliness,  “ God  manifest  in  the  flesh.” — Compare 
also  the  excellent  remarks  of  Olshausen  (in  Kendrick’s  Am.  ed.,  vol.  i. 
p.  545  sq.)  and  Alford,  who,  following  Olshausen,  says  in  loc.:  “The  con- 
fession is  not  made  in  the  terms  of  the  other  answer : it  is  not  ‘ we  sag,’ 
or  ‘ I sag,’  but  ‘ Thou  art/  It  is  the  expression  of  an  inward  conviction 
wrought  by  God’s  Spirit.  The  excellence  of  this  confession  is,  that  it 
brings  out  both  the  human  and  the  divine  nature  of  the  Lord : o Xp/^r;?  is 
the  Messiah,  the  Son  of  David,  the  anointed  King ; o wot  too  GbJ  toZ  £w>tc? 
is  the  Eternal  Son,  begotten  of  the  Eternal  Father,  as  the  last  word  most 
emphatically  implies  not  ‘ Son  of  God’  in  any  inferior  figurative  sense,  not 
one  of  the  sons  of  God,  of  angelic  nature,  but  the  Sou  of  the  living  God, 
having  in  Him  the  Sonship  and  the  divine  nature,  in  a sense  in  which  they 
could  be  in  none  else.  This  was  the  view  of  the  person  of  Christ  quite  dis- 
tinct from  the  Jewish  Messianic  idea,  which  appears  to  have  been'(Justin 
Mart.  Dial.  p.  267)  that  he  should  be  born  from  men,  but  selected  by  God 

* [This  is  the  correct  view,  already  nlaintained  by  the  fathers,  e.  g.  Chrysos- 
tom, who,  in  Horn.  54,  calls  Peter  in  this  connection  the  mouth  of  the  apostles, 
to  ttom*  tZv  (error TiXay : by  Jerome,  Petrus  ex  persona  omnium  apostolorum  pro- 
Jitetur  ; and  by  Thomas  Aquinas,  Ipse  respondet  etpro  se  etpro  aliis.  Some  Rom. 
Cath.  commentators,  as  Passaglia  and  Arnoldi,  for  obvious  reasons,  maintain 
that  Peter  spoke  only  in  his  own  name.  But  the  Saviour  addressed  His  ques- 
tion to  all  the  disciples,  and  they  certainly  must  have  assented  to  Peter’s  con- 
fession of  faith,  which  they  had  from  the  time  of  their  calling,  and  without 
which  they  could  not  have  been  apostles.  Comp.  John  i.  42,  46,  50,  also  the 
remarks  of  Dr.  Schegg,  a Rom.  Cath.  Com.  in  loc.  (vol.  ii.  p.  349). — P.  S.] 


1864.] 


Homiletical  Commentary. 


667 


for  the  office  on  account  of  his  eminent  virtues.  This  distinction  accounts 
for  the  solemn  blessing  pronounced  in  the  next  verse.  ZZnot  must  not  for 
a moment  be  taken  here,  as  it  sometimes  is  used  (e.  g.,  Acts  xiv.  15),  as 
merely  distinguishing  the  true  God  from  dead  idols : it  is  here  emphatic, 
and  imparts  force  and  precision  to  wot.  That  Peter,  when  he  uttered  the 
words,  understood  by  them  in  detail  all  that  we  now  understand,  is  not 
of  course  here  asserted,  but  that  they  were  his  testimony  to  the  true  Hu- 
manity and  true  Divinity  of  the  Lord,  in  that  sense  of  deep  truth  and 
reliance,  out  of  which  springs  the  Christian  life  of  the  Church.”  Meyer, 
indeed,  takes  tou  simply  as  the  solemn  epithet  of  the  true  God  in 
opposition  to  the  dead  idols  of  the  heathen ; but  there  was  no  reason  here 
for  contrasting  the  true  God  with  heathen  idols,  and  Peter  must  have 
meant  to  convey  the  idea,  however  imperfectly  understood  by  him  at  the 
time,  that  the  Godhead  itself  was  truly  revealed  in,  and  reflected  from,  the 
human  person  of  Christ  in  a sense  and  to  a degree  compared  with  which 
all  former  manifestations  of  God  appeared  to  him  like  dead  shadows.  He 
echoed  the  declaration  from  heaven  at  Christ’s  baptism:  “This  is  my 
beloved  Son  in  whom  I am  well  pleased,”  and  recognized  in  Him  the 
essential  and  eternal  life  of  the  great  Jehovah. — P.  S.] 

Ver.  17.  Jesus  answered. — Also  a confession,  decided,  solemn,  and 
deep;  being  the  divine  confession  of  the  Lord  in  favour  of  the  Church, 
which  had  now  confessed  His  name,  and  of  her  first  witness. — Blessed  art 
thou  (comp.  Rom.  x.  9),  Simon,  son  of  Jonah.* — Meyer  denies  in  vain 
the  antithesis  between  this  address  and  the  new  title  given  to  Peter. 
Different  views  have  been  taken  in  reference  to  this  antithesis.  1.  Paulus 
explains  it:  Simon,  or  obedient  hearer, — son  of  Jonas,  or  son  of  oppres- 
sion. 2.  Olshausen:  dove,  with  reference  to  the  Holy  Spirit  under 

the  figure  of  a dove.  Thou,  Simon,  art  a child  of  the  Spirit.  3.  Lange 
( Leben  Jem,  ii.  2,  469) : Thou,  Simon,  son  of  a dove  (which  makes  its  nest 
in  the  rock,  a figure  of  the  Church),  shalt  be  called  a rock  (the  rock-like 
dwelling-place  of  the  dove,  i.  e.,  of  the  Church). f With  this  antithesis 
the  other  in  the  same  verse  is  connected.  According  to  the  flesh,  thou 
art  a natural  son  of  Jonah ; but  according  to  this  revelation  of  the  Spirit, 
a child  of  the  Father  who  is  in  heaven  (referring  to  his  regeneration,  and 

* [According  to  Lange’s  version.  Comp,  my  critical  note  above — P.  S.] 

f [I  confess  that  this  allegorical  exposition  of  the  term  appears  to  me  as  far- 
fetched and  improbable  as  that  of  Olshausen.  Bar  Jona  has  nothing  to  do 
with  a dove,  but  is  a contraction  for  Bar  Joanna  (Chaldaic),  t.  e.,  Son  of  John, 
as  is  evident  from  John  xxi.  15,  16,  17,  where  Christ  addresses  Peter:  h'/ua* 
’lad mo.  But  there  may  be  in  this  use  of  the  pati-onymic  an  allusion  to  the 
title  Son  of  Man  in  ver.  13,  which  would  give  additional  emphasis  to  the 
counter  confession,  in  this  sense:  That  I,  the  Son  of  Man,  am  at  the  same 
time  the  Messiah  and  the  eternal  Son  of  God,  is  as  true  as  that  thou,  Simon, 
art  the  Son  of  Jonah;  and  as  thou  hast  thus  confessed  Me  as  the  Messiah,  I 
will  now  confess  thee  as  Peter,  etc.  If  the  Saviour  spoke  in  Aramaic  or  Chal- 
daic, as  lie  undoubtedly  did  on  ordinary  occasions  and  with  His  disciples.  He 
used  the  term  Bar  in  ver.  17,  from  Dan.  vii.  13,  the  prophetic  passage  from 
which  the  Messianic  appellation  Son  of  Man  was  derived,  so  that  Bar  enahsh 
( Son  of  Man)  and  Bar-Jonah  would  correspond. — P.  S.] 


668  Lange's  Theological  and  [October 

consequent  faith  and  confession.  [Similarly  Alford:  The  name  “Simon 
Bar  Jonas”  is  doubtless  used  as  indicating  his  fleshly  state  and  extraction, 
and  forming  the  greater  contrast  to  his  spiritual  state,  name,  and  bless- 
ing, -which  follow.  The  name  'Ziy.w  ’lava,  Simon,  son  of  Jonas  or  Jonah,  is 
uttered  when  he  is  reminded  by  the  thrice-repeated  inquiry,  “Lovest  thou 
me?”  of  his  frailty,  in  his  previous  denial  of  his  Lord,  John  xxi.  15,  16, 
17.— P.  S.] 

Flesh  and  Blood. — Various  views  have  been  taken  of  this  expression. 
1.  Calvin,  Beza,  Neander,  De  Wette,  refer  it  to  our  physical  nature  in 
opposition  to  the  smO^a.  To  this  Meyer  objects,  that  our  physical  nature 
is  termed  in  Scripture  only  trig,  not  <rafe  «*/  <*![«<*  (in  1 Cor.  xv.  50,  “flesh 
and  blood”  should  be  literally  understood).  2.  According  to  Lightfoot 
and  Meyer,  it  must  be  taken  (with  special  reference  to  the  fact,  that  the 
Rabbins  use  &“Tl  “TO 3 as  a kind  of  paraphrase  for  Son  of  Man,  including 
the  accessory  idea  of  the  weakness  involved  in  our  corporeal  nature),  as 
simply  denoting  weak  man,  equivalent  to  nemo  morialium  (as  in  Gal.  i.  16). 
3.  We  explain  it:  the  natural,  carnal  descent,  as  contrasted  with  spiritual 
generation.  John  i.  13:  e'i  mx  udrav,  olS'i  in  Btruflurm  trapxht,  x.  r.  x. 
This  appears  still  further  from  the  connection  between  the  expressions, 
“flesh  and  blood”  and  “ son  of  Jonah,”  and  from  the  antithesis,  “ My 
Father  who  is  in  heaven.”  Hence  Gal.  i.  16  must  mean:  When  I received 
a commission  to  preach  to  the  Gentiles,  I conferred  not  with  my  Jewish 
nationality;  and  Eph.  vi.  12:  In  reality,  we  wrestle  not  with  beings  of 
human  kind,  but  with  the  powers  of  darkness,  whose  representatives  and 
instruments  they  are ; and  1 Cor.  xv.  50 : The  kind  which  is  of  this  world 
(of  the  first  man,  who  is  of  the  earth)  shall  not  inherit  the  kingdom  of 
God ; but  we  must  enter  it  by  a complete  transformation  into  a second 
and  new  life  which  is  from  heaven.  Accordingly,  the  antithesis  in  the 
text  is  between  knowledge  resulting  from  natural  human  development,  or 
on  the  basis  of  natural  birth,  and  knowledge  proceeding  from  the  revela- 
tion of  the  Father  in  heaven,  or  on  the  basis  of  regeneration. 

Hath  not  revealed  it —but  my  Father. — A difficulty  has  been  felt, 
how  to  reconcile  this  declaration  with  the  fact,  that  the  disciples  had  at  a 
much  earlier  period  recognized  Jesus  as  the  Messiah  (John  i.  42,  46,  50). 
1.  Olshausen  holds  that  this  confession  of  Peter  indicates  a much  more 
advanced  state  of  knowledge:  o vios  rev  0m,  roZ  fZvra.  2.  Neander  thinks 
that  all  earlier  revelations  had  more  or  less  proceeded  from  flesh  and 
blood.  3.  Meyer  suggests  that  the  text  refers  to  that  first  acknowledg- 
ment of  Jesus  as  the  Messiah,  in  consequence  of  which  the  disciples  came 
and  surrendered  themselves  to  Him.*  4.  In  our  view,  the  new  element 

* [Not  exactly.  In  the  fourth  edition  of  his  Com.  on  Matt.  p.  320,  Meyer 
assumes  that  Peter,  although  long  since  convinced,  with  the  rest  of  the  disci- 
ples, of  the  Messiahship  of  Jesus,  was  on  this  occasion  favoured  with  a special 
divine  revelation  on  the  subject  and  spoke  from  a state  of  inspiration. 
“ Daher ,”  he  says  “ist  dvixaruf  nicht  auf  eine  schon  beim  erslen  Anschliessen  an 
Jesum  erhaltene  Offenbarung,  welche  den  Jiingern  geworden.  zu  beziehen,  sondern 
auf  Petrus  und  eine  ihn  auszeichnende  besondere  wr:xdruf;  zu  beschranhen. — 

P.  S.] 


Homiletical  Commentary. 


669 


1864.] 


in  this  confession  lies,  first  of  all,  in  its  ethical  form.  It  was  no  longer  a 
mere  knowledge  (or  recognition)  of  Christ.  While  the  general  knowledge 
of  the  Jews  concerning  the  Messiah  had  retrograded  and  degenerated  into 
discordant  and  self-contradictory  opinions,  the  knowledge  of  the  disciples 
had  advanced,  and  was  now  summed  up  and  concentrated  into  an  act  of 
spiritual  faith  in  Peter’s  confession,  which,  in  view  of  the  hostility  of  the 
Jewish  rulers,  may  be  characterized  as  a real  martyrdom  (f**prvfU). 
Another  new  element  lay  in  the  view  now  expressed  concerning  the  Mes- 
siah. On  all  the  main  points,  the  Jewish  and  traditional  notions  of  the 
Messiah  had  evidently  been  thrown  off,  and  a pure  and  spiritual  faith 
attained  from  converse  with  the  life  of  Jesus.  In  both  these  respects,  it 
was  a revelation  of  the  Father  in  heaven,  i.  e.,  a heavenly  and  spiritual 
production.  The  new  life  was  germinating  in  the  hearts  of  the  disciples. 
— De  W ette  regards  this  passage  as  incompatible  with  the  earlier  acknow- 
ledgments of  the  Messiah;  while  Fritzsche,  Schneckenburger,  and  Strauss 
talk  of  a twofold  period  in  Christ’s  ministry : the  first,  when  He  was  a dis- 
ciple of  John ; the  second,  when  He  attained  to  consciousness  of  His  Mes- 
sianic dignity.  But  these  critics  have  wholly  misunderstood  this  nar- 
rative. 

Yer.  18.  But  I also  say  unto  thee. — The  expression  shows  in  a striking 
manner  the  reciprocity  existing  between  Christ  and  His  disciples.  Their 
confession  solicits  His  confession.* 

Thou  art  Peter. — Tlerpos,  in  Aramaic,  itS11!?,  the  stone,  or  the  rock  ( see 
Meyer).  The  Greek  masculine  noun  arose  from  the  translation  of  the 
name  into  Greek;  the  name  itself  had  been  given  at  an  earlier  period, 
John  i.  42.  It  was  now  bestowed  a second  time  to  indicate  the  relation- 
ship subsisting  between  Peter  and  the  Ecclesia,  rather  than  to  prove  that 
Peter  really  was  what  his  name  implied  (Meyer).  From  the  first  this 
name  was  intended  to  be  symbolical;  although  its  real  meaning  was  only 
attained  at  a later  period  in  the  history  of  Peter.  But  at  the  same  time 
the  words  of  Jesus  imply  the  acknowledgment  that  his  character  as  Peter 
had  just  appeared  in  this  confession.  [It  should  be  observed  that  in  John 
i.  42  (in  the  Gr.  text,  ver.  43)  we  read:  “Thou  shalt  be  called  (jojiSjiVj) 
Cephas,”  but  here:  “ Thou  art  («)  Peter.” — P.  S.] 

And  on  this  rock. — For  the  various  interpretations  of  this  passage, 
see  Wolf’s  Curce.  We  submit  the  following  summary  of  them:  1.  The 
term  “rock”  is  referred  to  Christ  Himself.  Thus  Jerome, f Augus- 

* [Maldonatus  : “ Et  ego.  Elegans  antithesis,  Orcece  etiam  efficacior:  wfy*  Si, 
bed  et  ego  dico  tibi  ; quasi  dicat;  lu,  qui  homo  es,  Filium  Dei  vivi  me  esse  dixisti, 
ego  vero,  qui  Filius  Dei  vivi  sum,  dico  te  esse  Petrum,  id  est  vicarium  meum  [?], 
quem  Fdium  Dei  esse  confessus  est.  Nam  Ecclesiam  meam,  quce  super  me  cedificata 
est,  super  U etiam,  tanquam  super  sccundarium  quoddam fundamenlum  cedificabo." 
— P.  S ] 

f [This  needs  modification.  Jerome,  in  his  Comment,  on  Matt.  xvi.  18 
(Opera,  ed.  Vallars.,  tom.  vii.  p.  124),  explains  the  passage  thus:  “ Sicut  ipse 
lumen  Apostolis  donavit,  ut  lumen  mundi  appellarentur,  cceteraque  ex  Domino  sor- 
titisunt  vocabula:  ita  et  Simoni,  qui  credebat  in  petram  Christum,  Petrilar- 
gitus  est  nomen.  Ac  secundum  metaphoram  petrce,  recte  dicitur  ei : jtEdificabo 


670  Lange  s Theological  and  [October 

tine,*  Chemnitz,  Fabricius,  and  others.f — 2.  It  is  referred  to  Peter’s 
confession.  Thus  most  of  the  Fathers,  and  several  of  the  Popes, 


ecclesiam  meam  SUPER  te.”  The  last  words  [super  te)  show  that  he  refer- 
red the  petra  not  only  to  Christ,  but  in  a derivative  sense  also  to  Peter  as  the 
confessor.  So  in  another  passage  ( Ep . ad  Damas.  papam,  Ep.  15,  ed.  Yal.  i. 
37,  sq.)  he  says  of  Peter:  ‘■‘■super  illarn  petram  cediftcatam  ecclesiam  scio.” 
Jerome  also  regards  the  bishop  of  Rome  as  the  successor  of  Peter,  but  advo- 
cates elsewhere  the  equal  rights  of  bishops,  so  that  he  can  be  quoted  only  in 
favour  of  a Roman  primacy  of  honour,  not  of  a supremacy  of  jurisdiction.  Comp, 
on  Jerome’s  views  concerning  the  papacy  the  second  vol.  of  my  General  Church 
History,  now  preparing  for  the  press,  g 61,  p.  304,  sq. — P.  S.] 

* [/.  e.,  Augustine  in  his  later  years  ; for  at  first  he  referred  the  petra  to 
the  person  of  Peter.  He  says  in  his  Retractations , i.  cap.  21,  at  the  close  of  his 
life : “I  have  somewhere  said  of  St.  Peter  that  the  church  is  built  upon  him  as 
rock.  . . . But  I have  since  frequently  said  that  the  word  of  the  Lord  : ‘ Thou 
art  Petrus,  and  on  this  petra  I will  build  my  church,’  must  be  understood  of 
him,  whom  Peter  confessed  as  Son  of  the  living  God ; and  Peter,  so  named 
after  this  rock,  represents  the  person  of  the  church,  which  is  founded  on  this 
rock  and  has  received  the  keys  of  the  kingdom  of  heaven.  For  it  was  not  said 
to  him:  ‘ Thou  art  a rock'  [petra),  but  ‘ Thou  art  Peter'  [Petrus)-,  and  the  rock 
was  Christ,  through  confession  of  whom  Simon  received  the  name  of  Peter. 
Yet  the  reader  may  decide  which  of  the  two  interpretations  is  the  more  proba- 
ble.” In  the  same  strain  he  says*  in  another  place:  “Peter,  in  virtue  of  the 
primacy  of  his  apostolate,  stands,  by  a figurative  generalization,  for  the  church. 

. . . When  it  was  said  to  him,  ‘ I will  give  unto  thee  the  keys  of  the  kingdom 
of  heaven,’  &c.,  he  represented  the  whole  church,  which  in  this  world  is 
assailed  by  various  temptations,  as  if  by  floods  and  storms,  yet  does  not  fall, 
because  it  is  founded  upon  a rock,  from  which  Peter  received  his  name.  For 
the  rock  is  not  so  named  from  Peter,  but  Peter  from  the  rock  [non  enim  a Petro 
petra,  sed  Petrus  a petra),  even  as  Christ  is  not  so  called  after  the  Christian,  but 
the  Christian  after  Christ.  For  the  reason  why  the  Lord  says,  ‘ On  this  rock 
I will  build  my  church,’  is  that  Peter  had  said : 1 Thou  art  the  Christ,  the  Son 
of  the  living  God.’  On  this  rock,  which  thou  hast  confessed,  says  he,  I will 
build  my  church.  For  Christ  was  the  the  rock  [petra  enim  erat  Christus)  upon 
which  also  Peter  himself  was  built;  for  other  foundation  can  no  man  lay,  than 
that  is  laid,  which  is  Jesus  Christ.  Thus  the  church,  which  is  built  upon 
Christ,  has  received  from  him,  in  the  person  of  Peter,  the  keys  of  heaven,  that 
is,  the  power  of  binding  and  loosing  sins.”  (Aug.  Tract,  in  Evang.  Joannis,  124, 
§ 5.)  Ambrose,  too,  at  one  time  refers  the  petra  to  Christ,  as  when  he  says 
in  Luc.  ix.  20:  “ Petra  est  Christus,"  etc.,  but  at  other  times  to  the  person  of 
Peter,  as  in  the  famous  morning  hymn  quoted  by  Augustin  [Hoc  ipsa  petra 
ecclesice  Canente,  culpam  diluit),  and  again  to  his  confession,  or  rather  to  Peter 
and  his  confession.  Comp,  my  Church  History,  vol.  ii.  p.  304.  A similar  appa- 
rent inconsistency  we  find  in  other  fathers.  The  reference  of  the  rock  to 
Christ  was  also  advocated  by  Theodoret,  ad  1 Cor.  iii.  11,  the  venerable 
Bede  in  Marc,  iii:  “ Petra  erat  Christus  (1  Cor.  x.  4).  Nam  Simoni  qui  crede - 
hat  in  Petram  Christum,  Petri  largitus  est  nomen;"  and  even  by  Pope  Gre- 
gory VII.  in  the  inscription  to  the  crown  he  sent  to  the  rival  emperor  Rudolph  : 
“Petra  [i.  e.,  Christ)  dedit  Petro  (Peter),  Petrus  (the  pope)  diadema  Ru- 
dolpho." — P.  S.] 

f [Especially  Calovius  in  the  Lutheran,  and  quite  recently  Dr.  Words- 
worth in  the  Anglican,  and  (evidently  under  the  influence  of  Wordsworth’s 
arguments)  Dr.  Jos.  A.  Alexander  of  the  Presbyt.  Church  (although  the  lat- 
ter, as  usual  with  him  in  critical  passages,  does  not  finally  decide).  Dr. 
Wordsworth  rests  his  laboured  defence  of  the  later  Augustinian  interpretation 
mainly  on  the  difference  between  nerf o;,  stone,  and  mv-fu,  rock,  which  he  thinks 
(referring  to  Lightfoot  and  Beveridge)  had  a parallel  in  the  Syriac  Cephas  or 


Homiletical  Commentary. 


671 


1864.] 


Leo  I.,*  Hubs  in  the  Tractat.  de  ecclesia,  the  Articuli  Smalcald.  in  the 
Append.,  Luther J Febronius,  and  others. — 3.  It  is  applied  to  Peter  him- 


Kepha  (doubtful) ; on  the  fact  that  in  the  0.  T.  the  title  Rock  is  reserved  to 
God  Almighty  (2  Sam.  xxii.  32;  Ps.  xviii.  31;  lxii.  2,  6,  7,  etc.);  and  on  the 
admitted  equality  of  the  apostles.  He  thus  paraphrases  the  words  of  the 
Saviour:  ‘“I  myself,  now  confessed  by  thee  to  be  God  and  Man,  am  the  Rock 
of  the  Church.  This  is  the  foundation  on  which  it  is  built.’  And  because 
St.  Peter  had  confessed  Him  as  such,  He  says  to  St.  Peter,  ‘Thou  hast  con- 
fessed Me,  and  I will  now  confess  thee ; thou  hast  owned  Me,  I will  now  own 
thee ; thou  art  Peter,  i.  e.,  thou  art  a lively  stone,  hewn  out  of,  and  built  upon 
Me,  the  living  Rock.  Thou  art  a genuine  Petros  of  Me,  the  divine  Petra. 
And  whosoever  would  be  a lively  stone,  a Peter,  must  imitate  thee  in  this  thy 
true  confession  of  Me  the  living  Rock ; for  upon  this  Rock,  that  is,  on  Myself, 
believed  and  confessed  to  be  both  God  and  Man,  I will  build  My  Church.’  ” 
This  is  all  true  enough  in  itself  considered,  but  it  is  no  exposition  of  the  pas- 
sage. Everybody  knows  and  admits,  that  in  the  highest  sense  of  the  term 
Christ  and  He  alone  is  the  immovable  (divine)  Rock  of  the  Church,  the  foun- 
dation (9-s on  which  the  apostles  built  and  besides  which  no  other  can  be 
laid,  1 Cor.  iii.  11;  comp.  1 Cor.  x.  4 («T/>a) ; Matt.  vii.  24,  25.  But  it  is 
equally  true  that  in  a subordinate  sense  the  apostles  are  called  the  (human) 
foundation  on  which  the  Church  is  built,  Eph.  ii.  20;  (imnufopDibivn;  hr)  <r? 
S'£(«£A<»  aTroon-ohaiv  kui  TrfoinrrZv,  k.  t.  a)  ; Rev.  xxi.  14  (fny.irj'A  J'ZJ'atx,  x.  t.  a.). 
Now  in  our  passage  Christ  appears  not  as  rock,  i.  e.,  as  part  of  the  building 
itself,  but  under  a higher  figure  as  architect  and  Lord  of  the  whole  spiritual 
temple;  and  the  mixing  of  figures  in  one  breath  as  this  interpretation  implies, 
would  be  a plain  violation  of  rhetorical  taste  and  propriety  such  as  we  should 
not  for  a moment  think  of  in  connection  with  our  Saviour.  Again,  the  antana- 
clasis  (t.  e.,  the  rhetorical  figure  of  repeating  the  same  word  in  a different  sense) 
is  conclusive  against  this  explanation.  The  demonstrative  tWtii  must  refer  to 
rrnpt,  which  immediately  precedes ; for  there  is  not  the  least  intimation  that 
the  Saviour,  after  having  said:  “ Thou  art  Rockman,”  turned  away  from  Peter, 
and  pointing  to  Himself,  continued:  “ and  on  this  rock  (i.  e,  Myself,  \rd 
ijuxorZ)  I will  build  My  Church.”  On  the  contrary,  He  immediately  continues: 
“ And  I will  give  to  thee,”  kui  JZcrai  a-ct,  which  can,  of  course,  mean  nobody 
else  but  Peter.  This  interpretation  of  Augustine  and  Wordsworth  destroys 
the  rhetorical  beauty  and  emphasis  of  the  passage,  and  can  give  us  no  advan- 
tage whatever  in  our  controversy  with  Rome,  which  must  and  can  be  refuted 
on  far  better  grounds  than  forced  exegesis. — P.  S.] 

* [This  reference  to  the  fathers  is  too  indefinite,  and  hardly  correct  as  far 
as  Leo  and  the  popes  are  concerned.  The  majority  of  the  fathers,  Hilary, 
Ambrose,  Jerome,  Augustine,  Leo  I.,  Gregory  of  Nazianzen,  Chrysostom,  Cyril 
of  Alexandria,  Theodoret,  etc.,  vary  in  their  interpretation,  referring  the 
petra  sometimes  to  the  person  of  Peter,  sometimes  to  his  faith  or  confession, 
and  sometimes  (as  Jerome  and  Augustine)  to  Christ  Himself.  (Comp.  Maldo- 
natus,  Comment,  in  quatuor  Evangelistas,  ed.  Martin,  tom.  i.,  p.  219  sq.,  and 
my  History  of  the  Christian  Church,  vol.  ii.,  61  and  63,  pp.  302  sqq.  and  314 
sqq.,  where  the  principal  passages  are  quoted.)  But  this  inconsistency  is 
more  apparent  than  real,  since  Peter  and  his  faith  in  Christ  cannot  be  separated 
in  this  passage.  Peter  (representing  the  other  apostles)  as  believing  and  con- 
fessing Christ  (but  in  no  other  capacity)  is  the  petra  ecclesice.  This  is  the  true 
interpretation,  noticed  by  Lange  sub  number  3.  b).  Comp,  my  Critical  Note, 
No.  3,  below  the  text.  But  the  confession  (or  faith  alone  cannot  be  meant,  for 
two  reasons : first,  because  this  construction  assumes  an  abrupt  transition  from 
the  person  to  a thing,  and  destroys  the  significance  of  the  demonstrative  and 
emphatic  t uuryi  which  evidently  refers  to  the  nearest  antecedent  Petros;  and 
secondly,  because  the  church  is  not  built  upon  abstract  doctrines  and  confes- 
sions, but  upon  living  persons  believing  and  confessing  the  truth  (Eph.  ii.  20; 


672  Lange  s Theological  and  [October 

self,  (a)  In  the  popish  sense,  by  Baronius  and  Bellarmin,  [Passaglia,] 
as  implying  that  Peter  was  invested  with  a permanent  primacy;* 
(b)  with  reference  to  the  special  call  and  work  of  Peter  as  an  Apostle. 
By  thee,  Peter,  as  the  most  prominent  of  My  witnesses,  shall  the  Church 
be  founded  and  established:  Acts  ii.  and  x.  So,  many  Roman  Catholics, 
as  Launoi,  Dupin, — and  later  Protestant  expositors,  as  Werenfels,  Pfaff, 
Bengel,  and  Crusius.  Heubner  thinks  that  the  antanaclasis,  or  the  con- 
necting of  Peter  with  s«t px,  is  in  favour  of  this  view.  But  he  [as  also 
nearly  all  other  commentators  who  represent  this  view]  combines  with  it 
the  application  of  the  term  to  the  confession.! — 4.  It  is  applied  to  Peter, 
inclusive  of  all  the  other  Apostles,  and,  indeed,  of  all  believers.  Thus 
Origen  on  Matt.  xvi.  18:  “Every  believer  who  is  enlightened  by  the 
Father  is  also  a rock.” — 5.  In  our  opinion,  the  Lord  here  generalizes,  so 
to  speak,  the  individual  Peter  into  the  general  wrp x,  referring  to  what  may 
be  called  the  Petrine  characteristic  of  the  Church — viz.,  faithfulness  of 
confession, % — as  first  distinctly  exhibited  by  Peter.  Hence  the  words  of 

1 Pet.  ii.  4-6;  Gal.  ii.  9;  Rev.  xxi.  14).  Dr.  Jos.  A.  Alexander,  however,  is 
too  severe  on  this  interpretation  in  calling  it  as  forced  and  unnatural  as  the 
Roman  Catholic.  It  undoubtedly  implies  an  element  of  truth,  since  Peter  in 
this  passage  is  addressed  as  the  bold  and  fearless  confessor  of  Christ. — P.  S.] 

* [The  Romish  interpretation  is  liable  to  the  following  objections:  (1)  It  ob- 
literates the  distinction  between  petros  and  petra;  (2)  it  is  inconsistent  with 
the  true  nature  of  the  architectural  figure  ; the  foundation  of  a building  is  one 
and  abiding,  and  not  constantly  renewed  and  changed;  (3)  it  confounds  priority 
of  time  with  permanent  superiority  of  rank;  (4)  it  confounds  the  apostolate, 
which,  strictly  speaking,  is  not  transferable  but  confined  to  the  original  per- 
sonal disciples  of  Christ,  and  inspired  organs  of  the  Holy  Spirit,  with  the  post- 
apostolic  episcopate ; (5)  it  involves  an  injustice  to  the  other  apostles,  who,  as 
a body,  are  expressly  called  the  foundation,  or  foundation  stones  of  the  church ; 

(6)  it  contradicts  the  whole  spirit  of  Peter’s  epistles,  which  is  strongly  anti- 
hierarchical,  and  disclaims  any  superiority  over  his  “fellow-presbyters;” 

(7)  finally,  it  rests  on  gratuitous  assumptions  which  can  never  be  proven 
either  exegetically  or  historically,  viz.,  the  transferability  of  Peter’s  primacy, 
and  its  actual  transfer  upon  the  bishop,  not  of  Jerusalem  nor  of  Antioch 
(where  Peter  certainly  was),  but  of  Rome  exclusively.  Comp,  also  the  long 
note  to  § 94  in  my  History  of  the  Apostolic  Church,  p.  374  sqq. — P.  S.] 

f [So  also  Olshaosen:  “Peter,  in  his  new  spiritual  character,  appears  as 
the  supporter  of  Christ’s  great  work;  Jesus  Himself  is  the  creator  of  the 
whole,  Peter,  the  first  stone  of  the  building;”  De  Wette:  “irri  rxvry  rij  nfa-px, 
on  thee  as  this  firm  confessor;”  Meyer:  “on  no  other  but  this  (rxurs)  rock, 
t.  e.,  Peter  so  called  for  his  firm  and  strong  faith  in  Christ;”  Alford:  “Peter 
was  the  first  of  those  foundation-stones  (Eph.  ii.  20;  Rev.  xxi.  14)  on  which 
the  living  temple  of  God  was  built:  this  building  itself  beginning  on  the  day 
of  Pentecost  by  the  laying  of  three  thousand  living  stones  on  this  very  founda- 
tion;” D.  Brown:  “not  on  the  man  Bar-jona;  but  on  him  as  the  heaven-taught 
Confessor  of  such  a faith;”  and  more  or  less  clearly,  Grotius,  Le  Clerc,  Whitby, 
Doddridge,  Clarke,  Bloomfield,  Barnes,  Eadie,  Owen,  Crosby  (who,  however, 
wrongly  omits  the  reference  to  the  confession),  Whedon,  Nast.  I can  see  no 
material  difference  between  this  interpretation  and  Lange’s  own  sub  No.  5, 
which  is  only  a modification  or  expansion  of  it.  I have  already  remarked  in  a 
former  note  that  this  is  the  true  exposition  which  the  majority  of  the  fathers 
intended,  though  with  some  inclination  to  the  subsequent  Romish  application 
of  the  promise  to  a supposed  successor. — P.  S.] 

J [Die  petrinische  Bekenntnisstreue. — P.  S.] 


Homiletical  Commentary. 


673 


1864.] 


Jesus  only  refer  to  Peter  in  so  far  as  by  this  confession  he  identified  him- 
self with  Christ,  and  was  the  first  to  upbuild  the  Church  by  his  testi- 
mony. But  in  so  far  as  the  text  alludes  to  an  abiding  foundation  of  the 
Church,  the  expression  refers  not  to  the  Apostle  as  an  individual,  but  to 
Trirp*  in  the  more  general  sense,  or  to  faithfulness  of  confession.  That 
Peter  was  here  meant  in  his  higher  relation,  and  not  in  himself,  appears 
from  the  change  of  terms,  first  mrpo;,  then  7rirp*.;  also  from  the  contrast  in 
ver.  22;  while  the  fact  that  his  distinction  conferred  no  official  primacy  is 
evident  from  this,  that  the  same  rights  and  privileges  were  bestowed  upon 
all  the  Apostles:  Matt,  xviii.  18;  John  xx.  23;  Eph.  ii.  20;  Rev.  xxi.  14. 
That  he  himself  claimed  no  preeminence  appears  from  his  First  Epistle, 
in  which  he  designates  Christ  as  the  corner-stone,  and  Christians  as 
living  stones,  1 Pet.  ii.  5,  6 (as  themselves  Peters,  or  related  to  Peter). 
Lastly,  that  he  knew  of  no  successors  in  the  sense  of  the  Papacy,  is 
proved  by  his  exhortation  to  the  presbyters  not  to  be  lords  over  God’s 
heritage  (the  x.\»poi,  1 Pet.  v.  3.) 

My  Church. — Here  the  mukho-U  of  Christ  appears  for  the  first  time  in 
distinct  contrast  to  the  Jewish  congregation,  bflJJ.  Hence  the  passage 
refers  not  simply  to  a community  of  believers,  but  to  a definite  organiza- 
tion of  this  community  (compare  what  follows  on  the  keys).  Accordingly, 
the  passage  alludes  to  the  Church  as  the  organized  and  visible  form  of 
the  ft*? iKiiet  tA  chp-i'/lv.  The  Church  is  not  the  kingdom  of  heaven  itself, 
but  a positive  institution  of  Christ,  by  which,  on  the  one  hand,  the  king- 
dom of  heaven  becomes  directly  manifest  in  the  world  by  its  worship, 
while,  on  the  other  hand,  it  spreads  through  the  world  by  means  of  its 
missionary  efforts.  The  Church  bears  the  same  relation  to  the  kingdom  of 
heaven  as  the  Messianic  state  under  the  Old  Testament  to  the  theocracy, 
the  two  being  certainly  not  identical. 

The  gates  of  hades  (underworld). — De  Wette:  “ Here,  equivalent  to 
the  kingdom  of  Satan.”  But  this  is  not  the  scriptural  conception  of 
hades  or  sheol.  Throughout  the  Bible  hades  means  the  kingdom  of  death ; 
which  is,  indeed,  connected  with  the  kingdom  of  Satan,  but  has  a more 
comprehensive  meaning.  Hades  is  described  as  having  gates;  it  is  figura- 
tively represented  as  a castle  with  gates  (Songviii.  6;  Job  xxxviii.  17; 
Isa.  xxxviii.  10;  Ps.  evii.  18).  These  gates  serve  a hostile  purpose,  since 
they  opened,  like  a yawning  abyss  of  death,  to  swallow  up  Christ,  and 
then  Peter,  or  the  Apostles  and  the  Church,  in  their  martyrdom.  For  a 
long  time  it  seemed  as  if  the  Church  of  Christ  would  become  the  prey  of 
this  destroying  hades.  But  its  gates  shall  not  ultimately  prevail — they 
shall  be  taken ; and  Christ  will  overcome  and  abolish  the  kingdom  of 
death  in  His  Church  (see  Isa.  xxv.  8;  IIos.  xiii.  14;  1 Cor.  xv.  15;  Eph. 
i.  19,  20).  Of  course,  the  passage  also  implies  conflict  with  the  kingdom 
of  evil,  and  victory  over  it ; but  its  leading  thought  is  the  triumph  of  life 
over  death,  of  the  kingdom  of  the  resurrection  over  the  usurped  reign  of 
the  kingdom  of  hades. — Erasmus,  Calvin,  and  others,  refer  it  to  the  vic- 
tory over  Satan ; Grotius,  to  that  over  death ; Ewald,  to  that  over  all  the 
monsters  of  hell,  let  loose  through  these  open  gates ; Gldckler,  to  that  over 
VOL.  XXXVI. — NO.  IV.  85 


4 


674 


Lange  s Theological  and 


[October 


the  machinations  of  the  kingdom  of  darkness  (the  gate  being  the  place  of 
council  in  the  East);  Meyer,  to  the  superiority  of  the  Church  over  hades, 
without  any  allusion  to  an  attack  on  the  part  of  hades.  The  idea,  that 
the  Old  Testament  sxxxxo-/*  would  fall  before  the  gates  of  hades,  is  here 
evidently  implied  ( Leben  Jem,  ii.  2,  p.  887). 

Yer.  19.  The  keys  of  the  kingdom  of  heaven.— Luke  xi.  52;  Rev.  i. 
18,  iii.  7;  ix.  1;  xx.  1.  It  is  the  prerogative  of  the  Apostles,  either  to 
admit  into  the  kingdom  of  heaven,  or  to  exclude  from  it.  Meyer : “ The 
figure  of  the  keys  corresponds  with  the  figurative  expression  oUJoy.>iiTa>  in 
ver.  18 ; since  in  ver.  18  the  'muMo-ia.,  which,  at  Christ’s  second  appearing, 
is  destined  to  become  the  fizo-iMU  rZv  oupavlv  [as  if  this  were  not  already  its 
real,  though  not  its  open  character,  which  at  Christ’s  second  coming  shall 
only  become  outwardly  manifest !] — is  represented  as  a building.  But,  in 
reference  to  Peter,  the  figure  changes  from  that  of  a rock,  or  foundation, 
to  that  of  an  oum^t ; or,  in  other  words,  from  the  position  and  character 
of  Peter  to  his  office  and  work.”  But  evidently  the  antithesis  here  pre- 
sented is  different  from  this  view.  Peter  is  designated  the  foundation- 
stone  as  being  the  first  confessing  member  of  the  Church,  though  with  an 
allusion  to  his  calling ; while  in  his  official  relation  to  the  Church  he  is 
represented  as  guardian  of  the  Holy  City.  Hence  the  expression,  rock, 
refers  to  the  nucleus  of  the  Church  as  embodied  in  Peter;  whije  the  keys 
allude  to  the  special  office  and  vocation  in  the  church. 

[Alford:  “Another  personal  promise  to  Peter,  remarkably  fulfilled  in 
his  being  the  first  to  admit  both  Jews  and  Gentiles  into  the  Church;  thus 
using  the  power  of  the  keys  to  open  the  door  of  salvation.”  Wordsworth 
applies  the  promise  in  a primary  and  personal  sense  to  Peter,  but  in  a 
secondary  and  general  sense  also  to  the  Church,  and  especially  the  minis- 
ters who  hold  and  profess  the  faith  of  Peter,  and  are  called  to  preach  the 
gospel,  to  administer  the  sacraments,  and  to  exercise  discipline.  Augus- 
tine: “Has  claves  non  homo  unus,  sed  unitas  accepit  ecclesice.” — P.  S.] 

And  whatsoever  thou  shalt  bind. — A somewhat  difficult  antithesis, 
especially  with  reference  to  the  preceding  context.  Bretschneider,  (Lexi- 
con): “The  expression  ‘ binding ’ means  to  bind  with  the  Church;  and 
‘ loosing,’  to  loose  from  the  Church.”  But  this  is  to  confound  ideas  which 
are  very  different.  Olshausen  understands  it  of  the  ancient  custom  of 
tying  the  doors.  But  the  text  speaks  of  a key.  Stier  regards  it  as  in 
accordance  with  rabbinical  phraseology,  taken  from  the  Old  Testament ; 
binding  and  loosing  being  equivalent  to  forbidding  and  permitting,  and 
more  especially  to  remitting  and  retaining  sins.  But  these  two  ideas  are 
quite  different.  Lightfoot,  Schottgen,  and,  after  them,  Yon  Ammon,  hold 
that  the  expression  implied  three  things:  1.  Authority  to  declare  a thing 
unlawful  or  lawful.  Thus  Meyer  regards  i »«v  and  xuw  as  equivalent  to  the 
rabbinical  and  to  forbid,  and  to  permit.  2.  To  pronounce  an 

action,  accordingly,  as  criminal  or  innocent.  3.  Thereupon  to  pronounce 
a ban  or  to  revoke  it.  But  as  the  Lord  here  speaks  of  the  keys  of  the 
kingdom  of  heaven,  He  can  only  have  referred  directly  to  the  last-men- 
tioned meaning  of  the  expression,  though  it  involved  the  first  and  second, 


Homiletical  Commentary. 


675 


1864.] 


as  the  sentence  of  the  Apostles  would  always  be  according  to  truth.  A 
comparison  of  the  parallel  passage  in  Matt,  xviii.  18  confirms  this  view. 
There  Church  discipline  is  enjoined  on  the  disciples  collectively,  to  whom 
precisely  the  same  assurance  is  given  which  in  the  text  is  granted  to  Peter 
alone ; while  in  John  xx.  23  the  order  is  reversed : the  expression,  remit- 
ting sins,  being  equivalent  for  loosing,  and  retaining  sins,  for  binding. 
The  whole  passage  forms  a contrast  to  the  ecclesiastical  discipline  of  the 
Pharisees,  Matt,  xxiii.  From  the  evangelical  character  of  the  New  Testa- 
ment ministry,  it  seems  to  us  impossible  to  interpret  the  expression  as 
meaning  to  forbid  and  to  permit,  according  to  the  analogy  of  rabbinical 
usage.  To  bind  up  sins,  as  in  a bundle,  implies  coming  judgment  (Job 
xiv.  17 ; Hos.  xiii.  12) ; while,  on  the  other  hand,  sins  forgiven  are 
described  as  loosed  (LXX.  Isa.  xl.  2).  Both  figures  are  based  on  a deeper 
view  of  the  case.  When  a person  is  refused  admission  into  the  Church, 
or  excluded  from  it,  all  the  guilt  of  his  life  is,  so  to  speak,  concentrated 
into  one  judgment ; while  its  collective  effect  is  removed,  or  loosed,  when 
he  is  received  into  the  Church,  or  absolved.  The  object  of  this  binding 
and  loosing  is  stated  only  in  general  terms.  No  doubt  it  combined  all 
the  three  elements  of  the  power  of  the  keys,  as  the  non-remission  or 
remission  of  sins  (Chrysostom  and  many  others), — viz.:  1.  The  principle 
of  admission  or  non-admission  into  the  Church,  or  the  announcement  of 
grace  and  of  judgment  (the  kingdom  of  heaven  is  closed  to  unbelievers, 
opened  to  believers.)  2.  Personal  decision  as  to  the  admission  of  cate- 
chumens (Acts  viii.).  3.  The  exercise  of  discipline,  or  the  administra- 
tion of  excommunication  from  the  Church  (in  the  narrower  sense,  i.  e., 
without  curse  or  interdict  attaching  thereto).  In  the  antithesis  between 
earth  and  heaven,  the  former  expression  refers  to  the  order  and  organiza- 
tion of  the  visible  Church ; the  latter,  to  the  kingdom  of  heaven  itself. 
These  two  elements  then — the  actual  and  the  ideal  Church — were  to  coin- 
cide in  the  pure  administration  of  the  Apostles.  But  this  promise  is 
limited  by  certain  conditions.  It  was  granted  to  Peter  in  his  capacity  as 
a witness,  and  as  confessing  the  revelation  of  the  Father  (Acts  v.),  but 
not  to  Peter  as  wavering  or  declining  from  the  truth  (Matt.  xvi.  23; 
Gal.  ii.). 


DOCTRINAL  AND  ETHICAL  IDEAS. 

1.  At  first  sight  it  may  seem  an  accident  that  the  first  announcement 
of  the  Church  as  distinct  from,  and  in  contrast  to,  the  State — while 
the  ancient  theocratic  community  combined  both  Church  and  State — 
should  have  been  made  in  the  district  of  Caesarea,  which  owned  the  sway 
of  so  mild  a monarch  as  Philip.  At  any  rate,  the  event  was  one  of  uni- 
versal historical  importance,  and  may  be  regarded  as  the  preparation  for 
the  feast  of  Pentecost. 

2.  In  what  passed  between  our  Lord  and  Ilis  disciples  we  are  led  to 
observe, — (1)  The  contrast  between  human  opinions  of  religion  and  a 
confession  of  faith  prompted  and  evoked  by  the  grace  of  God : — in  the  for- 


676  Lange  s Theological  and  [October 

mer  case,  fear,  dejection,  uncertainty,  and  discordance;  in  the  latter, 
courage,  frankness,  certainty,  and  unity.  (2)  The  indissoluble  connec- 
tion between  true  confession  and  a life  of  revelation  and  in  the  Spirit,  or 
regeneration;  (3)  between  a common  confession  and  the  formation  of  the 
visible  Church;  (4)  between  the  confession  of  the  Church  to  Christ  and 
Christ’s  confession  to  the  Church;  (5)  between  the  character  of  the  first 
believing  confessor  and  his  official  calling. 

3.  In  the  text,  Peter  is  presented  to  us  in  a two-fold  relationship: 
(1)  As  Peter;  (2)  as  receiving  the  keys.  The  former  designation  applied 
to  him  as  the  first  believing  confessor,  the  first  member  of  the  ikhkho-U,  to 
which  others  were  afterwards  to  be  joined.  Hence  it  referred  to  his 
practical  life  as  a Christian  bearing  witness  to  Jesus,  rather  than  to  his 
official  position  iu  the  Church.  This  spiritual  character  formed  the  basis 
of  his  office  in  the  narrower  sense,  the  main  purport  of  which  was  to 
arrange  individual  believers  into  a community,  and,  by  organizing  a visi- 
ble Church,  to  separate  between  the  world  and  the  kingdom  of  heaven. 
As  being  the  first  witness  to  Jesus,  Peter,  so  to  speak,  laid  the  founda- 
tion of  the  Church:  (1)  By  his  confession  on  this  occasion;  (2)  by  his 
testimony,  Acts  ii. ; (3)  by  his  admission  of  the  Gentiles  into  the  Church, 
Acts  x. ; (4)  by  being  the  means  of  communicating  to  the  Church  the  dis- 
tinguishing feature  of  his  character — fidelity  of  confession. 

4.  On  the  fact  that  the  Church  indelibly  bears  not  only  the  character- 
istic of  Peter,  but  of  all  the  Apostles ; or  that  all  the  apostolic  offices  are 
unchangeably  perpetuated  in  it,  comp.  Com.  on  ch.  x,  (against  Irvingism); 
and  SchafPs  History  of  the  Apostolic  Church,  § 129,  p.  516,  sqq. 

5.  In  its  apostolic  nucleus,  its  apostolic  beginning,  and  its  apostolic  depth 
and  completeness,  the  Church  is  so  thoroughly  identified  with  the  kingdom 
of  heaven  itself,  that  its  social  determinations  should  in  all  these  respects 
coincide  with  the  declaration  of  God’s  Spirit.  But  this  applies  only  in  so 
far  as  Peter  was  really  Peter — and  hence  one  with  Christ,  or  as  Christ  is 
in  the  Church.  That  there  is  a difference  between' the  Church  and  the 
kingdom  of  heaven,  which  may  even  amount  to  a partial  opposition,  is 
implied  in  the  antithesis:  “on  earth” — “in  heaven.” 

6.  The  present  occasion  must  be  regarded  as  the  initial  foundation,  not 
as  the  regular  and  solemn  institution,  of  the  Church.  The  promises  given 
to  Peter  still  relate  to  the  future.  For  the  strong  faith  which  prompted 
his  confession  was  rather  a prophetic  flash  of  inspiration  (the  blossom), 
than  a permanent  state  of  mind  (the  fruit).  This  appears  from  the  fol- 
lowing section. 

7.  In  this  passage  Peter  is  represented  as  the  foundation-stone,  and 
Christ  as  the  builder;  while  in  1 Cor.  iii.  11,  Christ  is  designated  the 
foundation,  and  the  Apostles  the  builders.  “ The  latter  figure  evidently 
alludes  to  the  relation  between  the  changing  and  temporary  labourers  in 
the  Church,  and  her  eternal  and  essential  character,  more  especially  her 
eternal  foundation;  while  the  figurative  language  of  Jesus  applies  to  the 
relation  between  the  starting-point  and  commencement  of  the  Church  in 
time,  her  outward  and  temporal  manifestation,  and  her  eternal  Builder.’' 


1864.] 


Homiletical  Commentary. 


677 


(From  the  author’s  Leben  Jem,  ii.  2,  p.  886).  Richter  ( Erklarte  Hausbibel, 
i.  157) : “The  Church  opens  the  way  into  the  kingdom  of  heaven.  Christ 
built  on  Peter  and  the  Apostles,  not  his  kingdom,  but  his  Church,  which 
is  one,  though  not  the  only,  form  in  which  Christianity  manifests  itself.” 
Hence  Olshausen  is  mistaken  in  regarding  the  bucxWa  as  simply  tanta- 
mount to  the  finrlKtia.  r ou  0ku. 

[Wordsworth  observes  on  the  words:  they  shall  not  prevail;  “That 
these  words  contain  no  promise  of  infallibility  to  St.  Peter,  is  evident  from 
the  fact  that  the  Holy  Spirit,  speaking  by  St.  Paul  in  Canonical  Scripture, 
says  that  he  erred  (Gal.  ii.  11-13).*  And  that  they  do  not  contain  any 
promise  of  infallibility  to  the  bishop  of  Rome  is  clear,  among  other  proofs, 
from  the  circumstance  that  Pope  Liberius  (as  Athanasius  relates,  Historia 
Arian.  41,  p.  291)  lapsed  into  Arianism,  and  Honorius  was  anathemized 
of  old  by  Roman  pontilfs  as  an  heretic.” — P.  S.] 

8.  For  special  treatises  on  the  supposed  primacy  of  Peter,  see  Heubner, 
p.  236 ; Danz,  Universalworterbuch,  article  Primat;  Bretschneider,  Sys- 
tematise Entwicklung,  p.  796,  etc. 

9.  On  the  power  of  the  keys,  see  Heubner,  p.  240;  the  author’s  Positive 
Dogmatik,  p.  1182, — the  literature  belonging  to  it,  p.  1196;  Bed.  Kirchl. 
Vierteljahrsschrift,  ii.  1845,  Nr.  1;  Rothe,  Ethik,  iv.  1066.  [Compare 
also  Wordsworth,  Alford,  Brown,  and  the  American  commentators, 
Barnes,  Alexander,  Owen,  Jacobus,  Whedon,  Nast  on  ch.  xvi.  19. — P.  S.] 

HOMILETICAL  AND  PRACTICAL  HINTS. 

The  Church  of  Christ  founded  under  the  sentence  of  expulsion  pro- 
nounced on  Christ  and  His  Apostles  both  by  the  Jewish  Church  and 
the  State:  1.  Its  preparatory  announcement,  ch.  xvi.;  2.  its  complete  and 
real  foundation  (Golgatha) ; 3.  its  solemn  institution  and  manifestation, 
• Acts  ii. ; comp.  ch.  iii.  and  iv.  and  Ileb.  xiii.  13. — The  decisive  question, 
“ Who  do  men  say  that  the  Son  of  Man  is?” — Difference  between  opinions 
about  Christ  and  the  confession  of  Christ. — The  first  New  Testament  con- 
fession of  Christ,  viewed  both  as  the  fruit  and  as  the  seed  of  the  kingdom  of 
heaven:  1.  The  fruit  of  the  painful  labour  and  sowing  of  Christ;  2.  The 
germ  and  seed  of  every  future  confession  of  Christ. — The  confession  of 
Peter  an  evidence  of  his  spiritual  life:  1.  In  its  freedom  and  cheerful  self- 
surrender; 2.  in  its  decidedness;  3.  in  its  infinite  fulness;  4.  in  its  gen- 
eral suitableness  for  all  disciples. — Jesus  the  Christ,  the  Son  of  the  living 
God:  1.  In  His  nature;  2.  in  His  mission;  3.  in  His  work. — The  joy  of 
the  Lord  at  the  first-fruits  of  His  mission. — The  Confession  of  the  Lord  to 
His  Congregation:  1.  How  it  will  continue  to  become  more  abundant  even 
to  the  day  of  judgment.  (Whosoever  shall  confess  Me,”  etc.)  2.  What 
it  imports.  (The  blessedness  of  Simon  in  his  character  as  Peter.) — The 

* [But  this  was  only  an  error  of  conduct,  not  of  doctrine  ; and  hence  proves 
nothing  against  the  inspiration  of  the  apostles  nor  the  pretended  infallibility 
of  the  pope. — P.  S.] 


678 


Lange  s Commentary. 


[October 


Son  of  the  living  God  acknowledging  those  who  are  begotten  of  the  Father 
as  His  own  relatives  and  brethren. — The  life  of  faith  of  Christians  ever  a 
revelation  of  the  Father  in  heaven. — Genuine  confession  a fruit  of  regen- 
eration.— The  rock  on  which  Christ  has  founded  His  Church,  or  Peter  in 
a spiritual  sense,  is  faithfulness  of  confession  ( Bekenntnisstreue ). — Fidelity 
of  confession  the  first  characteristic  mark  of  the  Church. — Relation  be- 
tween Christ,  the  Rock  of  the  kingdom  of  heaven,  the  corner-stone  of  the 
everlasting  Church,  and  the  rock-foundation  on  which  His  visible  Church 
on  earth  is  reared:  In  the  one  case,  the  Apostles  are  the  builders,  and 
Christ  the  rock  and  corner-stone;  2.  in  the  other  case,  the  Apostles  are 
the  foundation,  and  Christ  the  builder. — Only  when  resting  on  that  rock 
which  is  Christ  will  his  people  become  partakers  of  the  same  nature. — 
How  the  Church  of  Christ  will  endure  for  ever,  in  spite  of  the  gates  of 
Hades. — The  old,  legal,  and  typical  Church,  and  the  new  Church  of  the 
living  Saviour,  in  their  relation  to  the  kingdom  of  death:  1.  The  former  is 
overcome  by  the  kingdom  of  death ; 2.  the  latter  overcomes  the  kingdom 
of  death. — Complete  victory  of  Christ’s  kingdom  of  life  over  the  kingdom 
of  death. — First  Peter,  then  the  keys;  or,  first  the  Christian,  then  the 
office. — The  power  of  the  keys  as  a spiritual  office:  1.  Its  infinite  impor- 
tance : announcement  of  the  statutes  of  the  kingdom  of  heaven ; decision 
respecting  the  admission  and  continuance  [of  members] ; or,  in  its  three- 
fold bearing — (a)  on  the  hearers  of  the  word  generally,  (6)  on  catechu- 
mens, and  (c)  on  communicants.  2.  The  conditions  of  its  exercise:  a living 
confession,  of  which  Christ  is  the  essence ; readiness  to  bind  as  well  as 
to  loose,  and  vice  versa,  the  ratification  of  the  kingdom  of  heaven.— The 
keys  of  the  prisons  of  the  Inquisition,  and  of  the  coffers  of  Indulgences, 
as  compared  with  the  keys  of  the  kingdom  of  heaven,  or,  the  difference  be- 
tween the  golden  and  the  iron  keys. — The  confession  of  faith  kept  as  a 
secret  from  the  enemies  of  Christ. — The  preparatory  festival  of  the  New 
Covenant. 

Starke  : — It  is  useful,  and  even  necessary,  for  preachers  to  be  aware  of 
the  erroneous  fancies  which  are  in  vogue  among  their  hearers  on  the  sub- 
ject of  religion. — Cramer:  Every  man  should  be  able  to  give  an  account 
of  his  faith,  John  xvii.  3. — The  discordant  thoughts  respecting  the  person 
of  Christ. — Majns:  The  just  must  live  by  his  own  faith. — Osiander:  Be 
not  vacillating,  but  assured  in  your  own  minds. — Jerome : Quemadmodum 
os  loquitor  pro  toto  corpore,  sic  Petms  lingua  erat  Apostolorum  et  pro  omni- 
bus ipse  respondit. — The  other  two  confessions  of  Peter,  Matt.  xiv.  33; 
John  vi.  68. — If  we  acknowledge  Christ  aright  in  our  heart,  we  shall  also 
freely  confess  him  with  our  mouth,  Rom.  x.  10. — The  divine  and  human 
natures  combined  in  the  person  of  Christ. — Blessedness  of  faith. — To 
know  Christ  is  to  be  saved,  John  xvii.  3. — Quesnel:  True  blessedness: 
1.  It  consists  not  in  the  advantages  of  birth,  nor  in  natural  gifts,  nor  in 
riches,  nor  in  reputation  and  dignity ; but,  2.  in  the  possession  of  the 
gifts  of  grace  through  Christ. — Hedinger:  All  true  faith  is  the  gift  of  God. 
— Osiander:  If  the  truth  of  God  is  mixed  up  with  human  fancies,  it  does 


Whedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will. 


679 


1864.] 

more  harm  than  good. — Let  no  one  hastily  talk  of  the  good  which  he  has 
received,  hut  let  him  first  make  experiment  of  its  reality,  Eccles.  v.  1. 

Gerlach: — The  Christian  Church  possesses  this  power  of  the  keys,  not 
in  its  outward  capacity  or  organization,  hut  in  so  far  as  the  Spirit  rules 
in  it.  Hence,  whenever  it  is  exercised  as  a merely  outward  law,  without 
the  Spirit,  the  Lord  in  His  providence  disowns  these  false  pretensions  of 
the  visible  Church. 

Heubner: — In  order  to  be  decided,  and  to  become  our  own  faith,  we 
must  publicly  profess  it. — How  little  value  attaches  to  the  opinions  of  the 
age  on  great  men  !*■ — The  independence  of  Christians  of  prevalent  opin- 
ions.— Peter’s  confession  not  his  faith  only,  but  that  of  all  disciples,  John 
vi.  68. — Peter’s  confession  the  collective  confession  of  the  Apostles. — See 
what  value  Christ  sets  on  this  faith. — It  is  impossible  for  any  man,  even 
though  he  were  an  apostle,  to  impart  faith  to  another.  This  is  God’s 
prerogative. 

* [Not,  How  much  great  men  are  influenced  by  the  opinions  of  the  age,  as  the 
Edb.  trsl.,  misled  by  the  German  wie  viel  (which  must  be  understood  ironically), 
reverses  the  meaning  of  the  original,  thus  making  Heubner  contradict  himself 
in  the  next  sentence.  Heubner  alludes  to  the  confused  and  contradictory 
opinions  of  the  Jews  concerning  Christ,  ver.  15,  and  then  contrasts  with  them 
the  firm  conviction  of  faith  in  Peter,  ver.  16.  Great  men,  during  their  life- 
time, meet  with  the  very  opposite  judgments  at  the  bar  of  ever-changing  popu- 
lar opinion,  and  they  are  not  truly  great  unless  they  can  rise  above  it  and  qui- 
etly pursue  the  path  of  duty,  leaving  the  small  matter  of  their  own  fame  in  the 
hands  of  a just  God  and  of  an  appreciating  posterity  which  will  judge  them  by 
the  fruits  of  their  labour. — P.  S.j 


Art.  V. — The  Freedom  of  the  Will  as  a Basis  of  Human 
Responsibility  and  Government ; elucidated  and  maintained 
in  its  issue  with  the  Necessitarian  Theories  of  Hobbes, 
Edwards,  the  Princeton  Essayists,  and  other  leading  advo- 
cates. By  D.  D.  Whedon,  D.  D.  New  York:  Carlton  & 
Porter.  1864. 

Freedom  of  Mind  in  Willing;  or,  Every  Being  that  Wills,  a 
Creative  First  Cause.  By  Rowland  G.  Hazard.  New 
York:  D.  Appleton  & Co.  1864. 

These  works  agree  in  being  occupied  with  some  preliminary 
discussions  in  regard  to  the  nature  of  the  Will,  Liberty,  and 
Necessity,  and  then  in  being  devoted  mainly  and  avowedly  to 
the  refutation  of  Edwards’s  famous  treatise  on  this  subject. 
However  successful  or  unsuccessful  these  attempts,  they  are 


680  Whedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will.  [October 

certainly  renewed  testimonies  of  the  highest  order  to  the  mighty 
power  and  adamantine  logic  of  that  great  work.  Volumes 
upon  volumes  have  been  published  against  it  by  the  acutest  of 
its  adversaries;  yet  they  appear  not  to  have  demolished  it  so 
thoroughly  but  that  the  representative  advocates  of  the  con- 
trary scheme  regard  themselves  as  called  upon  to  do  the 
work  over  again,  in  order  that  it  may  be  done  effectually; 
that  the  book,  in  short,  may  be  so  put  down  as  to  stay  down. 
Within  not  far  from  a quarter  of  a century,  besides  numerous 
elaborate  criticisms  in  the  Quarterlies,  through  which  so  many 
of  our  ablest  thinkers  address  the  public,  we  call  to  mind  no 
less  than  five  solid  volumes,  wholly  or  chiefly  in  review  of 
Edwards  on  the  Will,  and  all,  with  one  exception,  adverse. 
Surely  there  must  be  some  strength  in  a fortress  which,  having 
survived  all  other  assaults  from  the  Old  world  and  the  New, 
for  nearly  a century,  followed  by  the  fierce  bombardment  of 
Tappan  and  Bledsoe  here,  still  abides  to  challenge  the  cautious 
sapping  and  mining  of  Hazard,  along  with  the  furious  and 
desperate  storming  of  Whedon. 

In  truth,  these  very  assailants  contribute  to  its  tenacity  of 
life,  not  merely  by  promoting  its  continued  notoriety  and  fame, 
and  bearing  witness  that  it  still  exerts  an  influence  and  convic- 
tive  force  which  require  to  be  neutralized,  but  by  furnishing 
evidence,  more  and  more  cumulative,  of  the  futility  of  all 
replies  to  its  fundamental  positions  and  crucial  arguments. 
This  is  none  the  less,  but  all  the  more  so,  notwithstanding  any 
flaws  which  may  be  detected  in  some  of  the  many  lines  of 
argument  of  which  Edwards’s  inventive  logical  mind  was  so 
prolific,  and  the  still  greater  infelicities  of  language  which 
occasionally  obscure  or  enfeeble  his  sharpest  distinctions  and 
reasonings  with  seeming  ambiguity,  or  even  contradiction. 
For,  in  spite  of  all  this,  the  main  pillars  of  his  argument  stand 
unmoved  and  impregnable.  The  blemishes  to  which  we  have 
referred,  developed  by  a century  of  incessant  and  relentless 
criticism,  no  more  impair  their  massive  and  unyielding  solidity, 
than  the  seams,  and  clefts,  and  fissures  of  the  rock  impair  the 
firmness  and  perpetuity  of  the  everlasting  mountains.  And 
they  are  shown  to  be  all  the  more  moveless  and  impregnable 
by  the  manifest  impotence  and  absurdity  of  the  attacks  of  the 


1864.]  Whedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will.  681 

mightiest  assailants.  Let  candid  and  thinking  men,  for  exam- 
ple, study  the  answers  which  these  volumes  offer  to  Edwards’s 
argument  for  the  anterior  certainty  of  volitions,  from  the  divine 
foreknowledge  and  providence;  from  the  case  of  God,  angels, 
and  glorified  saints  in  heaven,  and  the  irreclaimably  obdurate 
in  hell;  and  can  he  help  feeling  the' weakness  of  the  cause 
which  is  driven  to  such  staggering  efforts  for  its  defence,  or  the 
strength  of  that  fortress  against  which  no  stronger  assault  can 
be  made?  We  think  the  real  effect  of  such  works,  notwith- 
standing all  their  elaborate,  boastful,  and  defiant  plausibilities, 
is  at  length  to  work  a conviction  in  honest  minds — nay,  in  the 
minds  of  their  warmest  admirers — that  there  is  something  not 
easily  overthrown  in  this  great  treatise  of  Edwards,  and  other 
cognate  works  of  the  great  divines  of  the  church,  after  all. 

We  have  adverted  to  the  unfortunate  effect  of  certain  ambi- 
guities and  infelicities  in  Edwards’s  terminology.  It  will  facili- 
tate our  work  if  we  point  out  some  of  the  more  conspicuous 
and  perplexing  of  them.  It  is  proper  to  observe,  however, 
that,  for  various  reasons,  the  terms  relating  to  this  subject  have 
an  inherent  ambiguity,  against  which  few,  if  any  writers,  can 
fully  guard  by  qualifying  adjuncts ; and  further,  that  it  is  not 
strange  that  a century  of  the  ablest  friendly  and  adverse 
criticism  should  have  detected  imperfections  of  this  sort,  which 
the  author,  with  all  his  marvellous  keenness,  overlooked.  The 
most  important  instances  of  this  sort  which  now  occur  to  us, 
although  not  confined  to  him,  were, 

1.  The  ambiguous  use  of  the  word  will.  In  his  formal  defi- 
nition of  it,  Edwards  makes  it  include,  after  the  manner  of  the 
schoolmen  and  older  writers,  all  the  active  or  non-cognitive 
powers  of  the  soul,  comprehending  not  only  the  power  of  voli- 
tion, but  of  sensibility,  desire,  and  affection.  But  his  argument 
impliedly  or  expressly  takes  will  in  the  narrower  sense  in  which 
modern  writers  usually  take  it,  as  the  mere  power  of  volition, 
or  of  carrying  out,  in  choice  and  purpose,  the  prevailing  desires 
and  dispositions  of  the  soul.  With  this  latter  sense  of  the 
word,  his  argument  is  clear,  cogent,  and  unanswerable;  with  the 
former,  it  runs  into  confusion,  and  is  open  to  abundant  criticism. 

2.  The  word  motive  is  subject  to  similar  embarrassment. 
Sometimes  it  denotes  the  inward  desires  which  determine  the 

86 


VOL.  XXXVI. — NO.  IV. 


682  WJiedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will.  [October 

volition,  sometimes  the  object  of  choice,  sometimes  both — 
“whatever  excites  the  mind  to  choice.”  The  doctrine  that  the 
will  is  as  the  strongest  motive,  is  true,  if  by  motive  be  meant 
those  inward  states  and  activities  of  the  mind  which  determine 
its  choices.  It  is  not  true,  if  by  motive  be  meant  anything 
exterior  to  the  mind,  as  some  of  the  circuitous  phraseology  of 
Edwards  and  others,  at  times,  suggests. ; To  this  circumstance 
many  of  the  most  plausible  criticisms  upon  his  work  owe  their 
power. 

3.  Another  word  is  necessity.  Edwards,  in  common  with 
many  others,  adopts,  or  permits  himself  to  use,  this  word,  to 
denote  the  certainty  of  the  connection  between  the  choice  or 
volition  and  the  antecedent  desire  or  inclination  which  prompts 
and  determines  it.  This  use  of  the  word  necessity,  although 
often  adopted  by  both  parties  in  this  controversy,  so  that  the 
advocates  of  contingency  or  contrary  choice  insist  in  calling 
their  opponents  Necessitarians,  and  are  allowed  to  do  so  with- 
out sufficient  protest  against  it,  is  nevertheless  improper  and 
injurious.  Define  and  explain  as  we  will,  words  ever  tend 
towards  their  natural  and  normal  import  in  the  minds  of  read- 
ers, and  even  of  the  writers  themselves,  who  so  explain  and 
define  them  in  a “non-natural  sense.”  While  it  is  true,  and 
shown  by  the  irrefragable  demonstration  of  Edwards,  that  there 
is  the  aforementioned  certainty  of  volitions,  and  that  it  is  con- 
sistent with  their  freedom,  the  word  necessity  constantly  sug- 
gests the  idea  of  an  outward  constraint  or  mechanical  force 
incompatible  with  liberty.  This  word  ought,  therefore,  to  be 
banished  from  these  discussions,  and  certainty  should  be  substi- 
tuted in  its  place,  being  the  essential  point  in  issue. 

4.  Another  equivocal  word  in  this  controversy  is  good.  The 
doctrine  of  Edwards  and  other  writers  is,  that  “ the  will  is  as 
the  greatest  apparent  good.”  Some  restrict  the  .word  to  denote 
happiness,  or  the  means  of  happiness,  in  which  case  the  maxim 
is  not  true.  Eor  men  undeniably  choose  the  right,  and  other 
objects,  as  well  as  happiness.  But  if  good  be  used  for  what 
seems  at  the  moment  of  choice  most  desirable,  the  maxim  is 
true,  a^d  is  abundantly  demonstrated  to  be  true,  by  Edwards, 
as  well  as  by  the  most  intimate  consciousness  of  every  free- 
agent. 


Whedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will . 


683 


1864.] 


5.  Another  term  -which,  as  used  by  Edwards  and  others, 
frequently  causes  misapprehension,  is  self-determination.  What 
Edwards  demonstrates  is,  that  the  will  does  not  determine  itself 
irrespective  of  the  intellect,  feelings,  and  desires.  This  is  true. 
But  it  is  equally  true,  that  the  will  is  not  determined  by  forces 
ah  extra.  It  is  determined,  or  determines  itself  in  its  free  act- 
ings, according  to  the  desires  of  the  mind.  And  since  one 
view  of  the  will  given  by  Edwards  is,  that  it  is  no  separate 
agent,  but  only  a faculty  or  activity  of  the  mind,  the  “ mind 
willing,”  it  may  he  truly  said  that  the  will  so  defined,  i.  e .,  the 
“ mind  willing”  determines  itself  according  to  its  own  inclina- 
tions. In  his  crushing  assaults  upon  the  self-determination  of 
the  will  independently  of  the  antecedent  state  of  the  soul,  he 
has  not  always  sufficiently  guarded  against  the  interpretation 
of  those,  who  charge  him  with  wholly  denying  all  self-determi- 
nation of  the  soul,  even  according  to  its  own  pleasure,  in  volition. 

These  explanations  and  qualifications  at  once  eliminate  the 
most  vulnerable  parts  of  Edwards’s  work,  and  dispose  of  a large 
portion  of  the  plausible  reasonings  against  it,  found  in  the  pre- 
sent, and  other  attacks  upon  it.  This  remark  applies  particu- 
larly to  Mr.  Hazard’s  work,  on  which  we  will  offer  a few  brief 
remarks,  before  touching  Dr.  Whedon’s  volume,  which  will 
occupy  our  chief  attention. 

Of  Mr.  Hazard’s  antecedents  we  know  nothing.  All  our 
knowledge  of  him  is  through  this  carefully  wrought  volume, 
which  shows  him  to  be  an  earnest  and  candid  thinker,  not 
wanting  in  metaphysical  acumen  and  speculative  insight.  He 
makes  an  occasional  side  utterance  that  ought  not  to  be  over- 
looked. He  evidently  has  a tender  side  towards  idealism  and 
monism.  Although  “ admitting  for  the  purposes  of  argument 
the  existence  of  matter  as  distinct  from  spirit,”  he  says  that 
“all  the  sensations  which  we  attribute  to  matter  are  as  fully 
accounted  for  by  the  hypothesis  that  they  are  the  thought,  the 
imagery  of  God,  directly  imparted,  or  made  palpable  to  our 
finite  minds,  as  by  the  hypothesis  of  a direct  external  substance 
in  which  he  has  moulded  this  thought  and  imagery.”  Pp.  5 — 8. 
“We  do  not  even  know  that  the  movement  of  our  own  hand  as 
a Sequent  of  our  volition  is  not  a uniform  mode  of  God’s  action, 
and  not  by  our  own  direct  agency.”  P.  365.  Such  declarations 


684 


Whedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will.  [October 

show  that  the  author  is  not  wholly  free  from  an  idealistic  and 
even  pantheistic  drift. 

Again,  he  gives  a strange  definition  of  knowledge,  in  the  fol- 
lowing terms:  “ Of  knowledge,  obviously  an  important  element 
in  all  intelligent  cause,  I will  further  remark,  that  I deem  the 
term,  in  strict  propriety,  applicable  only  to  those  ideas,  or  per- 
ceptions of  the  mind,  of  which  we  entertain  no  doubt,  and  that 
it  is  applicable  to  such,  even  though  they  are  not  conformable 
to  truth;  for  if  we  cannot  say  we  know  that  of  which  we  have 
no  doubt,  there  is  nothing  to  which  we  can  apply  the  term  and 
it  is  useless.”  P.  18.  Again,  “the  knowledge  of  each  individual 
as  to  what  is  morally  right  for  him  is  infallible.”  P.  159. 

We  think  that  two  great  errors  lurk,  if  they  are  not  per- 
fectly obvious,  in  these  extracts.  The  one  is,  that  men  may 
know  what  is  untrue.  This  subverts  the  nature  and  essence  of 
knowledge,  which  consists  in  the  cognition  of  what  is,  and  not 
of  unrealities.  What  has  no  existence  is  not  knowable  as 
existent.  What  is  not  a possible  object  of  knowledge  cannot 
be  known.  It  may  be  a matter  of  belief,  it  may  be  a delusion, 
but  it  cannot  be  known.  The  view  in  question  really  oblite- 
rates the  distinction  between  truth  and  error.  Belief  of  the 
one  is  just  as  certainly  knowledge  as  the  other;  but  error  is,  in 
fact,  only  a form  of  ignorance.  And  surely  ignorance  and 
knowledge  are  not  identical.  Such  a system,  by  depriving 
knowledge  of  the  element  of  certainty,  placing  it  on  the  same 
footing  as  error,  really  destroys  all  foundations,  except  those 
of  scepticism,  and  these  it  lays  firmly  and  immovably. 

This  is  all  the  more  conspicuous,  as  we  see  the  author  carry- 
ing out  this  principle  into  the  sphere  of  ethics,  theoretical  and 
applied.  He  says,  “ the  knowledge  of  each  individual  as  to 
what  he  thinks  right,  is  for  him  infallible."  This  we  under- 
stand to  erect  each  man’s  conscience  or  moral  judgment  into 
an  infallible  rule  or  standard  of  righteousness,  no  matter 
how  perverted  or  defiled  that  conscience  may  be.  This  is 
among  the  most  mischievous  and  superficial  popular  fallacies. 
No  errors  of  moral  judgment  are  excusable,  or  can  excuse 
crimes  committed  in  conformity  to  them.  A woe  is  upon  them 
who  call  good  evil,  and  evil  good;  who  put  light  for  darkness, 
and  darkness  for  light.  Does  the  fact  that  Paul  “verily 


1864.] 


Whedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will. 


685 


thought  he  ought  to  do  many  things  contrary  to  the  name  of 
Jesus  of  Nazareth” — that  many  think  they  “do  God  service” 
in  persecuting  his  people — justify  these  crimes,  or  are  such 
moral  judgments  “infallible”  or  excusable?  Such  a view  ob- 
literates all  moral  distinctions,  all  immutable  righteousness, 
together  with  the  supreme  authority  of  God  and  his  word.  It 
is  doubtless  true  that  a man  sins  if  he  disobeys  his  conscience; 
but  it  is  also  true  that  he  sins  in  doing  what  is  wrong,  even 
though  it  be  enjoined  or  approved  by  conscience.  A man 
whose  conscience  is  misguided,  is  in  a fearful  dilemma.  If  he 
obeys  his  conscience,  he  sins,  for  he  does  what  is  wrong  in 
itself;  and  a bad  conscience  can  never  make  wrong  right.  His 
intention  is  good,  but  his  act  is  evil.  On  the  other  hand,  if 
he  violate  his  conscience,  he  does  what  he  believes  wrong. 
His  intention  is  therefore  evil,  though  his  act,  aside  of  such 
intention,  be  good.  An  act,  to  be  good  in  every  aspect  of  it, 
must  be  good  as  to  matter  and  form — good  in  itself,  and  good 
in  the  intent  of  the  doer;  and  no  delusion  or  blindness  of  con- 
science can  make  good  evil,  or  evil  good.  The  true  solution  of 
the  difficulty  is,  that  it  is  every  man’s  duty  to  enlighten  his 
conscience,  as  he  may,  by  the  candid  and  earnest  use  of  the 
means  within  his  reach;  to  know  the  right,  and  to  do  it. 
This  he  may  do  if  he  will.  For,  “if  any  man  will  do  his  will, 
he  shall  know  of  the  doctrine  whether  it  be  of  God.” 

With  regard  to  Mr.  Hazard’s  arguments  about  the  will,  and 
Edwards’s  Inquiry  concerning  it,  we  think  they  are  almost 
entirely  obviated,  or  shown  to  be  irrelevant,  by  the  explana- 
tions we  have  attempted,  and  a due  estimate  of  the  ambiguities 
and  infelicities  of  language  we  have  endeavoured  to  point  out. 
The  point  in  issue  is,  whether  the  will  acts  contingently,  for- 
tuitously, and  independently  of  the  antecedent  states  and 
activities — the  views,  preferences,  and  inclinations  of  the  soul — 
or  under  their  influence;  whether  the  mind  determines  its 
volitions  in  accordance  with  them,  or  uninfluenced  by  them ; 
and  whether  antecedent  certainty  of  volitions,  thus  arising 
from  the  previous  bias  of  the  mind,  consists  with  their  freedom 
and  responsibility?  To  this  latter  question,  Edwards,  Calvin, 
Augustine,  and  their  followers  say,  yes.  Their  adversaries  say, 


686 


Whedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will.  [October 

no.  This  is  the  simple  issue,  however  it  may  have  been  some- 
times obscured  or  misstated. 

Now,  on  this  issue,  Mr.  Hazard,  notwithstanding  so  many  of 
his  excerpts  from  Edwards,  which  he  dexterously  manipulates 
into  targets  easy  to  hit  and  shatter,  really  supports  the  former 
side — the  side  of  those  he  evidently  deems  his  adversaries, 
whatever  counter  doctrines  and  implications  he  may  casually 
put  forth.  And  this  is  true,  not  in  the  same  sense  as  it  is 
true  of  Dr.  Whedon  and  other  controvertists  of  that  side,  that 
they  occasionally  acknowledge  the  truth  they  assail,  either 
inadvertently  or  by  constraint.  It  is  the  main  doctrine  of  his 
book.  Its  counter  utterances  are  the  exceptional  ones.  Mr. 
Hazard,  however,  appears  to  suppose  that  this  doctrine,  that 
the  mind  controls  its  own  volitions  according  to  its  previous 
judgment  and  preference,  (or  as  he,  by  an  extraordinary  mis- 
nomer, calls  this  antecedent  of  volition,  choice , which  is  no 
other  than  volition  itself,)  establishes  contrary  choice  in  the 
sense  denied  by  the  Edwardean  or  Augustinian  school.  In 
our  view,  on  the  other  hand,  it  utterly  overthrows  this  dogma. 
But  first,  of  the  proof  that  he  maintains  as  we  allege,  and  then 
for  its  consequences. 

First,  he  asserts  not  that  the  “will,  but  that  the  mind,  the 
active  being,  determines  its  own  volition,  and  that  it  does  this 
by  means  of  its  knowledge;  and  further,  that  the  choice  which 
it  is  admitted  in  most,  if  not  in  all  cases,  precedes  the  effort,  or 
act  of  will,  is  not,  as  Edwards  asserts,  itself  an  act  of  will,  but 
is  the  knowledge  of  the  mind  that  one  thing  is  superior  to 
another,  or  suits  us  better  than  other  things ; this  knowledge 
being  always  a simple  mental  perception,  to  which  previous 
effort  may  or  may  not  have  been  requisite;  and  that  every  act 
of  the  will  is  a beginning  of  a new  action,  independent  of  all 
previous  actions — which,  of  themselves , nowise  affect  or  influ- 
ence the  new  action,  though  the  knowledge  acquired  in  or  by 
such  previous  actions,  being  used  by  the  mind  to  direct  this 
new  action,  may  be  to  it  the  reason  of  its  acting,  or  of  the 
manner  of  its  acting;  and  that  in  the  use  of  such  knowledge  to 
direct  or  adapt  its  action  to  the  occasion,  or  to  its  want,”  &c. 
Pp.  233-4. 

Here,  it  will  be  observed,  that  the  mind  determines  its  own 


Whedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will. 


687 


1864.] 


volition  “by  means  of  its  knowledge,”  which  knowledge  is 
“ choice:”  a perception  that  “one  thing  is  superior  to  another, 
or  suits  us  better  than  other  things;”  that  the  use  of  such  know- 
ledge is  to  “ direct”  volition,  and  “ adapt  it  to  its  wants.” 
How  could  it  be  more  clearly  stated  that  volition  is  directed, 
made  certain  by  the  antecedent  apprehensions,  preferences,  or 
in  his  queer  phrase,  “choice”  of  the  mind?  And  is  this  any 
the  less  so,  though  it  is  said  in  the  same  breath,  that  “ every 
act  of  the  will”  is  the  “beginning  of  a new  action  indepen- 
dent of  all  previous  actions?” 

Mr.  Hazard  speaks  of  “adapting”  the  volition  to  the  “waat” 
of  the  soul.  “Want”  figures  largely,  but  none  too  largely,  in 
his  system.  He  says,  “Intelligence  in  acting,  then,  must  have 
an  object.  The  object  of  its  action  must  be  an  effect  which  it 
wants  to  produce.  The  mind  acting  intelligently,  will  not 
make  an  effort  or  will  to  produce  an  effect  which  it  does  not 
want  to  produce.  Every  volition,  then,  must  arise  from  the 
feeling  or  perception  of  some  want  bodily  or  mental;  otherwise 
there  is  no  object  of  action.”  P.  53.  “Its  want  furnishing  an 
object  of  action,  and  its  knowledge  enabling  it  to  determine 
what  action,  are  all  that  distinguish  the  mind  from  unintelligent 
cause  or  force.  . . . The  want  does  not,  generally,  arise  from 
a volition.  We  may  want,  we  do  want,  without  effort  to  want. 
The  mind  could  not  begin  its  action  by  willing  a want,  unless 
there  were  first  a want  of  that  want.”  Pp.  56,  57. 

How  could  language  more  explicitly  enunciate  the  doctrine 
that  the  acts  of  the  will  are  guided  by  our  desires  or  wants, 
and  the  dictates  of  intelligence,  as  to  the  best  means  of  gratify- 
ing them?  Nay,  it  is  plainly  and  rightly  taught  that  volitions 
without  such  stimulus  and  guidance  are  impossible.  Indeed, 
one  of  the  author’s  definitions  of  will  is,  “ the  mode  in  which 
intelligence  exerts  its  power.”  P.  249.  “The  mind  directs  its 
act  of  will  by  means  of  its  knowledge,  in  which  act  being  thus 
self-directed,  it  acts  freely.”  Pp.  402,  403.  It  would  be  diffi- 
cult, in  briefer  terms,  to  state  the  truth,  that  freedom  in  voli- 
tion supposes  it  directed  and  made  certain  by  the  antecedent 
apprehensions  and  desires  of  the  mind.  This  involves  the  whole 
for  which  the  class  whom  they  style  Necessitarians  contend. 
All  Mr.  Hazard’s  reasonings  in  regard  to  the  formulas  of 


688 


Whedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will . [October 

Edwards,  that  “the  will  is  as  the  greatest  apparent  good,”  as 
the  “last  dictate  of  the  understanding,”  as  the  inclination, 
preference,  desire,  &c.,  end  in  proving  that  the  acts  of  will  are 
determined  by  the  mind  through  its  wants  and  intelligence,  and 
not  by  forces  ab  extra.  This  is  well  enough  in  its  place,  but, 
with  regard  to  the  question  at  issue,  it  is  ignoratio  elenchi.  The 
thing  to  be  proved  is,  not  that  the  mind  determines  its  volitions; 
but  that  it  does  not  determine  them  in  virtue  of,  and  in  accord- 
ance with,  its  antecedent  states.  Just  the  opposite  of  this  is  what 
Mr.  Hazard  proves,  and  his  whole  analysis  of  the  will  requires 
— although  he  appears  at  times  to  think,  that  proving  the  mind’s 
direction  of  its  own  volitions  proves  the  power  of  contrary 
choice,  in  opposition  to  that  to  which  the  will  is  freely  guided 
by  the  intelligence  and  wants  of  the  soul.  Yet  he  says,  “if 
there  be  of  necessity  a connection  between  this  decision  and 
effort,  this  only  proves  that  the  mind  is  of  necessity  free  in  such 
effort;  and  to  assert  the  contrary,  is  again  like  saying  that 
freedom  is  not  free  because  it  is  of  necessity  free.”  P.  382. 
Thus  it  appears  that  even  necessity  may  connect  the  act  of  will 
with  the  previous  judgment  or  “decision”  of  the  mind,  without 
impairing  its  freedom. 

But  this  is  still  more  clearly  and  decisively  brought  out  by 
the  author  in  reference  to  the  divine  actions  and  volitions.  “I 
have  already  alluded  to  the  fact,  that  this  uniformity  of  the  action 
of  Supreme  Intelligence,  as  observed  in  many  cases,  may  arise 
in  part  from  the  perfect  wisdom  by  which  it  determines  its  acts 
without  the  necessity  of  experiment.  The  same  remark  applies 
in  some  degree  to  the  action  of  finite  will,  which,  with  finite 
wisdom,  knowing  or  ascertaining  by  experience  or  otherwise 
the  best  modes  in  certain  cases,  will  adopt  them  whenever  such 
cases  arise;  and  this  gives  some  appearance  of  reason  for  the 
application  of  the  law  of  uniformity  and  necessity  in  cause  and 
effect  to  the  mind.”  P.  378.  This  is  a sufficiently  emphatic  tes- 
timony, that  the  certain  and  uniform  direction  of  volitions,  in 
accordance  with  an  antecedent  state  of  mind,  no  way  militates 
against  their  freedom  and  moral  quality. 

Yet,  notwithstanding  these  declarations  of  the  formal  doc- 
trine of  the  book,  the  author  is  so  possessed  with  the  doctrine 
of  contrary  or  contingent  volition,  and  with  the  conviction  that 


1864.] 


Whedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will. 


689 


he  has  unanswerably  proved  it,  that  he  gives  up  the  doctrine  of 
God’s  foreknowledge,  which  he  has  the  candour  (unusual  with 
this  class  of  writers,)  to  concede  and  evince  is  undermined  by 
such  a theory  of  the  will.  To  this  we  shall  again  recur. 
Meanwhile  we  pass  to  the  work  of  Dr.  Whedon,  who  is  now, 
we  believe,  acknowledged  primus  inter  pares  among  the  ex- 
pounders and  champions  of  Methodism  in  our  country. 

His  book  contains  one  of  the  most  ardent  and  searching  dis- 
cussions of  the  subject  that  have  yet  appeared.  Bold,  adven- 
turous, inventive,  eager,  he  threads  every  argument  of  his 
adversaries,  presses  on  with  burning  zeal,  and  stops  not  till  he 
appears  to  himself  to  have  demolished  all  opposing  theories, 
and  completely  worsted  their  supporters.  Dr.  Whedon  is  in 
his  way  a strong  man.  He  betrays  a force  of  intellect,  an 
earnestness  of  conviction,  and  energy  of  will,  which  eminently 
fit  him  to  lead  other  minds,  and  quite  explain  his  polemical 
primacy  in  his  communion.  Amid  much  that  is  crude,  he  is 
never  tame,  feeble,  or  timid.  He  moves  with  a great  momen- 
tum, which,  indeed,  is  all  the  more  crushing  to  himself  when, 
with  equal  blindness  and  boldness,  he  dashes  against  the  ever- 
lasting rock.  He  deals  sledge-hammer  blows,  and,  alas!  too 
often  with  a fatal  recoil  upon  himself.  He  is  so  radical  and 
destructive  in  his  principles,  that  he  is  altogether  suicidal. 

Before  presenting  to  our  readers  the  proofs  and  illustrations 
of  these  characteristics,  as  shown  in  his  arguments,  we  feel 
called  upon  to  notice  some  exhibitions  of  them  in  his  language. 
We  do  not  remember  any  respectable  book,  for  a long  time,  so 
deformed  with  barbarisms  of  obsolete  and  new-coined  words, 
whose  inherent  ugliness  is  not  palliated  by  any  valid  plea  of 
necessity.  We  have  no  taste  for  word-criticism,  much  less 
would  we  make  a man  an  offender  for  a word,  however  illegiti- 
mate, if  it  be  a solitary  or  nearly  solitary  instance.  We  accord 
the  fullest  liberty  of  introducing  new  terms,  whether  derivatives 
of  our  own,  or  importations  from  a foreign  tongue,  to  more  fully 
articulate  new  phases  of  thought,  of  which  a correspondent 
growth  of  language  is  the  mysterious  but  normal  exponent. 
But  on  none  of  these  grounds  can  we  sanction  the  introduc- 
tion of  such  terrific  vocables  as  volitivity , impressibilities , free- 
wilier,  uni8ub8tanceism,  impellency , non- differentiation,  begin- 
vol.  xxxvi. — no.  iv.  87 


690 


Whedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will.  [October 


ningless , volitionate,  freedomism,  freedomistic,  mustness , excep- 
tionlessly,  necessitarianly,  uniformitarian,  alter  nativity,  un- 
compulsorily,  adamantinized,  unimpededly , and  much  more  the 
like. 

The  radical  principle  of  this  book  is,  that  freedom  of  the  will 
is  the  power  to  choose  either  way,  in  such  a sense  as  to  pre- 
clude any  previous  “fixing”  of  the  choice,  or  securing  or 
making  it  certain  that  it  shall  be  in  one  direction  rather  than 
the  other.  The  author  denounces  all  antecedent  “fixation”  of 
choice,  so  as  to  render  it  certain  to  the  exclusion  of  the  con- 
trary, as  incompatible  with  liberty,  and  involving  a necessity 
subversive  of  freedom  and  responsibility.  Edwards’s  definition 
of  liberty,  as  the  power  of  doing  as  we  please,  he  utterly  scouts 
and  derides.  P.  28. 

“A  man  may  do  as  he  pleases  and  yet  not  be  free,  both 
because  his  antecedent  please  is  necessitated,  and  because  he  is 
limited  and  circumscribed  to  the  course  with  which  he  is 
pleased.  Power  both  pro  and  contra,  power  to  the  thing  and 
from  the  thing  is  requisite  for  the  liberty  of  a free  agent. 
Power,  then,  to  the  volition  and  from  the  volition,  and  to  a 
reverse  volition  must  exist,  or  the  agent  is  not  free  in  the 
volition.  It  is  an  error  to  call  an  agent  volitionally  free, 
unless  he  has  power  for  either  one  of  two  or  more  volitions.” 
Pp.  34-5.  If  we  “put  forth  a volition  which  is  under  neces- 
sitation  to  be  what  it  is  from  previous  volition,  responsible  free- 
dom ceases.  . . . The  same  necessitative  result  follows  if  we 
suppose  the  volition  is  as  some  fixed  antecedent,  whether  such 
antecedent  be  a ‘choice,’  an  ‘inclination,’  a ‘wish,’  or  a 
‘please.’  For  if  each  and  every  antecedent  in  the  series, 
however  long  the  series  be,  is  fixed  by  its  predecessor  and 
fixes  its  successor,  the  whole  train  is  necessitated,  and  the 
putting  forth  of  the  last  volition,  the  one  in  question  is  ante- 
riorly fixed.  And  a volition  whose  putting  forth  is  anteriorly 
fixed  to  a unitary  result  is  not  free.”  P.  30. 

There  can  be  no  mistake  as  to  the  meaning  of  all  this.  If 
the  volition  be  previously  fixed  and  made  certain,  and  the  non- 
existence of  the  contrary  insured  by  any  antecedent  whatever, 
be  it  outward  or  inward,  even  by  the  will,  choice,  inclination, 
■wish,  pleasure  of  the  soul,  this  destroys  its  freedom  and  ac- 


1864.]  Whedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will.  691 

countability.  And  that  there  may  be  no  possible  chance  for 
misconstruction  here,  he  puts  it  in  a great  variety  of  forms. 
He  tells  us : — “ The  fact  that  the  will  is  drawn  or  secretly 
attracted,  so  that  the  volition  goes  forth  eagerly  and  of  itself, 
as  the  soul  does  of  itself  by  its  own  spontaneous  power  go 
after  happiness,  renders  the  necessity  none  the  less  absolute. 
Around  the  faculties  of  the  soul  a circumvallating  line  of  causa- 
tion is  still  thereby  none  the  less  drawn  because  it  is  delicately 
drawn  and  finely  shaded.  The  resisting  power  at  the  spring  of 
the  will  may  be  as  completely  annihilated  by  a seduction  or 
fascination  as  by  a rude  impulsion.  Causation  securing  effect, 
which  Edwards  maintains  must  rule  at  every  infinitesimal  point 
to  secure  us  from  atheism,  as  truly  secures  this  so-called  free 
forthgoing  of  the  soul  as  the  steam-power  secures  the  move- 
ment of  the  car.  No  fine  word-painting  will  change  this 
necessity  to  freedom.”  Pp.  30-1. 

No  language  could  more  plainly  declare,  that  whatever  secures 
a given  volition,  to  the  exclusion  of  the  contrary,  destroys  its 
freedom.  The  choice  being  as  certainly  secured  as  the  move- 
ment of  a car  by  a locomotive,  is  no  more  free  than  the  move- 
ment of  that  car.  Any  “seduction”  or  “fascination”  which 
obtains  such  mastery  as  to  render  certain  the  free  choices  of 
the  will,  destroys  their  freedom  and  their  merit  or  demerit. 
Even  the  grace  of  God,  with  irresistible  sweetness  drawing  us, 
that  we  should  run  after  God,  according  to  this,  destroys  our 
freedom.  Hence  the  phrase,  “ To  secure  the  certainty  of  a 
free  act,  is  absurd,  because  contradictory.”  P.  227.  “Is  a 
previously  decreed  volition  any  more  responsible  than  a pre- 
viously decreed  intellection  or  muscular  spasmodic  action?  . . . . 
God  may  as  well  secure  my  damnation  without  anything  volun- 
tary, as  secure  it  by  securing  the  voluntary.  Securing  my 
volition  in  order  that  he  may  secure  my  voluntary  sin  and  con- 
sequent condemnation,  is  about  the  poorest  piece  of  sneaking 
despotism  that  one  could  attribute  to  an  omnipotent  evil.” 
P.  210. 

If  all  this,  and  a vast  deal  more  of  the  same  sort  in  this  book 
be  so,  then  there  is  no  security  for  the  continued  fealty  of  a 
single  saint  on  earth  or  in  heaven  for  another  hour.  And  not 
only  so,  there  is  no  certainty  that  God,  or  angels,  or  glorified 

f 


692 


Whedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will.  [October 

men,  will  not  swerve  from  purity,  “make  a hell  of  heaven,” 
and  devastate  the  moral  universe ! 

Indeed,  the  author  puts  the  premise  for  this  dread  conclusion 
in  such  strong  and  explicit  terms,  as  amount  almost  to  the 
direct  assertion  of  it,  in  the  following,  as  wrnll  as  other  passages. 

“Freedom  is  as  much  contradicted  by  a law  of  Invariability, 
that  is,  a law  by  which  all  will  does  obey  the  strongest  motive, 
even  though  able  to  do  otherwise,  as  by  a law  of  Causation.  If 
the  invariability  be  formulated  as  an  anterior  fact,  strictly 
absolute  and  universal,  pervading  all  actual  and  possible  cases, 
then,  by  the  law  of  Contradiction,  the  counter  exception  becomes 
impossible.  Thus  it  is  claimed  by  some  thinkers  that  though  the 
Will  possesses  power  for  choice  against  the  strongest  motives,  yet 
that  choice  ivill  never  be  used.  If  that  never  is  an  invariability, 
as  truly  in  itself  universal  as  the  law  of  causation,  the  usance 
of  the  power  of  counter  choice  is  impossible.  It  is  incompati- 
ble with  an  absolute  universal  contradictory  fact,  and  cannot 
take  place, — and  that  the  reverse  of  which  cannot  be,  is  a 
necessity.  A power  which  cannot  be  used,  a power  which  is 
not  in  the  power  of  the  agent  for  act,  is  no  adequate  power  in 
the  agent  at  all.  It  exists  in  words  only,  and  can  be  no  satis- 
factory basis  of  responsibility.”  Pp.  38,  39. 

By  no  possible  torture  can  this  and  much  more  the  like,  be 
strained  into  consistency  with  the  certainly  immutable  holiness 
of  God,  the  future  stability  of  the  angels  and  saints  in  heaven, 
or  the  perpetual  impiety  of  devils  and  lost  men  in  hell.  And 
what  shall  be  thought  of  that  scheme  which  must  be  false,  unless 
heaven  may  apostatize  and  hell  be  converted  ? Other  porten- 
tous consequences  of  it  are  too  obvious,  and  have  been  made 
too  prominent  in  discussions  upon  this  subject,  to  be  overlooked, 
even  by  Dr.  Whedon  himself.  It  is  clearly  incompatible  with 
the  foreknowledge  and  providence  of  God.  It  enthrones  contin- 
gency or  chance.  It  overthrows  original  righteousness,  original 
. sin,  and  efficacious  grace.  The  reasonings  by  which  it  is  sup- 
ported, applied  to  undeniable  facts,  tend  towards  Universalism, 
and,  as  we  shall  see,  are  pushed  by  the  author  himself  full  far  in 
that  direction.  Indeed,  it  subverts' and  utterly  vacates  freedom 
itself.  For  the  idea  that  a choice  should  be  free,  and  at  the  same 
time  contrary  to  the  pleasure  of  the  agent,  is  a contradiction, 


Whedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will. 


693 


1864.] 


utterly  opposite  to  all  normal  consciousness,  and  wholly  incon- 
ceivable. And  if  a free  choice  be  according  to  our  pleasure, 
then  it  will  be  such  as  that  pleasure  prompts,  and  no  other — free 
as  to  the  manner,  free  in  choosing  as  we  please,  and,  therefore, 
certain  as  to  the  event.  This  is  the  undeniable  fact  with  regard 
to  all  the  most  perfect  free  agents  in  existence.  This  doctrine, 
therefore,  maintained  professedly  in  the  interest  of  freedom, 
in  reality  subverts  it.  Let  us  notice  some  of  the  ways  in  which 
Dr.  Whedon  deals  with  such  objections  to  his  scheme. 

A careful  examination  of  his  book  will  show, 

1.  That  he  wavers  in  the  maintenance  of  his  great  principle 
already  brought  to  viewr,  and,  at  times,  apparently  gives  it  up. 

2.  That  he  appears  at  times  to  accept,  and  at  times  to  disown 
many  of  the  logical  consequences  we  have  just  attributed  to  it. 

3.  That  consequently  his  reasonings  in  support  of  these  shift- 
ing positions  are  often  confused  and  contradictory. 

1.  In  regard  to  his  great  principle  that  the  rendering  of 
choices  certain  or  invariable  by  any  antecedent  ground  or  influ- 
ence, destroys  freedom  and  responsibility,  the  following  are 
among  the  passages  that  evince  the  difficulty  of  firmly  adhering 
to  a doctrine  so  monstrous. 

“Habits  are  uniformities  of  action  which  maybe  said  to 
groio  upon  us  by  repetition.  They  are  uniformities  of  volition , 
too : and  they  are  often  performed  with  so  little  deliberation  as 
to  bear  a resemblance  to  instinct.  Positively , habit  arises  by  the 
influence  of  the  same  recurring  motives  for  the  which  Will  will 
act.  Those  motives  are  brought  up  by  the  laws  of  intellectual 
association  of  time,  place,  objects  and  causation.  Natural  im- 
pulses seem  to  spring  up  in  the  being,  physical  and  psychical,  sug- 
gesting the  usual  volition.  Meantime,  negatively , counter-motive 
and  counter-thought  are  gradually  more  perfectly  and  constantly 
excluded.  No  other  than  the  given  way  is  imagined  or  enters 
the  mind.  And  thus  the  volitions  move,  as  in  a passage  way 
w'alled  upon  either  side.  The  wrall  is  an  amalgam  of  blending 
freedom  and  necessity.”  P.  168. 

Again:  “The  motive  may  be  so  permanent  and  strong  as  to 
create  a firm  reliability  that  the  subordinate  volitions  will 
accord.  Indirectly,  the  counter  motives  may  be  excluded,  so 
as  to  leave  the  mind  completely  shut  up  to  the  positive  motive, 


694 


Whedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will.  [October 

and  a necessitation  be  superinduced.  Men,  thus,  may  be  so 
absorbed  in  their  plans  as  to  cease  to  be  free  alternative  agents ; 
but  they  seldom  or  never  thereby  lose  their  responsibility.” 
P.  169. 

And  yet  again : “ So  largely  and  effectively  do  the  disposi- 
tions, the  habits,  and  the  standard  purposes  influence  the  voli- 
tions, both  by  position  and  impulse,  and  by  excluding  counter 
courses  from  the  view,  that  the  agent,  however  intrinsically 
and  by  nature  free , is,  to  a great  extent,  objectively  unfree.” 
P.  170. 

Still  further : “ Thus,  if  we  have  rightly  traced  the  process, 
is  constituted  character.  Upon  a basis  of  corporeal,  physio- 
logical, and  mental  nature,  are  overlaid  a primary  superstruc- 
ture of  dispositions  blending  the  native  and  the  volitional,  and 
a secondary  formation  of  generic  purposes  wholly  volitional, 
and  formed  by  repetition  into  a tertiary  of  habits;  and  thus  we 
have  in  his  mingled  constitution  of  necessitation  and  freedom 
an  agent  prepared  for  his  daily  free,  responsible  action.” 

P.  171. 

Once  more:  “But  of  the  sin  which  appropriates  the  sin  of 
our  nature,  our  axiomatic  principles  require  us  to  affirm  that  it 
is  free  and  avoidable;  yet,  back  of  that  freedom,  we  admit  that 
there  is  a necessity  that  insures  that,  sooner  or  later,  the  free 
act  of  appropriation  will  be  made.  It  is  in  this  fact  that  the 
freedom  and  the  universality  of  this  fall  are  found  to  be  recon- 
ciled.” P.  339. 

Conclusive  as  are  these  passages  to  the  effect  that  volitions 
may  be  rendered  antecedently  certain  and  uniform,  without 
impairing  their  freedom  and  responsibility;  conclusive,  there- 
fore, against  the  main  doctrine  of  the  book,  we  cannot  forbear 
a single  other  quotation: — “A  character  may  be  formed  with 
a mind  so  wholly  circumscribed  within  a circle  of  sensual  feel- 
ings and  conceptions,  selfish  and  corrupt  maxims,  sordid  pur- 
poses and  habits,  that  the  complete  inventory  of  the  thoughts 
is  depraved,  and  no  honourable  or  truly  ethical  volition  is  within 
the  catalogue  of  possibilities.  Of  such  a character  it  may  be 
said,  without  our  being  obliged  to  define  whether  it  be  a case  of 
necessity  or  reliable  certainty,  that  he  cannot  will  nobly  or 
rightly.”  P.  172. 


1864.]  Whedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will.  695 

"What  language  could  more  decidedly  express  a complete 
surrendry  of  the  author’s  distinctive  doctrine?  He  goes  fur- 
ther than  the  bulk  of  his  adversaries,  who  only  contend  for  a 
“reliable  certainty”  in  choice,  as  flowing  from  the  antecedent 
states  of  the  mind.  Any  “necessity”  beyond  such  certainty 
they  disown,  while  in  the  extracts  preceding,  our  author  ap- 
pears to  maintain  it.  At  all  events  he  admits,  at  the  least, 
such  certainty,  and  calls  it  necessity.  What,  then,  does  all 
his  vehement  denunciation,  with  which  this  volume  is  freighted, 
amount  to?  Why  should  he,  with  such  stupendous  labour, 
erect  this  huge  fabric,  only  to  strike  it  down  with  a few  strokes 
of  his  pen?  Much  more  of  the  same  essential  force  might  be 
taken  from  his  discussion  of  the  power  of  motives,  and  else- 
where ; but  it  is  needless.  It  hardly  helps  his  case,  however, 
to  tell  us,  that  “ for  a volition  to  arise  from  the  influence  of 
motives,  is  not  the  same  as  to  be  the  effect  of  motives.”  P.  159. 
A cause  resting  on  such  a distinction  is  not  less  thin  and 
tenuous  than  the  distinction  itself.  Does  he  not  more  than 
affirm,  in  these  quotations,  what  he  elsewhere  so  strenuously 
combats  when. put  forth  by  his  opponents,  viz.,  freedom  in  the 
manner  and  quality  of  some  actions,  along  with  certainty, 
and  even  necessity,  as  to  the  event?  Also,  that  the  “direc- 
tion” of  choice,  under  given  outward  motives,  is  determined 
not  by  the  bare  natural  faculty,  but  by  the  moral  state”?  Do 
not  these  passages  abundantly  teach  that  choice  may  be  free 
and  responsible,  without  the  “property  of  choosing  the  exact 
contrary  of  what,  in  the  whole,  appears  most  eligible  and  de- 
sirable?”* 


* Perhaps  we  ought  not  to  leave  unnoticed  here  a small  bit  of  small  criti- 
cism on  ourselves,  in  the  following  terms: — “With  a crude  philosophy  the 
Princeton  Essayist,  like  other  necessitarians,  assumes  that  the  mind  must  be 
completely  occupied  with  one  ‘bias,’ which  excludes  all  coexistent  contrarie- 
ties. “Will  any  one  pretend  that  it  is  conscious  of  a power  to  choose  contrari- 
wise, its  ruling  inclination  or  pleasure  being  and  continuing  to  choose  as  it 
has  chosen?”  P.  254.  “What  is  meant  by  a ruling  inclination’s  choosing,  or 
a pleasure’s  choosing,  we  pretend  not  to  say.”  Pp.  373-4.  Really,  does  Dr. 
Whedon  need  to  be  told,  what  is  so  obvious  to  all  but  captious  critics,  that  the 
mind’s  inclination  and  pleasure  to  choose,  import  simply  the  mind  inclined  or 
pleased  to  choose  ? — that  it  makes  choosing  an  act  of  the'  mind,  according  to 
its  inclination  or  pleasure,  and  not  an  act  of  the  pleasure  or  inclination 


696 


Wliedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will.  [October 

Dr.  Whedon,  in  these  extracts,  has  certainly  shown  how,  in 
the  lowest  phase  of  character,  freedom — and  what  he  calls 
necessity — blend.  In  the  following,  among  others,  he  quite 
soars  to  the  grand  Augustinian  formula,  that  “on  the  highest 
point  of  moral  elevation,  freedom  and  necessity  coincide.” 

“We  may  suppose  a free  being  born  under  conditions  of  free 
moral  self-development,  to  be  self-wrought  to  a state  of  high 
perfection.  So  has  he  trained  his  own  nature  by  dropping  all 
evil  indulgences,  that  all  evil  propensities  are  lost;  and  so  has 
he  formed  his  taste  to  good,  that  none  but  motives  of  good  can 
reach  him.  His  habits  are  so  perfected  thereby  that  tempta- 
tion ceases.  He  does  right  without  effort,  and  ultimately  can 
no  more  do  wrong  than  I can  enjoy  the  central  heat  of  a fiery 
furnace.  The  merit  of  virtue  does  not  cease  when  its  power  is  so 
perfect  that  its  contest  is  over.  Admitting  the  agent  to  he  now 
necessarily  right , his  effortless  virtue  is  none  the  less  meritorious 
because  it  has  become  spontaneous.  The  merit  of  his  virtue 
does  not  cease  as  soon  as  he  has  perfected  it.”  Pp.  329-30. 

We  have  italicised  these  last  few  sentences,  because  they  are 
so  momentous,  and  so  clearly  concede  the  great  principles  of 
the  Augustinian  psychology,  which  this  book  is  written  espe- 
cially to  overthrow.  Generally,  the  italics  and  capitals  found 
in  our  quotations  are  the  author’s. 

II.  We  now  call  attention  to  some  of  Dr.  Whedon’s  admis- 
sions, more  or  less  explicit,  of  the  consequences  which,  in  our 
view,  result  from  his  theory.  0 

In  regard  to  the  possibility  of  a lapse  from  holiness  on  the 
part  of  God,  Dr.  Whedon  uses  the  following  language: — “The 
rectitude  of  God’s  actions  is  what  we  may  call  perfectly  proba- 
ble, and  certain,  practically  reliable  as  any  physical  necessity, 
without  admitting  that  the  nexus  is  the  same  or  equally  irre- 
versible, and  strictly  admitting  the  power  of  contrary  choice.” 
P.  314.  Deliver  us  from  modes  of  thinking  which  can  describe 
the  rectitude  of  the  divine  acts  as  probable,  even  though  it  be 
enough  so  to  be  “practically  reliable;”  but  not  “equally  irre- 
versible” with  the  nexus  between  physical  cause  and  effect, 

abstractly,  or  otherwise  than  as  the  mind  acts  according  to  them?  That  we 
have  assumed  what  he  here  ascribes  to  us,  is  an  entirely  gratuitous  assump- 
tion of  Dr.  Whedon. 


Whedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will. 


697 


1864.] 


nay,  wholly  at  the  mercy  of  a strict  power  of  contrary  choice ! 
Is  it  on  such  a foundation  that  our  faith  in  God’s  immutable 
perfection  rests?  Is  a probability,  a mere  practical  reliability, 
which  is  less  irreversible  by  the  power  of  contrary  choice  than 
the  causal  connection  between  the  law  of  gravity  and  the  fall- 
ing of  an  apple — that  anchor  of  the  soul  which  is  furnished  by 
the  oath  and  promise  of  Him  for  whom  it  is  “ impossible  to 
lie”  (Heb.  vi.  18),  and  who  cannot  “deny  himself”?  2 Tim. 
ii.  18. 

Dr.  Whedon  says  further:  “ God  is  holy  in  that  he  chooses 
to  make  his  own  happiness  in  eternal  Right.  Whether  he 
could  not  make  himself  equally  happy  in  Wrong,  is  more  than 
we  can  say.”  P.  316.  Again:  “And  how  knows  a finite  in- 
sect, like  us,  that  in  the  course  of  ages  the  motives  in  the 
universe  may  not  prove  strongest  for  a divine  apostasy  to 
evil?”  P.  317.  The  saints  in  all  generations,  from  the  babe 
in  Christ  to  the  “ great  Apostle,”  know  full  well  the  utter  and 
eternal  impossibility  of  these  dread  contingencies.  Otherwise, 
how  could  their  “hearts  be  fixed,  trusting  in  the  Lord,”  even 
as  “Mount  Zion,  that  shall  never  be  moved”? 

Dr.  Whedon  excludes  the  acts  of  men  and  angels  from  the 
sphere  of  God’s  purposes  and  providence.  He  says:  “The 
Divine  plan,  as  embraced  in  God’s  predetermination,  is  a 
scheme  strictly  embracing  only  the  Divine  actions.”  P.  293. 
Such  a position  needs  no  comment  here.  It  of  course  follows 
inevitably,*  that  if  the  actions  of  creatures  are  outside  of  God’s 
plan  and  purpose,  they  are  outside  of  his  foreknowledge. 
Indeed,  the  utter  inconsistency  of  this  scheme  with  the  fore- 
knowledge of  God  is  so  obvious  and  demonstrable,  that  it  rarely 
fails  to  loom  up  in  discussions  on  this  subject.  The  argument 
is  simple  and  conclusive.  If  God  has  eternally  foreknown  the 
actions  of  free-agents,  then  there  has  been  an  eternal  antece- 
dent certainty  what  they  will  be.  And  this  antecedent  cer- 
tainty was  inconsistent  with  their  being  otherwise.  There  is 
no  evading  this.  And  if  so,  such  antecedent  certainty  is  com- 
patible with  freedom.  It  is  of  no  avail  to  say  that  foreknow- 
ledge does  not,  determine  or  make  certain  the  action.  If  it 
does  not  make,  it  proves  them  certain  eternal  ages  before  their 
occurrence.  For  what  is  not  in  itself  certain  cannot  be  an 

88 


VOL.  XXXVI. — NO.  IV. 


698 


Whedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will.  [October 

object  of  certain  knowledge.  This,  of  course,  proves  a Divine 
purpose  or  decree  that  they  shall  come  to  pass.  For  there  is 
no  conceivable  ground,  before  their  occurrence,  of  these  actions 
passing  out  of  the  category  of  things  possible  to  be,  into  those 
things  that  shall  be — that  is,  from  mere  possibility  to  positive 
futurition — but  the  Divine  purpose.  But  not  to  dwell  upon  this, 
whether  it  be  true  or  not,  the  above  argument  for  the  absolute 
unfrustrable  antecedent  certainty  of  volitions  abides  impregna- 
ble. And  among  the  most  remarkable  confirmations  of  the 
stringency  of  this  argument,  are  the  efforts  of  adversaries  to 
parry  it — especially  those  contained  in  the  two  volumes  under 
review. 

Dr.  Whedon  begins  by  telling  us  that  “ God’s  foreordination 
must  be  viewed  as  being  preceded  by  his  foreknowledge.” 
P.  266.  There  is  no  precedence  of  either,  both  being  alike 
co-eternal.  But  that  a determination  should  be  known  before 
it  is  from  some  source  determined — i.  e.,  fixed  what  it  shall 
be — is  a simple  contradiction.  Dr.  Whedon  tells  us  again  and 
again,  that  “the  freedom  of  an  act  is  not  affected  by  its  being 
an  object  of  foreknowledge.”  Of  course  not.  But  what  does 
this  prove?  Nothing,  surely,  except  that  Dr.  Whedon  is  mis- 
taken in  his  idea  of  freedom  as  inconsistent  with  any  antece- 
dent fixing,  and  consequent  certainty  of  the  choice,  to  the 
exclusion  of  the  contrary. 

Says  our  author:  “ If  that  agent  in  a given  case  be  able  to 
•will  either  of  several  ways,  there  is  no  need  of  a present  causa- 
tion to  make  it  certain  which  he  will  do.  The  agent,  by  his  act 
in  the  future,  makes  all  the  certainty  there  now  is.  It  is  by 
and  from  that  act  solely  thus  put  forth  that  the  present  will  he 
of  the  act  exists.  He  will  put  forth  his  act  unsecured  by  any 
present  inalternative  making  or  securement.  Whichever  act 
he  puts  forth  it  is  true  that  he  will  put  forth;  and  that  now 
unmade  will  put  forth  is  all  the  certainty  there  is.  It  is  by 
that  putting  forth  solely,  that  the  present  will  be  is  true.  All 
the  certainty  there  is,  that  is,  all  the  will  be  about  it,  depends 
upon,  and  arises  solely  from  the  act  of  the  free  agent  himself. 
It  is  simply  the  uncaused  will  be  of  an  act  which  can  otherwise 
be.  Certainty,  therefore,  is  not  a previously  made,  caused,  or 
manufactured  thing.”  P.  282.  This  is  a total  denial  that  out 


1864.]  Whedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will.  699 

of  several  acts  possible  to  be,  that  one  which  is  certain  to  occur, 
and  is  foreknown  as  certain  to  occur,  has  any  certainty  not 
created  by  the  act  itself;  of  course,  any  certainty  anterior  to 
the  act,  and,  therefore,  any  possibility  of  being  foreknown. 
This  effectually  subverts  the  Divine  foreknowledge.  It  is  quite 
in  keeping  to  tell  us  on  the  same  page,  that  “no  argument  can 
be  drawn  from  the  prophecies  of  holy  Scriptures,  to  prove  the 
predetermination  of  human  actions.”  We  are  hardly  surprised 
after  this  to  be  told  that,  while  foreknowledge  must  know  the 
right  fact,  it  is  unnecessary  that  “the  fact  should  accord  with 
the  foreknowledge,”  p.  288;  or  that  Dr.  Whedon  should  “deny 
that  between  the  foreknowledge  and  the  agent-power  the  con- 
nection is  necessary  or  indissoluble,”  p.  284;  or  that  foreknow- 
ledge “can  be  true  in  full  consistency  with  the  existence  of  a 
power  to  make  it  false,”  p.  285;  or  finally,  that  “God’s  fore- 
knowledge neither  makes  the  event  necessary  nor  proves  it  so.” 
P.  288.  We  have  had  enough  of  Dr.  Whedon’s  dissolving 
views  on  this  subject.  We  now  turn  to  Mr.  Hazard’s  more 
logical  and  manly  course — in  admitting  the  inexorable  conse- 
quences of  his  doctrine,  and  giving  up  the  Divine  Omniscience. 
He  says: 

“ An  event  foreknown  by  infallible  prescience  must  be  as 
certain  in  the  future  as  if  known  by  infallible  memory  in  the 
past,  and  to  say  that  God  foreknows  an  event,  which  depends 
on  the  action  of  an  agent,  which  acting  without  his  control, 
may,  of  itself,  freely  and  independently  produce  any  one  of 
several  different  results,  or  none  at  all,  involves  a contradic- 
tion. I am  disposed  to  yield  to  the  argument  of  Edwards  all 
the  benefit  of  any  doubt  on  these  points;  ...  to  admit  that 
what  is  certainly  foreknown  by  Omniscience  must  certainly 
happen,  and  that,  if  God  foreknows  the  volitions  of  men,  then 
they  cannot  will  freely.  . . . though  God  having  the  power 
to  determine  could  foreknow  all  events,  he  may  forego  the 
exercise  of  such  power,  and  neither  control  nor  know  the  par- 
ticular events  which  are  thus  left  to  be  determined  by  the  action 
of  the  human  mind.”  Pp.  385,  386.  Of  course,  when  we  assent 
to  the  argument  that  foreknowledge  is  inconsistent  with  free- 
dom, it  is  only  in  their  false  meaning  of  the  word  freedom  as  a 


700  Whedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will.  [October 

something  incompatible  with  previous  certainty.  And  this 
remark  applies  to  analogous  quotations  from  Dr.  Whedon. 

Mr.  Hazard,  however,  gives  up  the  Omniscience  of  God  in 
behalf  of  his  superficial  conception  of  freedom,  only  to  entangle 
himself  in  still  more  formidable  difficulties  in  regard  to  God’s 
providence  and  government  of  a universe,  the  most  moment- 
ous events  and  highest  actions  in  which  are  wholly  unforeseen. 
We  cannot  follow  him  here.  Surely  none  can  study  his  toil- 
some and  futile  attempts  to  meet  these  difficulties,  without 
being  more  firmly  convinced  of  that  great  truth,  the  rejection  of 
which  involves  plunge  upon  plunge,  from  deep  to  deep,  till, 
beneath  the  lowest,  they  reach  a lower  still,  in  this  abyss  of 
absurdities. 

We  cannot  conclude  without  touching  a single  other  topic.  We 
said  that  the  reasonings  employed  in  support  of  the  doctrine  of 
these  volumes  point  logically  towards  Universalism,  and  that 
Dr.  Whedon  pushes  them  full  far  in  that  direction.  This  is  a 
grave  allegation.  We  will  briefly  give  our  reasons  for  it. 

The  docti'ine  of  these  volumes  is  simply  that  the  previous 
fixation,  or  securing  the  certainty  and  invariability  of  volitions 
by  any  antecedents  whatever,  destroys  freedom,  responsibility, 
merit  and  demerit.  But  it  is  undeniable,  and  is,  as  we  have 
seen,  freely  admitted  by  Dr.  Whedon,  that  such  certainty  and 
invariability  of  sinful  choices  in  mankind  are  established  from 
the  beginning  of  their  moral  agency,  at  least  until  regenera- 
tion, by  their  antecedent  state.  What  is  the  inevitable  conse- 
quence of  such  premises?  Why,  surely,  that  men  are  neither 
culpable  nor  punishable  for  their  sins,  and  will  not  suffer  on 
account  of  them.  Hence  salvation  is  a matter  of  justice.  The 
atonement  is  uncalled  for  and  needless,  or  if  it  be  on  any 
account  needful,  it  is  a simple  discharge  of  justice  to  injured 
man,  rather  than  a vicarious  satisfaction  of  the  demands  of 
Divine  justice  upon  the  pardoned  sinner.  Says  Dr.  Whedon, 
p.  341,  “ Without  losing  its  intrinsic  character  of  stupendous 
grace,  the  atonement  becomes  a justice — a theodice.  It  blends 
in  with  the  terrible  elements  of  our  fallen  state,  and  forms  an 
average  probational  dispensation,  in  which  the  Divine  Admin- 
istration appears  not  merely  absolutely  just,  but  practically 
equitable,  and  mercifully  reasonable  to  our  human  reason.  . . . 


Wheclon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will. 


701 


1864.] 


And  thus  we  see  that  without  the  Redeemer  no  equitable  sys- 
tem of  probation  for  fallen  man  is  a possibility.”  This  surely 
makes  the  atonement,  whatever  of  grace  it  may  contain,  a mat- 
. ter  of  justice  to  mankind.  But  let  us  look  further  into  the 
author’s  applications  of  his  principle. 

He  says,  “Although  there  is  not  a perfect  equation  of  the 
means  and  advantages  among  all  mankind,  yet  it  may  be 
affirmed  that  no  man  is  condemned  to  everlasting  death  who  has 
not  enjoyed  full  means  and  opportunity  for  salvation , and 
has  (not  ?)  wilfully  rejected  them  by  persevering  in  a course  of 
conscious  sin.”  P.  345.  Thus,  by  a single  dash  of  the  pen, 
he  acquits  and  shields  from  perdition  all  the  heathen  whose 
enormities  Paul  so  graphically  depicts  (Rom.  i.),  declaring  them 
“without  excuse,”  and  that  “the  wrath  of  God  is  revealed  from 
heaven  against  all  unrighteousness.”  For  all  this,  it  remains 
infallibly  true,  that  the  “wicked  shall  be  turned  into  hell, 
and  all  the  nations  that  forget  God.” 

Our  author  then  proceeds  to  put  the  most  degraded  and 
abandoned  part  of  Christendom  on  the  footing  of  those  who 
die  in  infancy,  as  to  their  prospects  of  salvation,  in  the  follow- 
ing manner: 

“ Within  the  bosom  of  Christendom  there  is  an  immense  class 
adult  in  years,  but  apparently  entitled  to  the  moral  immu- 
nity of  infancy;  geographically  Christian,  but  with  as  little 
access  to  a true  Christianity  as  the  most  distant  heathenism. 
Heathenism  in  Christendom ! . . . In  the  dregs  of  our  large  cities 
it  is  impossible  to  say  what  numbers  there  are  whom  we  can 
hardly  decide  whether  they  are  to  be  assigned  to  the  infant  or 
idiot  dispensation,  or  to  heathendom.  Each  man  is,  in  a de- 
gree, by  himself  a dispensation.  But  what  is  the  ultimate 
destiny?  Precisely  the  same,  we  reply,  with  that  of  the 
infant.”  Pp.  346-7.  “ The  application  of  the  same  liberality 

of  interpretation  which  would  save  .the  visible  church  in 
Christendom,  would  save  the  invisible  church  in  heathendom. 
He  is  a saved  heathen  who  lives  as  nearly  up  to  the  light  he 
has  as  does  the  Christian,  who  is  finally  saved  to  the  light 
he  has.” 

“ Truly  that  severity  of  Christian  judgment,  with  which 


702 


Wliedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will.  [October 


many  judge  the  unfavoured  peoples,  would  leave  us  little  hope 
of  the  Christian  church.”  Pp.  350-1. 

“Bold  assertions  in  missionary  speeches  and  sermons,  that 
all  the  world  without  the  pale  of  Christendom  is  damned  in 
mass,  never  quicken  the  pulse  of  missionary  zeal.  On  the  con- 
trary, they  ever  roll  a cold  reaction  upon  every  feeling  heart 
and  every  rational  mind.  Our  better  natures  revolt,  and,  alas ! 
a gush  of  scepticism  is  but  too  apt  in  consequence  to  rise  in  the 
public  mind.”  P.  357.  All  this  could  quite  as  plausibly  be 
said  of  the  doctrine  of  eternal  punishment — indeed  of  the  very 
sufferings  and  woes  that  shroud  the  earth — and  of  the  very 
permission  of  sin  and  suffering  itself.  Quite  as  plausible  and 
stirring  an  appeal  could  be  made  to  the  merely  human  sensi- 
bilities, as  to  the  consistency  of  these  undeniable  facts  with  the 
righteousness  and  benevolence  of  God.  But  whither-  does  all 
such  declamation  logically  tend?  Clearly  in  the  direction  of 
Universalism,  of  Infidelity,  of  Atheism.  And  what  strength  the 
missionary  cause  will  have,  if  the  heathen  are  believed  by  the 
Christian  community  to  be  as  really  in  a state  of  salvation, 
without  the  gospel,  as  with  it,  may  be  learned  from  the  mission- 
ary operations  of  Unitarians  and  Universalists. 

We  have  now  shown  what  we  meant,  in  saying  that  the 
reasoning  of  this  book  tended  towards  Universalism,  and  are 
pressed  full  far  by  the  author  in  that  direction.  With  this  we 
bring  to  a close  the  few  criticisms  for  which  we  have  time,  out 
of  the  many  that  these  works,  especially  that  of  Dr.  Whedon, 
invite.  Its  superficial  plausibility,  its  vaunting  and  supercili- 
ous tone,  its  pretensions  to  philosophic  depth  and  subtlety, 
enlisted  in  support  of  a loose  latitudinarianism,  have  very  natu- 
rally secured  for  it  laudations  enough  to  challenge  a close 
examination.  It  is  due,  therefore,  to  the  cause  of  God  and 
truth  to  call  attention  to  some  of  its  weaker  and  more  danger- 
ous points.  In  doing  jthis,  we  have  perhaps  treated  our  readers 
more  largely  to  extracts  from  the  author,  than  to  our  own 
comments  upon  them,  both  because  we  have  desired  to  do  full 
justice  to  him  in  letting  him  speak  for  himself,  and  because 
we  fully  believe  Dr.  Johnson’s  saying,  “No  man  was  ever 
written  down  except  by  himself.”  We  have  no  fear  of  the 
result  of  these  periodical  attacks  upon  that  view  of  the  freedom 


Wliedon  and  Hazard  on  the  Will. 


703 


1864.] 

\ of  the  will,  which,  in  our  judgment,  alone  corresponds  with  con- 
sciousness, with  all  fact,  with  the  representations  of  Scripture, 
and  the  great  articles  of  the  Christian  faith,  as  shown  in  its 
standard  symbols.  A system  which  teaches  that  volition  is  not 
voluntary,*  and  its  supporters  cannot  uphold  without  contra- 
dicting it,  which  involves  either  the  possibility  of  future  apos- 
tasy in  heaven,  or  the  denial  that  God,  holy  angels,  and  glori- 
fied saints  are  free  agents;  which,  to  be  consistent,  must  deny 
either  the  universal  apostasy  of  our  race,  or  the  sin  and  guilt 
thereof;  which  staggers  in  regard  to  the  foreknowledge  of  God, 
vacates  his  decrees,  and  militates  against  the  possibility  of  his 
universal  Providence;  whose  broad  liberalism  makes  such 
alarming  strides  in  the  path  which  terminates  in  universal  sal- 
vation; will  gain  nothing  by  challenging  renewed  attention 
to  its  deformities.  The  foundation  standeth  sure.  The  Lord 
still  reigns.  He  doeth  all  things  after  the  counsel  of  his  own 
will.  His  throne  is  for  ever  and  ever.  It  is  impossible  for  him 
to  lie.  His  counsel  shall  stand.  Therefore  his  saints  surely 
and  for  ever  trust  him. 

“In  heaven  and  earth,  and  air  and  seas, 

He  executes  his  firm  decrees, 

And  by  his  saints  it  stands  contest 
That  what  he  does  is  ever  best.” 

* “Both  the  elder  and  the  younger  Edwards,  as  well  as  jubilant  Dr.  Pond, 
were  guilty  of  the  oversight,  of  calling  volition  a voluntary  act.” — Whedon, 
p.  78.  See  also  p.  22. 


( 704  ) 


Correction  by  the  Hon.  Stanley  Matthews. 

Cincinnati,  August  15,  1864. 

Rev.  Charles  Hodge,  D.  D., 

Editor  of  Princeton  Review. 

Bear  Sir — In  the  July  Number  of  the  Princeton  Review , 
p.  554,  commenting,  in  your  article  upon  the  General  Assembly, 
on  the  report  on  the  subject  of  slavery,  you  impute  to  me  the 
following  declaration : “that  every  man  is  bound  to  presume 
that  the  laws  and  the  measures  of  the  government  are  right 
and  binding.  They  may  be  otherwise,  but  the  private  citizen 
is  not  the  judge.” 

From  the  quotation  marks,  I infer  that  the  language  is 
extracted  from  some  newspaper  report  of  my  remarks. 

I beg  leave  to  state  that  I did  not  use  any  language  to  that 
effect,  nor  give  expression  to  any  such  doctrine.  What  I did 
say  was  simply  that  every  citizen  was  bound  to  presume  that 
the  laws  and  measures  of  the  government  were  legal — consti- 
tutional— valid  as  civil  obligations.  This  is  a very  different 
proposition.  An  enactment  entirely  legal  and  valid  as  a civil 
obligation  may  yet  be  of  such  a character  as  not  to  give  rise  to 
the  moral  obligation  of  obedience.  On  the  contrary,  there 
may  be  a moral  obligation  to  disobey  it.  But  there  being  no 
such  moral  obligation  supposed,  I simply  contended  that,  as  a 
matter  of  law,  every  measure  of  the  civil  government  is  pre- 
sumed to  be  legal,  and  that  it  was  the  duty  of  all  citizens  so  to 
regard  it,  until  the  proper  tribunals  should  have  decided  other- 
wise. 

I trust  you  will  do  me  the  justice  to  make  the  correction  in 
the  next  number  of  the  Review. 

Respectfully,  your  friend, 

Stanley  Matthews. 


1864.] 


Short  Notices. 


705 


SHORT  NOTICES. 


Expository  Lectures  on  the  Heidelberg  Catechism.  By  George  W.  Beth- 
une,  D.  D.  In  two  volumes.  New  York:  Sheldon  & Co.,  335  Broad- 
way. 1864.  Yol.  i.,  pp.  491,  Vol.  ii.  535. 

It  is  a wise  ordinance  of  the  Reformed  Dutch  Church  which 
requires  its  pastors  to  lecture  regularly  on  the  Catechism  from 
the  pulpit  on  the  Sabbath.  Originally  this  was  required  to  be 
done  every  Sabbath,  the  Catechism  being  divided  into  fifty- 
two  parts,  so  as  to  furnish  a topic  for  every  week.  In  this 
country  the  rule  has  been  modified  so  as  to  require  one  lecture 
a month,  which  secures  the  Catechism  being  gone  over  once  in 
four  years.  In  this  way  the  doctrinal  instruction  of  the  peo- 
ple is  secured.  These  volumes  contain  the  lectures  of  the  late 
eminent  Dr.  Bethune  in  discharge  of  this  duty.  They  are 
what  they  profess  to  be,  popular  expositions.  At  the  same 
time  they  contain  much  sound  instruction,  presented  in  a clear 
and  simple  manner,  in  the  polished  style  for  which  the  distin- 
guished author  was  remarkable.  They  constitute  a popular 
body  of  divinity.  Besides  an  Index,  the  last  volume  contains 
a list  of  the  Commentaries  on  the  Heidelberg  Catechism,  fill- 
ing more  than  twelve  pages. 

The  Early  Dawn;  or,  Sketches  of  Christian  Life  in  England  in  the  Olden 
Time.  By  the  author  of  “Chronicles  of  the  Schonberg-Cotta  Family.” 
With  an  Introduction,  by  Professor  Henry  B.  Smith,  D.  D.  New  York: 
M.  D.  Dodd,  506  Broadway.  1864.  Pp.  397. 

Few  works  have  been  more  deservedly  popular,  both  in  this 
country  and  in  England,  than  the  “ Chronicles  of  the  Schon- 
berg-Cotta Family.”  The  simple  announcement  that  this  is  a 
new  work  from  the  same  author,  written  on  the  same  plan,  will 
be  enough  to  secure  for  it  a cordial  and  extensive  welcome. 

The  Hawaian  Islands:  Their  Progress  and  Condition  under  Missionary 
Labours.  By  Rufus  Anderson,  D.  D.,  Foreign  Secretary  of  the  Ameri- 
can Board  of  Commissioners  for  Foreign  Missions.  Boston : Gould  & 
Lincoln.  New  York:  Sheldon  & Co.  1864. 

The  title  and  the  author  of  this  well-constructed  volume  will 
secure  for  it  the  eager  attention  of  all  interested  in  missions, 
and  the  propagation  of  the  gospel.  This  attention  will  be 
richly  rewarded.  Dr.  Anderson  having  recently  visited  the 
vol.  xxxvi. — no.  iv.  89 


706 


Short  Notices. 


[October 


Sandwich  Islands,  on  a tour  of  official  inspection  in  behalf  of 
the  American  Board,  was,  of  course,  under  the  necessity  of 
embodying  the  results  of  his  observations  in  a report  to  that 
body.  In  pursuance  of  this  object,  he  happily  soon  adopted 
the  plan  of  a volume,  giving  a complete  history  of  the  past 
operations  and  achievements  of  Christian  missionaries,  and  of 
the  present  condition,  prospects,  and  perils  of  Christianity  in 
these  islands,  in  which  modern  missions  have  done  their  most 
perfect  work,  and  wrought  their  most  signal  triumphs.  All 
these  topics  are  treated  in  a thorough,  instructive,  and  enter- 
taining manner.  The  information  in  regard  to  the  present 
efforts  of  “ Reformed  Catholics,”  and  “Roman  Catholics,”  to 
possess  the  land,  and  proselyte  the  people,  are  especially  valu- 
able. We  rejoice  that  the  venerable  author,  after  preparing 
the  “Memorial  Volume”  of  the  American  Board,  has  been 
spared  to  leave  this  additional  precious  legacy  to  the  church. 
We  hope  it  is  but  the  precursor  of  others. 

Report  of  the  Punjab  Missionary  Conference , held  at  Lahore,  in  December 
and  January,  1862,  1863:  including  the  Essays  read,  and  the  Dis- 
cussions which  followed  them ; also,  Prefatory  Remarks  and  other 
Papers;  closing  with  a Comprehensive  Index  of  the  Subjects  Discussed, 
and  a Glossary  of  Urdu  Words  used  by  the  Writers  and  Speakers. 
Edited  by  the  Committee  of  Compilation.  Lodiana:  Printed  at  the 
American  Presbyterian  Mission  Press,  the  Rev.  A.  Rudolph,  Superin- 
tendent. 1863.  Sold  by  Robert  Carter  & Brothers,  530  Broadway, 
New  York. 

Many  of  our  readers  will  remember  the  Missionary  Confer- 
ence, some  years  ago,  in  New  York,  under  the  auspices  of 
Dr.  Duff,  at  which  various  questions  of  moment  connected  with 
missions  were  vigorously  discussed.  Subsequent  conferences  of 
a similar  character  have  been  held  at  Calcutta,  at  Benares,  at 
Octacamund,  at  Liverpool,  and  now  at  Lahore.  These  confer- 
ences have  come  to  be  established  institutions,  to  meet  the  ever 
new  and  exigent  questions  developed  by  the  growth  of  missions, 
and  their  manifold  surroundings  and  relations.  We  have,  in  a 
former  number,  presented  an  extended  account  of  the  Liverpool 
Conference,  which  showed  the  importance  of  the  questions  dis- 
cussed at  these  meetings,  and  the  ability  of  the  papers  and 
debates  thus  drawn  forth.  The  present  volume  is  replete  with 
reports  of  masterly  discussions  of  vital  and  perplexing  ques- 
tions, which  cannot  fail  to  be  appreciated  by  all  interested  in 
missions.  The  topics  treated  in  this  volume — some  of  them  by 
missionaries  and  martyrs  of  our  own  church — are : Preaching 
to  the  Heathen;  The  Hindoo  and  Mohammedan  Controversy; 
Schools;  Missionary  Work  among  the  Females  of  India;  Itine- 
rations; Lay  Cooperation;  A Native  Pastorate;  Sympathy 


1864.] 


Short  Notices. 


707 


and  Confidence  of  Native  Christians;  Inquirers;  Polygamy 
and  Divorce;  The  Hill  Tribes;  The  Sikhs;  Vernacular  Chris- 
tian Literature ; Inter-Mission  Discipline;  an  Indian  Catholic 
Church.  Many  of  these  dissertations  are  elaborate  and  search- 
ing, while  the  accompanying  debates  are  often  powerful  and 
luminous.  We  look  for  great  good  from  these  missionary  con- 
vocations. Both  this  and  Dr.  Anderson’s  volume  are  valuable 
contributions  to  missionary  literature. 

The  Days  that  are  Past.  By  Thomas  James  Shepherd,  fourth  pastor'of  the 
Philadelphia  (N.  L.)  First  Presbyterian  Church.  Philadelphia  : Lind- 
say & Blakiston.  1864. 

Mr.  Shepherd  has  here  given  us  a complete  history  of  the 
church  of  which  he  is  pastor,  from  its  first  planting,  half  a cen- 
tury since,  until  now.  It  includes  careful  biographical  sketches 
of  its  three  distinguished  former  pastors — James  Patterson, 
Daniel  Lynn  Carroll,  and  Ezra  Stiles  Ely — names  that  will  not 
soon  be  forgotten.  Sketches  of  leading  men  in  the  eldership 
are  also  interspersed.  Pastors  cannot  do  a better  work  than 
to  make  such  contributions  to  our  ecclesiastical  history.  The 
author  would  done  well  to  have  made  the  title  of  his  book  more 
indicative.  The  cream  paper  and  fine  typography  are  great 
luxuries. 

A Treatise  on  Homiletics.  Designed  to  illustrate  the  True  Theory  and 
Practice  of  Preaching  the  Gospel.  By  Daniel  P.  Kidder,  D.  D.,  Pro- 
fessor in  Garrett  Biblical  Institute.  New  York:  Carlton  & Porter, 
1864. 

It  is  undeniable  that  the  Methodist  ministry,  as  a class,  have 
in  their  own  way  and  sphere  had  great  success  as  preachers.  It 
will  scarcely  be  questioned  that  they  have  excelled  among  the 
Protestant  clergy,  especially  in  Britain  and  America,  in  gain- 
ing the  ear  of  the  humble  and  less  educated  classes,  to  the 
gospel  message.  This  is  no  mean  praise.  To  the  poor  the 
gospel  is  preached.  The  church  that  gathers  them  in  has  one 
eminent  token  of  the  Divine  favour.  It  is  no  less  undeniable 
that  the  tones  and  style  of  Methodist  preaching,  exceptions 
apart,  have  thus  far  failed  to  lay  a powerful  and  extensive 
grasp  upon  the  educated  and  intelligent  classes.  It  is  obvious, 
therefore,  that  this  preaching,  as  a whole,  is  marked  by  great 
merits  and  great  defects,  which  it  will  be  of  the  highest  advan- 
tage for  preachers  in  that  and  other  communions  to  study; 
that  Methodist  preachers  may  thus  amend  their  defects,  while 
others  learn  from  them  whatever  is  worthy  of  imitation.  This 
text  book  on  Homiletics,  by  an  eminent  Methodist  Professor  in 
that  department,  is  well  fitted  to  promote  both  these  results. 


708 


Short  Notices. 


[October 


It  is,  in  the  main,  characterized  bj  learning,  judgment,  and 
taste.  The  author  gleans  his  materials,  illustrations,  and 
authorities,  from  all  ages  and  branches  of  the  church.  ' He 
brings  them  to  bear  in  illustrating  the  merits  and  faults  of  the 
prevailing  modes  of  preaching,  in  his  own  and  other  commu- 
nions. As  might  be  expected,  he  favours  preaching  without 
reading  or  memorizing,  but  insists  on  the  most  diligent  prepa- 
ration. The  ai’guments,  however,  for  and  against  the  different 
styles  of  preaching  are  presented  with  great  fulness  and  fair- 
ness, and  may  be  studied  with  profit  by  all  concerned.  The 
book  is  an  unquestionable  acquisition  to  our  homiletical  lite- 
rature. 

Life  and  Times  of  Nathan  Bangs,  I).  D.  By  Abel  Stevens,  LL.D.,  author 
of  the  “History  of  the  Religious  Movement  of  the  Eighteenth  Century 
called  Methodism.”  New  York:  Carlton  and  Porter.  1864. 

Dr.  Bangs  was  certainly  a representative  man  of  the  Method- 
ist Church  for  the  last  half-century,  the  principal  period  of  its 
growth  and  development  in  our  country.  Few  contributed 
more  to  advance  and  mould  this  vast  communion.  He  was 
foremost  in  the  self-denial  of  pioneer  evangelization  in  our  ever- 
receding  frontiers.  He  occupied  the  leading  Methodist  metro- 
politan pulpits.  He  was  one  of  their  most  trusty,  expert,  and 
effective  polemics.  He  was  second  to  none  as  a debater  and 
counsellor  in  ecclesiastical  meetings,  and  the  great  organiza- 
tions of  his  church.  He  was  in  all  respects  a leader  among 
his  brethren;  and  eminently  qualified  to  be  so.  Although  a 
vehemently  anti-Calvinistic  polemic,  he  was  of  genial  tempera- 
ment, and  not  destitute  of  catholicity.  He  grew  moi’e  mellow 
and  large-hearted  with  age,  and  became  able  to  appreciate  bet- 
ter the  merits  of  other  communions,  while  he  also  saw  and 
sought  to  correct  faults  in  his  own.  He  has  left  his  impress 
on  his  church  and  generation,  and  deserved  a fit  biographical 
memorial.  He  could  not  have  found  a better  biographer.  By 
his  previous  studies  as  the  historian  of  Methodism,  and  his 
facility  and  tact  as  a writer,  Dr.  Stevens  was  peculiarly  quali- 
fied for  the  task  which  he  has  admirably  executed. 

Life,  Times,  and  Correspondence  of  James  Manning,  and  the  Early  History 
of  Broion  University  By  Reuben  Aldridge  Guild.  Boston : Gould  & 
Lincoln.  New  York:  Sheldon  & Co.  1864. 

Dr.  Manning,  the  first  president  of  Brown  University,  was 
also  prominent  and  influential  as  a Baptist  divine.  His  life, 
therefore,  not  only  involves  the  founding  and  early  history  of 
that  institution,  but,  in  some  degree  also,  of  the  Baptist  deno- 
mination of  Christians  in  this  country.  This  book  is  a rich 


Short  Notices. 


709 


1864.] 

repository  of  facts  in  regard  to  all  these  subjects,  which  were 
on  the  verge  of  hopeless  oblivion.  The  author’s  industry  and 
judgment  are  shown,  not  only  in  the  amount  and  value  of  the 
facts  so  brought  to  light  and  preserved,  but  in  their  arrange- 
ment, and  in  the  exhaustive  tables  of  contents  at  the  beginning, 
and  the  index  at  the  end  of  the  volume.  Dr.  Manning  was 
eminent  as  a divine,  scholar,  and  educator.  He  was  one  of  the 
early  distinguished  graduates  of  Princeton  College,  after  which 
Brown  University  was  largely  patterned. 

The  Voice  of  Blood  in  the  Sphere  of  Nature  and  the  Spirit  World.  By  the 
Rev.  Samuel  A.  Philips,  A.  M.,  Pastor  of  the  Reformed  Church,  Car- 
lisle, Pa.;  author  of  “ Gethsemane  and  the  Cross,”  and  “The  Christian 
Home.”  Philadelphia:  Lindsay  & Blakiston. 

In  this  work,  the  author  first  analyzes  the  voice,  its  struc- 
ture, functions,  capabilities,  as  a material  organ  of  the  spirit; 
then  the  blood  in  which  is  the  life;  then  blood  as  the  voice 
which  utters  mighty  truths  and  testimonies;  then  “the  voice 
of  accusing  blood  from  the  ground,”  beginning  with  the  blood 
of  Abel;  the  “voice  of  typical  blood  from  the  altar,”  compre- 
hending the  Jewish  sacrifices;  “the  voice  of  atoning  blood 
from  the  cross;”  “the  voice  of  martyr-blood  from  the  church;” 
of  “sacramental  blood  from  the  Christian  altar;”  of  “pleading 
blood  from  the  mercy-seat;”  of  “witnessing  blood  from  the 
judgment  throne;”  of  “avenging  blood  from  hell;”  and, 
finally,  of  “glorifying  blood  in  heaven.”  These  topics  are 
treated  in  a fervid  and  impassioned  style  which  seldom  flags, 
and  with  a florid  exuberance  of  diction  and  imagery,  which 
would  suffer  nothing  by  judicious  pruning.  The  reader,  how- 
ever, is  never  wearied  by  dulness,  even  if  sated  with  luxuri- 
ance of  metaphor  and  soaring  phraseology.  Without  endorsing 
every  sentiment,  we  find  the  work  evangelical,  earnest,  and 
quickening. 

The  True  Penitent  Portrayed,  in  a Practical  Exposition  of  the  Fifty-first 
Psalm:  To  which  is  added  the  Doctrine  of  Repentance,  as  declared  in 
Acts  xvii.  30.  By  E.  C.  Wines,  D.  D.,  author  of  “A  Treatise  on  Rege- 
neration,” “Adam  and  Christ,”  &c.  Philadelphia:  Presbyterian  Board 
of  Publication. 

These  momentous  subjects  are  here  elucidated  by  Dr.  Wines, 
in  his  usually  clear  and  instructive  manner.  This  is  an  impor- 
tant service  at  this  time,  when  the  tendency  is  so  strong  to  deal 
with  all  sorts  of  subjects  but  the  spiritual  and  experimental; 
and  to  handle  these  loosely  and  superficially,  and  on  all  other 
sides  except  simply  the  spiritual  and  experimental. 


710 


Short  Notices. 


[October 


Satan’s  Devices,  and  the  Believer’s  Victory.  By  the  Rev.  William  L.  Par- 
sons, A.  M.,  pastor  of  the  Congregational  Church,  Mattapoisett,  Mass. 
Boston:  Gould  & Lincoln.  New  York:  Sheldon  & Co. 

Much  scriptural  truth,  closely  implicated  with  Christian 
experience,  and  which  is  widely  losing  its  hold  of  the  faith,  and 
recognition,  in  the  experience  of  Christians,  is  brought  out  in 
this  volume.  That  Satan  is  a real  person,  of  prodigious  power, 
malignity,  craft — constantly  tasking  his  stupendous  faculties  in 
compassing  the  destruction  of  Christ’s  kingdom,  and  the  eternal 
ruin  of  souls — is  what  multitudes  deny,  and  still  greater  multi- 
tudes ignore.  The  reality  as  well  as  the  form  of  Satan’s 
devices  is  ably  set  forth  in  this  volume,  which  displays  con- 
siderable vigour  and  freshness  of  thought  and  style.  The 
writer  evidently  think's  for  himself,  and  has  no  distrust  of  his 
own  opinions.  He  makes  his  mental  philosophy  quite  con- 
spicuous enough  for  such  an  experimental  work,  while  his 
opinions,  psychological  and  theological,  have  generally  an 
orthodox  tone;  yet  his  views  on  some  subjects  are  not  alto- 
gether ripe  and  well-balanced.  Although  he  has  thought  with 
more  or  less  freedom  upon  them,  he  has  not  yet  thought  him- 
self through.  Surely  no  well-poised  Christian  or  ethical  'guide 
will  try  to  induce  another  to  promise  to  do,  he  knows  not  what, 
as  a condition  of  spiritual  peace.  Pp.  38-40.  But  notwith- 
standing any  such  exceptions,  the  drift  of  the  book  is  sound, 
instructive,  and  edifying. 

Christian  Memorials  of  the  War;  or  Scenes  and  Incidents  illustrating  the 
Religious  Faith  and  Principles,  Patriotism,  and  Bravery  in  our  Army. 
With  Historical  Notes.  By  Horatio  B.  Hackett,  Professor  of  Biblical 
Literature  in  Newton  Theological  Institute,  author  of  “ Illustrations 
of  Scripture,”  “Commentary  on  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles,”  etc.  Boston: 
Gould  it  Lincoln.  New  York:  Sheldon  & Co.  1864. 

The  title  of  this  book  and  the  name  of  its  author  are 
enough  to  evince  its  power  to  fascinate,  while  it  instructs  and 
edifies  the  reader.  Among  the  wonderful  manifestations  which 
relieve  the  darker  horrors  of  the  war,  is  the  unanimity  of  Chris- 
tian people  in  its  support,  because  the  ends  sought  by  it  have 
the  most  earnest  approval  of  the  Christian  conscience;  and  the 
manifold  illustrations  of  moral  and  Christian  heroism,  and 
other  virtues,  which  it  has  furnished.  This  book  is  a collec- 
tion of  the  most  brilliant  examples  of  all  this,  arranged  in 
logical  and  luminous  order. 

Letters  on  the  Ministry  of  the  Gospel.  By  Francis  Wayland.  Boston: 
Gould  & Lincoln.  New  York:  Sheldon  & Co.  1863. 

Of  course  Dr.  Wayland  could  not  write  and  publish  a book 
on  such  a subject  without  giving  many  weighty  counsels 


Short  Notices. 


711 


1864.] 

and  judicious  suggestions  as  to  the  sources  of  ministerial  power 
and  usefulness.  These  we  find  in  abundance  in  this  little 
work.  And  yet  we  think  the  author  exaggerates  the  degene- 
racy of  the  pulpit  now,  as  compared  with  the  past  age — at 
least,  taking  the  whole  country  and  church  into  view — what- 
ever may  be  true  of  the  region  or  communion  most  familiar  to 
himself.  He  is  too  sweeping  in  his  condemnation  of  written 
sermons.  His  counsels  are  shaped  to  the  ecclesiastical  polity 
and  usages  of  the  Baptist  and  Congregational  churches. 


Our  Board  of  Publication  have  issued,  in  a beautiful  style,  a 
number  of  excellent  books  adapted  to  Sunday-school  libraries 
and  family  reading.  We  subjoin  the  titles  of  a number  of  these 
interesting  volumes. 

Irish  Stories.  Good  and  Bad  Men.  Little  Irish  Girls’  Holiday,  &e.  Pp.  287. 
Johnny  McKay ; or  the  Sovereign.  Pp.'216. 

Cherry  Bounce;  or  the  Wise  Management  of  Human  Nature.  Pp.  180. 
Uncle  Alick’s  Sabbath-school.  By  Maxwell.  Pp.  180. 

Teddy,  the  Bill  Poster  ; and  how  he  became  Uncle  Alick’s  right-hand  man. 
By  Maxwell.  Pp.  216. 

Valley  of  Decision ; or  Divine  Teachings  in  a Boarding-School.  A true 
narrative.  By  Mrs.  H.  C.  Knight.  Pp.  79. 

Amy’s  New  Home,  and  other  stories  for  Boys  and  Girls.  Pp.  216, 

Die  School  Days  of  Jennie  Graham.  Pp.  180. 

Emma  Herbert;  or  Be  ye  Perfect.  Pp.  179. 

Charlie  Evans ; or  the  Boy  who  could  not  keep  his  Temper.  Pp.  107. 
Sunshine  for  Gloomy  Hours.  Pp.  216. 

Hatty  Winthrop.  Pp.  106. 

Frank  Netherton;  or  the  Talisman.  Pp.  252. 

Loving  Words.  In  two  Sermons  to  Children.  By  Rev.  Adolph  Monod,  of 
Paris.  Translated  for  the  Presbyterian  Board.  Pp.  96. 

Early  Dawn;  or  Conversion  of  Annie  Herbert.  Pp.  143. 

Susie’s  Mistake,  and  other  Stories.  By  Marian  Butler.  Pp.  216. 

Norah  and  her  Kerry  Cow;  or  the  Bible  the  Best  Guide.  Pp.  144. 

Outside  and  Inside,  and  other  Tales.  By  Frank  Stanley.  Pp.  216. 
Frederick  Gordon;  or  Principle  and  Interest.  Pp.  180. 

Kitty  Foote;  or  the  True  Way  to  Peace.  Pp.  180. 

Frank  Eston;  or  the  Joy  of  Believing  in  Jesus.  By  Mrs.  Caroline  L. 
Blake.  Pp.  144. 

Willie  Maitland;  or  the  Lord’s  Prayer  illustrated.  Pp.  144. 


712  Short  Notices.  [October. 

The  Cap  Makers.  By  the  author  of  “George  Miller,”  “Blind  Annie  Lori- 
mcr,”  &c.  Pp.  180. 

Nannie  Barton.  By  the  same  author.  Pp.  288. 

The  Little  Sea  Bird.  By  the  author  of  “ Mackerel  Will,”  &c.  Pp.  180. 
Norali  Neil;  or  “The  Way  by  which  He  led  thee.”  Pp.  179. 

Aunt  Harriet’s  Tales  about  Little  Words.  By  II.  B.  McKeever,  author  of 
“Jessie  Morrison.” 

The  Brazen  Serpent;  or  Faith  in  Christ  illustrated.  By  Joseph  H.  Jones, 
D.D. 

Life  and  Light;  or  Every-Day  Religion.  By  the  author  of  “ George  Miller,” 
“ Blind  Annie  Lorimer,”  &c. 

Homes  of  the  West,  and  How  they  were  made  Happy.  By  the  author  of 
“Johnny  Wright,”  “Words  of  Wisdom,”  &c. 

The  foregoing  are  recent  additions  made  by  the  Presbyterian 
Board  of  Publication  to  its  excellent  “Series  for  Youth.”  They 
fully  sustain  its  character.  Our  Board  cannot  well  overdo  in 
its  efforts  to  provide  reading,  at  once  useful  and  entertaining, 
for  our  families^nd  Sabbath-schools,  our  children  and  youth. 

We  have  received  several  works  too  late  for  notice,  among 
which  are  the  following  publications  of  the  “Presbyte- 
rian Publication  Committee,  1334  Chestnut  street,  Phila- 
delphia.” 

The  Shepherd  of  Bethlehem.  King  of  Israel.  By  A.  L.  0.  E.  Pp.  440. 

Stories  from  Jewish  History,  from  the  Babylonish  Captivity  to  the  De- 
struction of  Jerusalem  by  Titus.  By  the  same  Author.  Pp.  178. 

The  Communion  Week.  A Course  of  Preparation  for  the  Lord’s  Table. 
By  the  Rev.  Ashton  Oxenden,  of  Pluckley,  England.  Pp.  88. 

The  American  Presbyterian  Almanac  for  1865.  Pp.  48. 

The  Soldier’s  Scrap-Book.  By  the  Rev.  B.  B.  Ilotchkin.  Pp.  60. 


END  OF  VOL.  XXXVI.